WO2019052518A1 - Transmission control method - Google Patents

Transmission control method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019052518A1
WO2019052518A1 PCT/CN2018/105614 CN2018105614W WO2019052518A1 WO 2019052518 A1 WO2019052518 A1 WO 2019052518A1 CN 2018105614 W CN2018105614 W CN 2018105614W WO 2019052518 A1 WO2019052518 A1 WO 2019052518A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
measurement result
group
beam group
identifier
information
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2018/105614
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
张莉莉
李国荣
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN201810180592.8A external-priority patent/CN109526058B/en
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to US16/648,129 priority Critical patent/US11336358B2/en
Priority to JP2020515962A priority patent/JP6993500B2/en
Priority to KR1020207010804A priority patent/KR102339913B1/en
Priority to AU2018331742A priority patent/AU2018331742B2/en
Priority to CA3076154A priority patent/CA3076154C/en
Priority to KR1020217040650A priority patent/KR102444385B1/en
Priority to EP18856580.8A priority patent/EP3675577A4/en
Publication of WO2019052518A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019052518A1/en
Priority to JP2021200052A priority patent/JP7227336B2/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0613Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0615Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal
    • H04B7/0619Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal using feedback from receiving side
    • H04B7/0636Feedback format
    • H04B7/0641Differential feedback
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0613Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0615Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal
    • H04B7/0619Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal using feedback from receiving side
    • H04B7/0621Feedback content
    • H04B7/063Parameters other than those covered in groups H04B7/0623 - H04B7/0634, e.g. channel matrix rank or transmit mode selection
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0613Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0615Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal
    • H04B7/0619Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal using feedback from receiving side
    • H04B7/0621Feedback content
    • H04B7/0632Channel quality parameters, e.g. channel quality indicator [CQI]
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0613Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0615Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal
    • H04B7/0619Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal using feedback from receiving side
    • H04B7/0658Feedback reduction
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0686Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0695Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission using beam selection
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to the field of communications technologies, and in particular, to a method for uplink data transmission, a wireless access network device, and a terminal.
  • the beam group is defined as follows: for one transmission point or multiple transmission points, multiple transmission beams and/or reception beams are divided into beam sets; or, multiple transmission and/or reception beam pairs are divided into beam pairs; or For a terminal, split multiple transmit beams and/or receive beams into beam sets; or divide multiple transmit and/or receive beam pairs into sets of beam pairs.
  • RSRP reference signal reception power
  • the embodiment of the invention provides a data transmission method, a radio access network device and a terminal, which are used for solving the problem of uplink control information reporting and the beam-based uplink without considering the packet-based beam group in the millimeter wave system. Control the problem reported by the information.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a method for data transmission.
  • the method specifically includes: the terminal transmitting the UCI to the radio access network device according to the first format that the uplink control information UCI has; wherein, the UCI sent in the first format includes: at least: the measurement result information of the beam group and the information of the beam group And the beam group includes: a first beam group and a second beam group, where the measurement result information of the beam group includes: a measurement result of the first beam group and a measurement result of the second beam group relative to a measurement result of the first beam group
  • the measurement result of the first beam group is a reference measurement result, and the information of the beam group is used to indicate a beam group corresponding to at least one of the measurement result of the first beam group and the measurement result of the second beam group, the beam Groups are one or more beam groups.
  • the second beam group includes a plurality of corresponding beam groups, and the second beam group includes: a third beam group and a fourth beam group, where the second beam group has a plurality of second beam groups.
  • the measurement result of the second beam group includes: a measurement result corresponding to the third beam group and a measurement result corresponding to the fourth beam group.
  • the second beam group is not limited to include the third beam group and the fourth beam group, and may further include N beam groups, where N is a positive integer. It should be noted that “a plurality of” referred to in the present application means at least two.
  • grouping the beams helps to reduce the cost of beam management.
  • the problem of reporting the uplink control information of the grouped beam group in the millimeter wave system is solved, and the measurement of the grouped beam group is performed, and the uplink control information is reported, the resource is used reasonably, and the overhead of reporting is reduced. .
  • the first beam group includes: a beam group corresponding to a largest measurement value in the beam group; or a beam group corresponding to the smallest measurement value; or a beam group corresponding to the intermediate measurement value.
  • the measurement result of the beam group and the beam group has a one-to-one correspondence, that is, the first beam group has the measurement result of the first beam group, or the measurement result of the first beam group corresponding to the first beam group, first
  • the measurement result of the beam group belongs to the first beam group, or the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the first beam group is the first beam group;
  • the second beam group has the measurement result of the second beam group, or the second beam group
  • the measurement result of the corresponding second beam group is that the measurement result of the second beam group belongs to the second beam group, or the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam group is the second beam group.
  • the intermediate measurement value includes: an average value of the measured value of the beam group; or an average value calculated according to the maximum measured value and the minimum measured value; or a centered distribution among the measured values of the beam group Value.
  • the first beam group includes: a beam group corresponding to a group number of the largest beam group in the beam group; or a beam group corresponding to the group number of the smallest beam group; or, has a middle group The corresponding beam group.
  • the beam group of the intermediate group number is a beam group corresponding to the group number of the medium-distributed group among the group numbers of the plurality of beam groups.
  • the information about the beam group includes: a identifier of a beam group corresponding to at least one of a measurement result of the first beam group and a measurement result of the second beam group, where the beam group And identifying at least one of a beam group identifier of the first beam group to which the reference measurement result belongs and a beam group identifier of the second beam group to which the offset with respect to the reference measurement result belongs.
  • the identifier of the second beam group is a dominant indication
  • the identifier of the second beam group is the identifier of the second beam group; or the identifier of the second beam group is relative to The offset of the identity of the first beam set.
  • the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group relative to the reference measurement result is increased or decreased according to the group number of the beam group.
  • the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group relative to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of odd or ascending order of the group number of the beam group; or the measurement result of the second beam group is relative to the reference.
  • the offset of the measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of odd or descending order of the group number of the beam group; or, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is arranged according to a preset arrangement.
  • the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam group is the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group of the largest group number
  • the second The measurement result of the beam group relative to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in descending order of the group number of the beam group; or the reference beam measurement corresponding to the first beam group is the measurement of the beam group corresponding to the beam group of the smallest group number
  • the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing the group number of the beam group; or, the measurement result of the beam group larger than the preset threshold value is according to a preset arrangement manner.
  • At least one of the foregoing preset threshold and the preset arrangement controls radio resource control (RRC) signaling and media access control signaling by using radio resources (media)
  • RRC radio resource control
  • media media
  • At least one type of signaling in the access control (MAC) signaling is sent from the radio access network device to the terminal; or at least one of a preset threshold and a preset arrangement is preset at the terminal.
  • the method before the step of transmitting, by the terminal, the UCI to the radio access network device according to the first format that the uplink control information UCI has, the method further includes: the terminal receiving the indication information from the radio access network device, the indication The information is used to indicate whether the terminal uses the first beam group as a reference or uses the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference to report the UCI.
  • the indication information when the indication information is used to indicate that the terminal uses the first beam group as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method for determining the first beam group; and when the indication information is used to indicate the terminal usage When the measurement result of a beam group is used as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method of determining a measurement result of the first beam group as a reference measurement result.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the UCI includes an identifier of the beam group or only an identifier of the beam group.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the beam group is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to: indicate, in the UCI that the terminal sends in the first format, that the measurement result information of the beam group is hybrid HARQ multiplexing or the HARQ multiplexing. format.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or the reference signal that is used as a measurement result of the measurement result of the beam group; wherein the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, The synchronization signal resource identifier, the channel status indication at least one of a reference signal CSI-RS or the CSI-RS resource identifier.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a method for data transmission.
  • the method specifically includes: the terminal transmitting the UCI to the radio access network device according to the first format that the uplink control information UCI has; wherein, the UCI sent in the first format includes: at least: measurement result information of the beam and information of the beam
  • the beam includes: a first beam and a second beam
  • the measurement result information of the beam includes: a measurement result of the first beam and an offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the measurement result of the first beam, where the first beam
  • the measurement result is a reference measurement result
  • the information of the beam is used to indicate a beam corresponding to at least one of the measurement result of the first beam and the measurement result of the second beam, the beam being one or more beams.
  • the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam is a plurality of respectively corresponding beams, that is, the second beam includes: a third beam and a fourth beam, and at this time, the second beam
  • the measurement result includes: a measurement result corresponding to the third beam and a measurement result corresponding to the fourth beam.
  • the second beam is not limited to include the third beam and the fourth beam, and may also include N beam groups, where N is a positive integer.
  • the first beam includes: a beam corresponding to the largest measured value in the beam; or a beam corresponding to the smallest measured value; or a beam corresponding to the intermediate measured value.
  • the measurement result of the beam and the beam has a one-to-one correspondence, that is, the first beam has a measurement result of the first beam, or a measurement result of the first beam corresponding to the first beam, and the measurement result of the first beam belongs to the first
  • the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the first beam or the first beam is the first beam;
  • the second beam has the measurement result of the second beam, or the measurement result of the second beam corresponding to the second beam, and the measurement of the second beam
  • the result belongs to the second beam, or the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam is the second beam.
  • the intermediate measurement value includes: an average value of the measured value of the beam; or an average value calculated according to the maximum measured value and the minimum measured value; or a value of the centered distribution among the measured values of the beam .
  • the first beam includes: a beam corresponding to the number of the largest beam in the beam; or a beam corresponding to the number of the smallest beam; or a beam corresponding to the intermediate number.
  • the intermediate numbered beam is a beam corresponding to the number of the centrally distributed number among the plurality of beam numbers.
  • the information about the beam includes: a identifier of a beam corresponding to at least one of a measurement result of the first beam and a measurement result of the second beam, where the identifier of the beam is a reference measurement result. At least one of a beam identifier of the associated first beam and a beam identifier of the second beam to which the offset relative to the reference measurement result belongs.
  • the information about the beam includes: when the identifier of the second beam is a dominant indication, the identifier of the second beam is the identifier of the second beam; or the identifier of the second beam is The offset from the identity of the first beam.
  • the offset of the measurement result of the second beam relative to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the number of the beam;
  • the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of odd or ascending order of the beam number; or the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result according to the beam
  • the number of the odd-numbered descending order or the even-numbered descending order is sequentially arranged; or, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is arranged according to a preset arrangement manner.
  • the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam is the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the largest numbered beam, and the measurement result of the second beam is relatively
  • the offsets of the reference measurement results are sequentially arranged in descending order of the number of the beams; or the reference measurement corresponding to the first beam is the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the smallest numbered beam, and the measurement result of the second beam is relative to the reference measurement
  • the resulting offsets are sequentially arranged in the order in which the number of the beams is incremented; or, the measurement results of the beams larger than the preset threshold are arranged according to a preset arrangement.
  • At least one of the foregoing preset threshold value and the preset arrangement manner is used to obtain radio access by using at least one of radio resource control RRC signaling and media access control signaling.
  • the network device sends to the terminal; or, at least one of a preset threshold and a preset arrangement is preset at the terminal.
  • the method before the step of transmitting, by the terminal, the UCI to the radio access network device according to the first format that the uplink control information UCI has, the method further includes: the terminal receiving the indication information from the radio access network device, the indication The information is used to indicate whether the terminal uses the first beam as a reference or uses the measurement result of the first beam as a reference to report the UCI.
  • the indication information when the indication information is used to indicate that the terminal uses the first beam as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method for determining the first beam; and the indication information is used to indicate that the terminal uses the first beam.
  • the indication information may further include: a method of determining a measurement result of the first beam as a reference measurement result.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the identifier of the beam or the identifier of only the beam is included in the UCI.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the beam is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate that the UCI sent by the terminal in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam and hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ multiplexing or HARQ multiplexing format.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or a reference signal used as a measurement result of the measurement result of the beam; wherein, the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier, The channel status indicates at least one of a reference signal CSI-RS or a CSI-RS resource identifier.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a method for data transmission.
  • the method specifically includes: the radio access network device sends the indication information to the terminal, and the indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal uses the first beam group or uses the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference to report the uplink control information UCI; the radio access network The device receives, from the terminal, the UCI sent in the first format, where the UCI includes at least one of the measurement result information of the beam group and the information of the beam group, where the beam group includes: the first beam group and the second beam group, and the measurement result of the beam group
  • the information includes: a measurement result of the first beam group and an offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the measurement result of the first beam group, the measurement result of the first beam group is a reference measurement result, and the information of the beam group is used for And indicating a beam group corresponding to at least one of a measurement result of the first beam group and a measurement result of the second beam group, the beam group being one or more beam groups
  • the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam is a plurality of respectively corresponding beams, that is, the second beam includes: a third beam and a fourth beam, and at this time, the second beam
  • the measurement result includes: a measurement result corresponding to the third beam and a measurement result corresponding to the fourth beam.
  • the second beam is not limited to include the third beam and the fourth beam, and may also include N beam groups, where N is a positive integer.
  • grouping the beams helps to reduce the cost of beam management.
  • the problem of reporting the uplink control information of the grouped beam group in the millimeter wave system is solved, and the measurement of the grouped beam group is performed, and the uplink control information is reported, the resource is used reasonably, and the overhead of reporting is reduced. .
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the terminal uses the first beam group as a reference or uses the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference to report the UCI.
  • the indication information is further used to: instruct the terminal to determine the first beam group in the multiple beam groups, and report the UCI in the first beam group or using the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference. .
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the terminal determines the first beam group by using a method for determining the first beam group.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the UCI includes an identifier of the beam group or only an identifier of the beam group.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the beam group is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to: indicate, in the UCI that the terminal sends in the first format, that the measurement result information of the beam group is hybrid HARQ multiplexing or the HARQ multiplexing. format.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or the reference signal that is used as a measurement result of the measurement result of the beam group; wherein the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, The synchronization signal resource identifier, the channel status indication at least one of a reference signal CSI-RS or the CSI-RS resource identifier.
  • the foregoing indication information is indicated by at least one of radio resource control signaling, media access control signaling, and physical layer signaling.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a method for data transmission.
  • the method specifically includes: the radio access network device sends the indication information to the terminal, where the indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal uses the first beam or uses the measurement result of the first beam as a reference to report the uplink control information UCI;
  • the terminal receives the UCI transmitted in the first format, where the UCI includes at least one of the measurement result information of the beam and the information of the beam, the beam includes: a first beam and a second beam, and the measurement result information of the beam includes: measurement of the first beam The result and the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the measurement result of the first beam, the measurement result of the first beam is a reference measurement result, and the information of the beam is used to indicate the measurement result of the first beam and the second beam A beam corresponding to at least one of the measurement results, the beam being one or more beams.
  • the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam is a plurality of respectively corresponding beams, that is, the second beam includes: a third beam and a fourth beam, and at this time, the second beam
  • the measurement result includes: a measurement result corresponding to the third beam and a measurement result corresponding to the fourth beam.
  • the second beam is not limited to include the third beam and the fourth beam, and may also include N beam groups, where N is a positive integer.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the terminal uses the first beam as a reference or uses the measurement result of the first beam as a reference to report the UCI.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate that the terminal determines the first beam in the multiple beams, and reports the UCI by using the first beam or the measurement result of the first beam as a reference.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the terminal determines the first beam group by using a method for determining the first beam group.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the identifier of the beam or the identifier of only the beam is included in the UCI.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the beam is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate that the UCI sent by the terminal in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam and hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ multiplexing or HARQ multiplexing format.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or a reference signal used as a measurement result of the measurement result of the beam; wherein, the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier, The channel status indicates at least one of a reference signal CSI-RS or a CSI-RS resource identifier.
  • the foregoing indication information is indicated by at least one of radio resource control signaling, media access control signaling, and physical layer signaling.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a terminal.
  • the terminal may include: a transceiver, configured to send the UCI to the radio access network device according to the first format that the uplink control information UCI has; wherein the UCI sent in the first format includes: the measurement result information and the beam group of the beam group At least one of the information, the beam group includes: a first beam group and a second beam group, and the measurement result information of the beam group includes: a measurement result of the first beam group and a measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the first beam group
  • the offset of the measurement result, the measurement result of the first beam group is a reference measurement result, and the information of the beam group is used to indicate that the measurement result of the first beam group corresponds to at least one of the measurement results of the second beam group A beam group, the beam group being one or more beam groups.
  • the second beam group includes a plurality of corresponding beam groups, and the second beam group includes: a third beam group and a fourth beam group, where the second beam group has a plurality of second beam groups.
  • the measurement result of the second beam group includes: a measurement result corresponding to the third beam group and a measurement result corresponding to the fourth beam group.
  • the second beam group is not limited to include the third beam group and the fourth beam group, and may further include N beam groups, where N is a positive integer.
  • grouping the beams helps to reduce the cost of beam management.
  • the problem of reporting the uplink control information of the grouped beam group in the millimeter wave system is solved, and the measurement of the grouped beam group is performed, and the uplink control information is reported, the resource is used reasonably, and the overhead of reporting is reduced. .
  • the first beam group includes: a beam group corresponding to a largest measurement value in the beam group; or a beam group corresponding to the smallest measurement value; or a beam group corresponding to the intermediate measurement value.
  • the measurement result of the beam group and the beam group has a one-to-one correspondence, that is, the first beam group has the measurement result of the first beam group, or the measurement result of the first beam group corresponding to the first beam group, first
  • the measurement result of the beam group belongs to the first beam group, or the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the first beam group is the first beam group;
  • the second beam group has the measurement result of the second beam group, or the second beam group
  • the measurement result of the corresponding second beam group is that the measurement result of the second beam group belongs to the second beam group, or the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam group is the second beam group.
  • the intermediate measurement value includes: an average value of the measured value of the beam group; or an average value calculated according to the maximum measured value and the minimum measured value; or a centered distribution among the measured values of the beam group Value.
  • the first beam group includes: a beam group corresponding to a group number of the largest beam group in the beam group; or a beam group corresponding to the group number of the smallest beam group; or, has a middle group The corresponding beam group.
  • the beam group of the intermediate group number is a beam group corresponding to the group number of the medium-distributed group among the group numbers of the plurality of beam groups.
  • the information about the beam group includes: a identifier of a beam group corresponding to at least one of a measurement result of the first beam group and a measurement result of the second beam group, where the beam group And identifying at least one of a beam group identifier of the first beam group to which the reference measurement result belongs and a beam group identifier of the second beam group to which the offset with respect to the reference measurement result belongs.
  • the processor is further configured to: when the identifier of the second beam group is an explicit indication, the identifier of the second beam group is the identifier of the second beam group; or, the second The identity of the beam set is an offset from the identity of the first beam set.
  • the processor is further configured to determine, when the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group relative to the reference measurement result according to the beam group
  • the group numbers are sequentially arranged in descending or decreasing order; or, the offsets of the measurement results of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result are sequentially arranged in the order of odd or ascending order of the group number of the beam group; or, the second beam
  • the offset of the measurement result of the group relative to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of odd or descending order of the group number of the beam group; or the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is preset according to the preset Arrange the arrangement.
  • the processor is further configured to determine, when the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam group is a beam corresponding to the beam group of the largest group number.
  • the measurement result of the group, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group relative to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in descending order of the group number of the beam group; or the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam group is the beam of the smallest group number
  • the measurement result of the corresponding beam group of the group, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing the group number of the beam group; or, for the beam group larger than the preset threshold value
  • the measurement results are arranged according to a preset arrangement.
  • At least one of the foregoing preset threshold value and the preset arrangement manner is used to obtain radio access by using at least one of radio resource control RRC signaling and media access control signaling.
  • the network device sends to the terminal; or, at least one of a preset threshold and a preset arrangement is preset at the terminal.
  • the transceiver is further configured to receive indication information from the radio access network device, and the indication information is used to indicate whether the processor uses the first beam group as a reference or uses the first beam group.
  • the measurement results are reported to UCI as a reference.
  • the indication information when the indication information is used to indicate that the processor uses the first beam group as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method for determining the first beam group; and when the indication information is used to indicate the processor When the measurement result of the first beam group is used as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method of determining a measurement result of the first beam group as a reference measurement result.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the UCI includes an identifier of the beam group or only an identifier of the beam group.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the beam group is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to: indicate, in the UCI that the transceiver sends in the first format, that: the measurement result information of the beam group and the hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ multiplexing or the HARQ multiplexing format .
  • the indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or a reference signal used as a measurement result of the measurement result of the beam group; wherein the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier
  • the channel status indicates at least one of a reference signal CSI-RS or a CSI-RS resource identifier.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a terminal.
  • the terminal may include: a transceiver, configured to send the UCI to the radio access network device according to the first format that the uplink control information UCI has; wherein the UCI sent in the first format includes: the measurement result information of the beam and the information of the beam At least one of the beams includes: a first beam and a second beam, and the measurement result information of the beam includes: a measurement result of the first beam and an offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the measurement result of the first beam,
  • the measurement result of one beam is a reference measurement result, and the information of the beam is used to indicate a beam corresponding to at least one of the measurement result of the first beam and the measurement result of the second beam, the beam being one or more beams.
  • the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam is a plurality of respectively corresponding beams, that is, the second beam includes: a third beam and a fourth beam, and at this time, the second beam
  • the measurement result includes: a measurement result corresponding to the third beam and a measurement result corresponding to the fourth beam.
  • the second beam is not limited to include the third beam and the fourth beam, and may also include N beam groups, where N is a positive integer.
  • the first beam includes: a beam corresponding to the largest measured value in the beam; or a beam corresponding to the smallest measured value; or a beam corresponding to the intermediate measured value.
  • the measurement result of the beam and the beam has a one-to-one correspondence, that is, the first beam has a measurement result of the first beam, or a measurement result of the first beam corresponding to the first beam, and the measurement result of the first beam belongs to the first
  • the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the first beam or the first beam is the first beam;
  • the second beam has the measurement result of the second beam, or the measurement result of the second beam corresponding to the second beam, and the measurement of the second beam
  • the result belongs to the second beam, or the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam is the second beam.
  • the intermediate measurement value includes: an average value of the measured value of the beam; or an average value calculated according to the maximum measured value and the minimum measured value; or a value of the centered distribution among the measured values of the beam .
  • the processor is further configured to: the first beam includes: a beam corresponding to a number of the largest beam in the beam; or a beam corresponding to the number of the smallest beam; or, with a middle number corresponding Beam.
  • the intermediate numbered beam is a beam corresponding to the number of the centrally distributed number among the plurality of beam numbers.
  • the information about the beam includes: a identifier of a beam corresponding to at least one of a measurement result of the first beam and a measurement result of the second beam, where the identifier of the beam is a reference measurement result. At least one of a beam identifier of the associated first beam and a beam identification beam of the second beam to which the offset relative to the reference measurement result belongs.
  • the processor is further configured to: when the identifier of the second beam is a dominant indication, the identifier of the second beam is the identifier of the second beam; or the identifier of the second beam Is the offset from the identity of the first beam.
  • the processor is further configured to determine that when the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam relative to the reference measurement is incremented by the number of the beam. Or the order of decreasing is sequentially arranged; or, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of odd or ascending order of the beam number; or the measurement result of the second beam is compared with the reference measurement The offset of the result is sequentially arranged in the order of odd or descending order of the number of the beam; or, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement is arranged according to a preset arrangement.
  • the processor is further configured to: when the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam is a measurement result of a beam corresponding to the largest numbered beam, The measurement result of the second beam is sequentially arranged in the order of decreasing the number of the beam with respect to the offset of the reference measurement result; or the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam is the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam of the smallest number, the second beam The measurement results are sequentially arranged in the order of increasing the number of the beams with respect to the reference measurement result; or, the measurement results of the beams larger than the preset threshold are arranged according to a preset arrangement.
  • At least one of the foregoing preset threshold value and the preset arrangement manner is used to obtain radio access by using at least one of radio resource control RRC signaling and media access control signaling.
  • the network device sends to the terminal; or, at least one of a preset threshold and a preset arrangement is preset at the terminal.
  • the transceiver is further configured to receive indication information from the radio access network device, and the indication information is used to indicate whether the processor uses the first beam as a reference or uses the measurement result of the first beam. Reported to UCI as a reference.
  • the indication information when the indication information is used to indicate that the processor uses the first beam as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method for determining the first beam; and when the indication information is used to indicate that the processor uses the When the measurement result of a beam is used as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method of determining a measurement result of the first beam as a reference measurement result.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the identifier of the beam or the identifier of only the beam is included in the UCI.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the beam is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to: indicate, in the UCI that the transceiver sends in the first format, the measurement result information of the beam and the hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ multiplexing or the HARQ multiplexing format.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or a reference signal used as a measurement result of the measurement result of the beam; wherein, the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier, The channel status indicates at least one of a reference signal CSI-RS or a CSI-RS resource identifier.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a radio access network device.
  • the radio access network device may include: a transceiver, configured to send the indication information to the terminal, where the indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal uses the first beam group or uses the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference to report the uplink control information UCI.
  • the transceiver is further configured to receive, by the terminal, the UCI sent in the first format, where the UCI includes: at least one of the measurement result information of the beam group and the information of the beam group, where the beam group includes: the first beam group and the second beam group
  • the measurement result information of the beam group includes: a measurement result of the first beam group and an offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the measurement result of the first beam group, and the measurement result of the first beam group is a reference measurement result
  • the information of the beam group is used to indicate a beam group corresponding to at least one of the measurement result of the first beam group and the measurement result of the second beam group, the beam group being one or more beam groups.
  • the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam is a plurality of respectively corresponding beams, that is, the second beam includes: a third beam and a fourth beam, and at this time, the second beam
  • the measurement result includes: a measurement result corresponding to the third beam and a measurement result corresponding to the fourth beam.
  • the second beam is not limited to include the third beam and the fourth beam, and may also include N beam groups, where N is a positive integer.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the terminal uses the first beam group as a reference or uses the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference to report the UCI.
  • the indication information is further used to: instruct the terminal to determine the first beam group in the multiple beam groups, and report the UCI in the first beam group or using the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference. .
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the terminal determines the first beam group by using a method for determining the first beam group.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the UCI includes an identifier of the beam group or only an identifier of the beam group.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the beam group is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to: indicate, in the UCI that the terminal sends in the first format, that the measurement result information of the beam group is hybrid HARQ multiplexing or the HARQ multiplexing. format.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or the reference signal that is used as a measurement result of the measurement result of the beam group; wherein the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, The synchronization signal resource identifier, the channel status indication at least one of a reference signal CSI-RS or the CSI-RS resource identifier.
  • the foregoing indication information is indicated by at least one of radio resource control signaling, media access control signaling, and physical layer signaling.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a radio access network device.
  • the radio access network device may include: a transceiver, configured to send the indication information to the terminal, where the indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal uses the first beam or uses the measurement result of the first beam as a reference to report the uplink control information UCI;
  • the device is further configured to receive, by the terminal, the UCI sent in the first format, where the UCI includes at least one of the measurement result information of the beam and the information of the beam, where the beam includes: the first beam and the second beam, and the measurement result information of the beam includes The measurement result of the first beam and the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the measurement result of the first beam, the measurement result of the first beam is a reference measurement result, and the information of the beam is used to indicate the measurement of the first beam
  • the result is a beam corresponding to at least one of the measurements of the second beam, the beam being one or more beams.
  • the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam is a plurality of respectively corresponding beams, that is, the second beam includes: a third beam and a fourth beam, and at this time, the second beam
  • the measurement result includes: a measurement result corresponding to the third beam and a measurement result corresponding to the fourth beam.
  • the second beam is not limited to include the third beam and the fourth beam, and may also include N beam groups, where N is a positive integer.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the terminal uses the first beam as a reference or uses the measurement result of the first beam as a reference to report the UCI.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate that the terminal determines the first beam in the multiple beams, and reports the UCI by using the first beam or the measurement result of the first beam as a reference.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the terminal determines the first beam group by using a method for determining the first beam group.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the identifier of the beam or the identifier of only the beam is included in the UCI.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the beam is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate that the UCI sent by the terminal in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam and hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ multiplexing or HARQ multiplexing format.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or a reference signal used as a measurement result of the measurement result of the beam; wherein, the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier, The channel status indicates at least one of a reference signal CSI-RS or a CSI-RS resource identifier.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a terminal.
  • the terminal may include: a transceiver unit, configured to send the UCI to the radio access network device according to the first format that the uplink control information UCI has; wherein the UCI sent in the first format includes: the measurement result information and the beam group of the beam group At least one of the information, the beam group includes: a first beam group and a second beam group, and the measurement result information of the beam group includes: a measurement result of the first beam group and a measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the first beam group
  • the offset of the measurement result, the measurement result of the first beam group is a reference measurement result, and the information of the beam group is used to indicate that the measurement result of the first beam group corresponds to at least one of the measurement results of the second beam group A beam group, the beam group being one or more beam groups.
  • the second beam group includes a plurality of corresponding beam groups, and the second beam group includes: a third beam group and a fourth beam group, where the second beam group has a plurality of second beam groups.
  • the measurement result of the second beam group includes: a measurement result corresponding to the third beam group and a measurement result corresponding to the fourth beam group.
  • the second beam group is not limited to include the third beam group and the fourth beam group, and may further include N beam groups, where N is a positive integer.
  • grouping the beams helps to reduce the cost of beam management.
  • the problem of reporting the uplink control information of the grouped beam group in the millimeter wave system is solved, and the measurement of the grouped beam group is performed, and the uplink control information is reported, the resource is used reasonably, and the overhead of reporting is reduced. (overhead).
  • the foregoing terminal further includes: the first beam group includes: a beam group corresponding to the largest measured value in the beam group; or a beam group corresponding to the smallest measured value; or, with an intermediate measurement value Corresponding beam group.
  • the measurement result of the beam group and the beam group has a one-to-one correspondence, that is, the first beam group has the measurement result of the first beam group, or the measurement result of the first beam group corresponding to the first beam group, first The measurement result of the beam group belongs to the first beam group, or the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the first beam group is the first beam group; the second beam group has the measurement result of the second beam group, or the second beam group
  • the measurement result of the corresponding second beam group is that the measurement result of the second beam group belongs to the second beam group, or the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam group is the second beam group.
  • the intermediate measurement value includes: an average value of the measured value of the beam group; or an average value calculated according to the maximum measured value and the minimum measured value; or a centered distribution among the measured values of the beam group Value.
  • the first beam group includes: a beam group corresponding to a group number of the largest beam group in the beam group; or a beam group corresponding to the group number of the smallest beam group; or, has a middle group The corresponding beam group.
  • the beam group of the intermediate group number is a beam group corresponding to the group number of the medium-distributed group among the group numbers of the plurality of beam groups.
  • the information about the beam group includes: a identifier of a beam group corresponding to at least one of a measurement result of the first beam group and a measurement result of the second beam group, where the beam group And identifying at least one of a beam group identifier of the first beam group to which the reference measurement result belongs and a beam group identifier of the second beam group to which the offset with respect to the reference measurement result belongs.
  • the processing unit is further configured to: when the identifier of the second beam group is an explicit indication, the identifier of the second beam group is the identifier of the second beam group; or, the second The identity of the beam set is an offset from the identity of the first beam set.
  • the processing unit is further configured to determine, when the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group relative to the reference measurement result according to the beam group
  • the group numbers are sequentially arranged in descending or decreasing order; or, the offsets of the measurement results of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result are sequentially arranged in the order of odd or ascending order of the group number of the beam group; or, the second beam
  • the offset of the measurement result of the group relative to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of odd or descending order of the group number of the beam group; or the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is preset according to the preset Arrange the arrangement.
  • the processing unit is further configured to: when the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam group is a beam corresponding to the beam group of the largest group number.
  • the measurement result of the group, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group relative to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in descending order of the group number of the beam group; or the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam group is the beam of the smallest group number
  • the measurement result of the corresponding beam group of the group, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing the group number of the beam group; or, for the beam group larger than the preset threshold value
  • the measurement results are arranged according to a preset arrangement.
  • At least one of the foregoing preset threshold value and the preset arrangement manner is used to obtain radio access by using at least one of radio resource control RRC signaling and media access control signaling.
  • the network device sends to the terminal; or, at least one of a preset threshold and a preset arrangement is preset at the terminal.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to: receive, by the radio access network device, indication information, the indication information, used to indicate whether the processing unit uses the first beam group as a reference or uses the first beam group.
  • the measurement results are reported to UCI as a reference.
  • the indication information when the indication information is used to indicate that the processing unit uses the first beam group as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method for determining the first beam group; and when the indication information is used to indicate the processing unit When the measurement result of the first beam group is used as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method of determining a measurement result of the first beam group as a reference measurement result.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the UCI includes an identifier of the beam group or only an identifier of the beam group.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the beam group is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to: indicate, in the UCI that the transceiver unit sends in the first format, that: the measurement result information of the beam group and the hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ multiplexing or the HARQ multiplexing format .
  • the indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or a reference signal used as a measurement result of the measurement result of the beam group; wherein the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier
  • the channel status indicates at least one of a reference signal CSI-RS or a CSI-RS resource identifier.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a terminal.
  • the terminal may specifically include: a transceiver unit, configured to send the UCI to the radio access network device according to the first format that the uplink control information UCI has; wherein the UCI sent in the first format includes: the measurement result information of the beam and the information of the beam At least one of the beams includes: a first beam and a second beam, and the measurement result information of the beam includes: a measurement result of the first beam and an offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the measurement result of the first beam,
  • the measurement result of one beam is a reference measurement result, and the information of the beam is used to indicate a beam corresponding to at least one of the measurement result of the first beam and the measurement result of the second beam, the beam being one or more beams.
  • the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam is a plurality of respectively corresponding beams, that is, the second beam includes: a third beam and a fourth beam, and at this time, the second beam
  • the measurement result includes: a measurement result corresponding to the third beam and a measurement result corresponding to the fourth beam.
  • the second beam is not limited to include the third beam and the fourth beam, and may also include N beam groups, where N is a positive integer.
  • the first beam includes: a beam corresponding to the largest measured value in the beam; or a beam corresponding to the smallest measured value; or a beam corresponding to the intermediate measured value.
  • the measurement result of the beam and the beam has a one-to-one correspondence, that is, the first beam has a measurement result of the first beam, or a measurement result of the first beam corresponding to the first beam, and the measurement result of the first beam belongs to the first
  • the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the first beam or the first beam is the first beam;
  • the second beam has the measurement result of the second beam, or the measurement result of the second beam corresponding to the second beam, and the measurement of the second beam
  • the result belongs to the second beam, or the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam is the second beam.
  • the intermediate measurement value includes: an average value of the measured value of the beam; or an average value calculated according to the maximum measured value and the minimum measured value; or a value of the centered distribution among the measured values of the beam .
  • the processing unit is further configured to: the first beam includes: a beam corresponding to the number of the largest beam in the beam; or a beam corresponding to the number of the smallest beam; or, with a middle number corresponding Beam.
  • the intermediate numbered beam is a beam corresponding to the number of the centrally distributed number among the plurality of beam numbers.
  • the information about the beam includes: a identifier of a beam corresponding to at least one of a measurement result of the first beam and a measurement result of the second beam, where the identifier of the beam is a reference measurement result. At least one of a beam identifier of the associated first beam and a beam identification beam of the second beam to which the offset relative to the reference measurement result belongs.
  • the processing unit is further configured to: when the identifier of the second beam is a dominant indication, the identifier of the second beam is the identifier of the second beam; or the identifier of the second beam Is the offset from the identity of the first beam.
  • the processing unit is further configured to: when the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam relative to the reference measurement is increased according to the number of the beam. Or the order of decreasing is sequentially arranged; or, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of odd or ascending order of the beam number; or the measurement result of the second beam is compared with the reference measurement
  • the offset of the result is sequentially arranged in the order of odd or descending order of the number of the beam; or, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement is arranged according to a preset arrangement.
  • the processing unit is further configured to: when the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam is a measurement result of a beam corresponding to the largest numbered beam, The measurement result of the second beam is sequentially arranged in the order of decreasing the number of the beam with respect to the offset of the reference measurement result; or the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam is the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam of the smallest number, the second beam The measurement results are sequentially arranged in the order of increasing the number of the beams with respect to the reference measurement result; or, the measurement results of the beams larger than the preset threshold are arranged according to a preset arrangement.
  • At least one of the foregoing preset threshold value and the preset arrangement manner is used to obtain radio access by using at least one of radio resource control RRC signaling and media access control signaling.
  • the network device sends to the terminal; or, at least one of a preset threshold and a preset arrangement is preset at the terminal.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to: receive, by the radio access network device, indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate whether the processing unit uses the first beam as a reference or uses the measurement result of the first beam. Reported to UCI as a reference.
  • the indication information when the indication information is used to indicate that the processing unit uses the first beam as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method for determining the first beam; and when the indication information is used to indicate that the processing unit uses the When the measurement result of a beam is used as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method of determining a measurement result of the first beam as a reference measurement result.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the identifier of the beam or the identifier of only the beam is included in the UCI.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the beam is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate that the UCI sent by the transceiver unit in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam and hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ multiplexing or HARQ multiplexing format.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or a reference signal used as a measurement result of the measurement result of the beam; wherein, the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier, The channel status indicates at least one of a reference signal CSI-RS or a CSI-RS resource identifier.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a radio access network device.
  • the radio access network device may include: a transceiver unit, configured to send the indication information to the terminal, where the indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal uses the first beam group or uses the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference to report the uplink control information UCI.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to: receive, by the terminal, the UCI sent in the first format, where the UCI includes: at least one of the measurement result information of the beam group and the information of the beam group, where the beam group includes: the first beam group and the second beam group
  • the measurement result information of the beam group includes: a measurement result of the first beam group and an offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the measurement result of the first beam group, and the measurement result of the first beam group is a reference measurement result
  • the information of the beam group is used to indicate a beam group corresponding to at least one of the measurement result of the first beam group and the measurement result of the second beam group, the beam group being one or more beam groups.
  • the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam is a plurality of respectively corresponding beams, that is, the second beam includes: a third beam and a fourth beam, and at this time, the second beam
  • the measurement result includes: a measurement result corresponding to the third beam and a measurement result corresponding to the fourth beam.
  • the second beam is not limited to include the third beam and the fourth beam, and may also include N beam groups, where N is a positive integer.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the terminal uses the first beam group as a reference or uses the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference to report the UCI.
  • the indication information is further used to: instruct the terminal to determine the first beam group in the multiple beam groups, and report the UCI in the first beam group or using the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference. .
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the terminal determines the first beam group by using a method for determining the first beam group.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the UCI includes an identifier of the beam group or only an identifier of the beam group.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the beam group is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to: indicate, in the UCI that the terminal sends in the first format, that the measurement result information of the beam group is hybrid HARQ multiplexing or the HARQ multiplexing. format.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or the reference signal that is used as a measurement result of the measurement result of the beam group; wherein the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, The synchronization signal resource identifier, the channel status indication at least one of a reference signal CSI-RS or the CSI-RS resource identifier.
  • the foregoing indication information is indicated by at least one of radio resource control signaling, media access control signaling, and physical layer signaling.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a radio access network device.
  • the radio access network device may include: a transceiver unit, configured to send the indication information to the terminal, where the indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal uses the first beam or uses the measurement result of the first beam as a reference to report the uplink control information UCI;
  • the unit is further configured to: receive, by the terminal, the UCI sent in the first format, where the UCI includes at least one of the measurement result information of the beam and the information of the beam, where the beam includes: the first beam and the second beam, and the measurement result information of the beam includes The measurement result of the first beam and the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the measurement result of the first beam, the measurement result of the first beam is a reference measurement result, and the information of the beam is used to indicate the measurement of the first beam
  • the result is a beam corresponding to at least one of the measurements of the second beam, the beam being one or more beams.
  • the second beam when the second beam is multiple, the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam is a plurality of respectively corresponding beams, that is, the second beam includes: a third beam and a fourth beam, and at this time, the second beam
  • the measurement result includes: a measurement result corresponding to the third beam and a measurement result corresponding to the fourth beam.
  • the second beam is not limited to include the third beam and the fourth beam, and may also include N beam groups, where N is a positive integer.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the terminal uses the first beam as a reference or uses the measurement result of the first beam as a reference to report the UCI.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate that the terminal determines the first beam in the multiple beams, and reports the UCI by using the first beam or the measurement result of the first beam as a reference.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the terminal determines the first beam group by using a method for determining the first beam group.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the identifier of the beam or the identifier of only the beam is included in the UCI.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the beam is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate that the UCI sent by the terminal in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam and hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ multiplexing or HARQ multiplexing format.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or a reference signal used as a measurement result of the measurement result of the beam; wherein, the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier, The channel status indicates at least one of a reference signal CSI-RS or a CSI-RS resource identifier.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a computer storage medium, where the computer storage medium stores an instruction, when the computer is running on a computer, causing the computer to perform any one of the first aspect and the second aspect.
  • the computer storage medium stores an instruction, when the computer is running on a computer, causing the computer to perform any one of the first aspect and the second aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a computer program product, comprising: instructions, when executed by a computer, causing a computer to perform any one of the first aspect and the second aspect described above The method described in the design.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a computer program, comprising instructions, when executed by a computer, causing a computer to perform any one of the first aspect and the second aspect described above. The method described in the design.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a data transmission method based on a beam group according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of another data transmission method based on a beam group according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of a data transmission method based on a beam according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of another data transmission method based on a beam according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal based on a beam group according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a beam-based terminal according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • Embodiments of the present invention provide a data transmission method, a radio access network device, and a terminal, which perform the measurement on the grouped beam group and then transmit the UCI in the first format, thereby solving the problem not based on the millimeter wave system.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the communication system includes a radio access network device 01 and a terminal 02.
  • the number of terminals 02 may be more than one, and FIG. 1 shows an example for illustration.
  • the techniques described in the embodiments of the present invention can be used in high frequency systems, or other frequency domain wireless communication systems. In addition, it can also be applied to the fifth generation 5G system or the new radio (NR) system.
  • NR new radio
  • the radio access network device 01 involved in the present application is a network device deployed in a radio access network to provide a wireless communication function for a terminal.
  • the radio access network device 01 may include various forms: a 5G base station, a new radio point base station (new radio eNB or eNodeB), a transmission and reception point (TRP), a macro base station, a micro base station, a relay station, and a high frequency.
  • New radio eNB or eNodeB new radio point base station
  • TRP transmission and reception point
  • macro base station a macro base station
  • micro base station a micro base station
  • a relay station and a high frequency.
  • LTE long term evolution
  • the names of devices with base station functions may be different, for example, in an LTE network, called an evolved NodeB (eNB or eNodeB), in the fifth generation.
  • eNB evolved NodeB
  • eNodeB evolved NodeB
  • 5G or NR network it is called a new radio node B (NR-NB) or the like.
  • the terminal 02 referred to in the present application may include various handheld devices having a wireless communication function, an in-vehicle device, a wearable device (WD), a computing device, or other processing device connected to the wireless modem, and various A form of mobile station (MS), terminal, terminal equipment, and the like.
  • MS mobile station
  • the above-mentioned terminal in the present application may be exemplified as a UE, and the above-mentioned radio access network device that provides a wireless communication function for the UE may be exemplified as a base station.
  • packet-based beams will be studied in the context of 5G, wherein the definition of beam groups in this application is as follows: for one transmission point or multiple transmission points, at least one of multiple transmission beams and reception beams is split into beams A set; or, splitting at least one of the plurality of transmit and receive beam pairs into a set of beam pairs. For one UE, at least one of a plurality of transmission beams and reception beams is divided into a beam set; or, at least one of the plurality of transmission and reception beam pairs is divided into a set of beam pairs.
  • the beam group may include at least one beam.
  • the packet may be that the base station groups the beam to determine the beam group or the UE groups the beam to determine the beam group.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a data transmission method based on a beam group according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 is an example in which the UE reports the uplink control information UCI according to at least one of the first beam group and the first beam group in the at least one beam group.
  • this embodiment includes steps S210-S230, as follows:
  • S210 The UE acquires indication information.
  • the UE acquisition indication information may be obtained by receiving indication information from the base station or according to information pre-configured at the UE.
  • the indication information may include any one or more of the following contents. It should be noted that any one or more of the following may be acquired from the base station and the remaining ones are preset:
  • the indication information may be used to indicate whether the UE performs reporting based on the beam group.
  • the indication information may also be used to indicate whether the UE groups the beams having the same feature into one group.
  • the same feature may be the same subcarrier spacing, the same waveform, or a set of measured values, any one or more of these features.
  • the indication information may also be used to indicate whether the UE uses the first beam group as a reference or uses the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference to report the UCI, and the measurement result of the first beam group is the reference measurement result.
  • the method for determining to use the first beam group as a reference may include: the first beam group may be a beam group having a largest group number, or a beam group having a minimum group number, or a beam group having an intermediate group number.
  • the first beam set can also be the beam set with the largest measured value, or the beam set with the smallest measured value, or a beam set with intermediate measurements.
  • the method for determining the measurement result using the first beam group as the reference measurement result may include: the measurement result of the first beam group may be the measurement result of the beam group having the largest group number, or the measurement result of the beam group having the smallest group number, Or the measurement result of the beam group with the intermediate group number.
  • the measurement result of the first beam group may be the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the largest measurement value, or the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest measurement value, or the beam group corresponding to the intermediate measurement value.
  • the measured value may be a value corresponding to the measurement result, or the measured value may obtain a corresponding measurement result based on the mapping relationship.
  • the method for determining an intermediate measurement value includes: determining an intermediate measurement value according to an average value calculated by the plurality of measurement values or an average value calculated according to the maximum measurement value and the minimum measurement value among the measurement values of the plurality of beam groups; Alternatively, the value of the centered distribution among the measurements of the plurality of beam sets is selected as the intermediate measurement result value.
  • the indication information may also be used to indicate that the UCI sent by the UE in the first format includes: the identifier of the beam group is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
  • the indication information may further include: a method of determining the first beam group;
  • the indication information may further include: a method of determining that the measurement result of the first beam group is a reference measurement result.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate whether the identifier of the beam group is included in the UCI, or only the identifier of the beam group.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the beam group is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate that the UCI sent by the UE in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam group and hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ multiplexing or HARQ multiplexing format.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or a reference signal as a basis for reporting a measurement result of the beam group; wherein the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier, a channel state indication reference signal CSI-RS or At least one of the CSI-RS resource identifiers.
  • the indication information may be performed by using at least one of radio resource control (RRC) signaling, media access control (MAC) signaling, or physical layer signaling. Instructed.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • MAC media access control
  • the UE determines, according to the indication information, that the first beam group is used as a reference, or uses the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference.
  • the UE measures each beam, divides into a beam group, and determines a beam group identifier and a measurement result of the corresponding beam group for the divided beam group.
  • the split beam group is that the UE divides the beams containing the same feature into one group according to the indication information, and divides the remaining beams that do not include the same feature into one group.
  • a beam that does not include the same feature one case may be a beam group having only one beam, and the beam group includes only one beam.
  • beam grouping may be performed according to whether each beam has the same subcarrier spacing, beams having the same subcarrier spacing are divided into one beam group; or, depending on whether they have the same waveform Beam grouping is performed, beams having the same waveform are divided into one beam group; or beams are grouped according to whether or not there are similar measurement values, and beams having similar measurement values are divided into one beam group.
  • the measurement result of the corresponding beam group is determined according to the measured value of each beam, and the measurement value of the beam group is derived, and the measurement result of the beam group is obtained by the mapping relationship or the correspondence between the measurement value and the measurement result.
  • the measured values of the beam set are derived from the measured values of the individual beams and are derived from linear or non-linear functions.
  • the manner in which the UE determines the first beam group may include: the UE determines that the beam group having the largest group number is the first beam group; or the UE determines that the beam group having the smallest group number is the first beam group; or the UE determines that the group has the intermediate group The beam group of the number is the first beam group.
  • the UE when the indication information indicates that the first beam group is used as the reference, and the method of determining the first beam group is to select the beam group having the largest group number as the first beam group, the UE according to the indication information Determining that the beam group having the largest group number is the first beam group;
  • the UE when the indication information indicates that the first beam group is used as the reference, and the method of determining the first beam group is to select the beam group having the smallest group number as the first beam group, the UE according to the indication information Determining that the beam group having the smallest group number is the first beam group;
  • the method of determining the first beam group is to select the beam group having the intermediate group number as the first beam group, the UE according to the indication information The beam group having the intermediate group number is determined to be the first beam group.
  • the manner in which the UE determines the first beam group may further include: the UE determines that the beam group having the largest measurement value is the first beam group; or the UE determines that the beam group having the smallest measurement value is the first beam group; or the UE determines to have the middle
  • the beam set of measured values is the first beam set.
  • the UE when the indication information indicates that the first beam group is used as the reference, and the method of determining the first beam group is to select the beam group having the largest measurement value as the first beam group, the UE according to the indication information Determining that the beam group having the largest measurement value is the first beam group;
  • the UE when the indication information indicates that the first beam group is used as the reference, and the method of determining the first beam group is to select the beam group having the smallest measurement value as the first beam group, the UE according to the indication information Determining that the beam group having the smallest measurement value is the first beam group;
  • the method of determining the first beam group is to select the beam group having the intermediate measurement value as the first beam group, the UE according to the indication information The beam group having the intermediate measurement value is determined to be the first beam group.
  • the manner in which the UE determines the reference measurement result may be multiple, and specifically includes:
  • the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the intermediate measurement value is selected as the reference measurement result.
  • the method for determining an intermediate measurement value includes: determining an intermediate measurement value according to an average value calculated by multiple measurement values or an average value calculated according to the maximum measurement value and the minimum measurement value among the measurement values of the multiple beam groups; or The value of the centered distribution among the measured values of the plurality of beam sets is selected as the intermediate measurement result value.
  • the beam group except the first beam group in the multiple beam groups becomes the second beam group
  • the second beam group may include at least one of the multiple beam groups.
  • the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the largest group number is selected as a reference measurement result;
  • the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest group number is selected as a reference measurement result;
  • the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the intermediate group number is a reference measurement result, wherein the beam group of the intermediate group number is a beam group corresponding to the group number of the medium distribution among the group numbers of the plurality of beam groups.
  • the UE may perform group name naming of multiple beam groups to determine the group number of multiple beam groups.
  • the base station may perform beam group division of the UE and deliver the group number.
  • the UE determines, according to the indication information, a measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the largest measurement value as a reference measurement result;
  • the method for determining the reference measurement result is the measurement result of selecting the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest measurement value.
  • the UE determines, according to the indication information, a measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest measurement value as a reference measurement result;
  • the method for determining the reference measurement result is the measurement result of selecting the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the intermediate measurement value.
  • the UE determines, according to the indication information, a measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the intermediate measurement value as a reference measurement result;
  • the method for determining the reference measurement result is the measurement result of selecting the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the largest group number.
  • the UE determines, according to the indication information, a measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the largest group number as a reference measurement result;
  • the method for determining the reference measurement result is the measurement result of selecting the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest group number.
  • the UE determines, according to the indication information, a measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest group number as a reference measurement result;
  • the method for determining the reference measurement result is the measurement result of selecting the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the intermediate group number.
  • the UE determines, according to the indication information, the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the intermediate group number as the reference measurement result.
  • the UE sends the UCI to the base station according to the first format that the uplink control information UCI has.
  • the UCI sent by the UE in the first format includes at least one of measurement result information of a beam group and information of a beam group.
  • the beam group includes: a first beam group and a second beam group
  • the measurement result information of the beam group includes: a measurement result of the first beam group and an offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the measurement result of the first beam group .
  • the measurement result of the first beam group is a reference measurement result
  • the information of the beam group is used to indicate a beam group corresponding to at least one of the measurement result of the first beam group and the measurement result of the second beam group, the beam group is one Or multiple beam groups.
  • the UCI transmitted in the first format includes: information of a beam group.
  • the UCI sent in the first format further includes: a first beam group identifier and a second beam group identifier, wherein the first beam group identifier is referenced.
  • the UCI includes: a first beam identification itself and a second beam identification, wherein the second beam identification is an identification of the second beam itself or an offset relative to the identification of the first beam.
  • the second beam may be one or more.
  • the UCI includes: an identifier of a respective beam corresponding to a measurement result of the first beam and a measurement result of the second beam, wherein the first beam identifier is used as a reference.
  • the UCI transmitted in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam group.
  • the manner of determining the UCI according to the identifier of the beam group to which the measurement result of the beam group belongs may include:
  • Manner 1 The measurement result of the first beam group, the identifier of the first beam group, the measurement result of the second beam group, and the identifier of the second beam group.
  • the identifier of the first beam group is a dominant indication
  • the identifier of the second beam group is a dominant indication.
  • Manner 2 The measurement result of the first beam group, the identifier of the first beam group, the measurement result of the second beam group, and the identifier of the second beam group.
  • the identifier of the first beam group is an implicit indication
  • the identifier of the second beam group is an explicit indication.
  • Manner 3 the measurement result of the first beam group, the identifier of the first beam group, and the measurement result of the second beam group.
  • the identifier of the first beam group is explicitly indicated, and the identifier of the second beam group is implicitly indicated.
  • Mode 4 measurement result of the first beam group, measurement result of the second beam group.
  • the identifier of the first beam group is implicitly indicated, and the identifier of the second beam group is implicitly indicated.
  • the implicit indication described above indicates that no indication is required, and the correspondence between the measurement result of the beam group and the beam group can be analyzed in a predefined or default manner.
  • the identifier of the second beam group when the identifier of the second beam group is a dominant indication, the identifier of the second beam group is the identifier of the second beam group; or the identifier of the second beam group is relative to the first beam.
  • the offset of the group's identity when the identifier of the second beam group is a dominant indication, the identifier of the second beam group is the identifier of the second beam group; or the identifier of the second beam group is relative to the first beam. The offset of the group's identity.
  • the identifier of the second beam group is a dominant indication
  • the identifier of the first beam group is “5”
  • the identifier of the second beam group may be “6” or “1”.
  • the identifier of the first beam group corresponds to the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam group, that is, the identifier of the first beam group is “5”, and the corresponding identifier of the corresponding reference measurement result is also “5”.
  • the identifier of the second beam group may be “6”, and the corresponding identifier of the corresponding measurement result may also be “6”; or the identifier of the second beam group is “1”, that is, the second beam.
  • the identifier of the group is an offset from the identifier of the first beam group, and the corresponding identifier on the corresponding measurement result also corresponds to “1”.
  • the beam groups are sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the group number of the beam group. It should be noted that the UE may perform group name naming for multiple beam groups to determine the group number of multiple beam groups. Alternatively, the base station may also send the group number.
  • the group 1 when the group number is 1, 2, 3...M, the group 1, the group 2, the group 3, the group M are sequentially arranged in one format for reporting; when the group number is x, x+1...N, For group x, group x+1...group N is arranged in a format for reporting; or, when the group number is M, M-1,...1, for group M, group M-1...group 1 is arranged in order In a format for reporting; when the group number is N, N-1...x, for group N, group N-1... group x is arranged in a format for reporting.
  • the beam groups are sequentially arranged in the order of odd or ascending order of the group number of the beam group.
  • group number is 1, 2, 3...M, for group 1, group 3, group 5... group M (ie if M is odd, the last one is group M; if M is even, the last one is M-1) is arranged in a format for reporting, and so on; or, when the group number is 1, 2, 3...M, for group 2, group 4, group 6... group M (ie, if M is even The last one is the group M; if M is an odd number, the last one is M-1) is arranged in a format for reporting, and so on.
  • the beam group is sequentially arranged in the order of odd or descending order of the group number of the beam group.
  • the beam groups are arranged according to a preset arrangement manner, that is, a sequence corresponding to a preset sequence design.
  • the preset arrangement is sent from the base station to the UE by using the radio resource control RRC signaling or the medium access control signaling; or the preset arrangement is configured at the UE in a pre-configured manner.
  • a predetermined sequence design may be an unordered design according to a certain frequency hopping sequence.
  • the UCI transmitted in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam group and information of the beam group.
  • determining, according to the measurement result of the beam group, the manner of reporting the UCI may include:
  • the measurement result of the first beam group, the identifier of the first beam group, the measurement result of the second beam group, and the identifier of the second beam group is a reference measurement result; the information of the first beam group may be a dominant or implicit indication; and the information of the second beam group may also be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the measurement result is the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group of the largest group number.
  • the identification of the first beam set may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the identifier of the first beam group is a dominant indication
  • the identifier of the first beam group is an index of the first beam group.
  • the identity of the second beam set can be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in descending or increasing order of the group number of the beam group.
  • the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group whose measurement result is the smallest group number is referred to.
  • the identification of the first beam set may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the identifier of the first beam group is a dominant indication
  • the identifier of the first beam group is an index of the first beam group.
  • the identity of the second beam set can be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the group number of the beam group.
  • the reference measurement result is the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group of the intermediate group number.
  • the identification of the first beam set may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the identifier of the first beam group is a dominant indication
  • the identifier of the first beam group is an index of the first beam group.
  • the identity of the second beam set can be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group relative to the reference measurement result is increased from the minimum group number according to the group number of the beam group, or is decreased from the maximum group number, or The number is incremented from the intermediate group number to the largest group number and is decremented from the intermediate group number to the minimum group number, or from the intermediate group number to the minimum group number and sequentially from the intermediate group number to the largest group number.
  • the reference measurement result is the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the largest measurement value.
  • the identification of the first beam set may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the identifier of the first beam group is a dominant indication
  • the identifier of the first beam group is an index of the first beam group.
  • the identity of the second beam set can be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in descending or increasing order of the group number of the beam group.
  • the reference measurement result is a measurement result of a beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest measurement value.
  • the identification of the first beam set may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the identifier of the first beam group is a dominant indication
  • the identifier of the first beam group is an index of the first beam group.
  • the identity of the second beam set can be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the group number of the beam group.
  • the reference measurement result is a measurement result of a beam group corresponding to a beam group having an intermediate measurement value.
  • the identification of the first beam set may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the identifier of the first beam group is a dominant indication
  • the identifier of the first beam group is an index of the first beam group.
  • the identity of the second beam set can be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the group number of the beam group.
  • the measurement result of the beam group greater than the preset threshold is reported.
  • the preset threshold is sent from the base station to the UE by using radio resource control RRC signaling or media access control signaling; or the preset threshold is configured in the UE in a pre-configured manner.
  • the identification of the beam group is a dominant indication.
  • the measurement results are arranged and reported according to a preset arrangement manner.
  • the preset arrangement may be any order in which each of the above modes is sequentially arranged.
  • the offset of the measurement result relative to the reference measurement result is greater than the preset threshold value
  • the offset of the measurement result relative to the reference measurement result is arranged according to a preset arrangement manner; or, when the measurement result is greater than the preset At the threshold value, the measurement results are arranged in a preset arrangement.
  • At least one of the preset threshold value and the preset arrangement manner is sent from the base station to the UE by using at least one of radio resource control RRC signaling and media access control signaling; or, preset At least one of the threshold value and the preset arrangement is configured at the UE in a pre-configured manner.
  • the UCI transmitted by the UE in the first format further includes: at least one of a reference signal used for measurement or a reference signal used as a basis for reporting the measurement result of the beam group.
  • the reference signal includes at least one of a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier, a channel state indication reference signal CSI-RS, and a CSI-RS resource identifier.
  • the UE may also report the reference signal according to the reference signal specified in the indication information without reporting the reference signal.
  • the base station can process the beam group according to the UCI sent by the UE.
  • the UE may determine one of the plurality of beam groups as a reference according to the multiple beam groups by using an average value algorithm.
  • All of the foregoing preset, pre-configured or pre-notified may be notified to the UE from the network device through RRC signaling, or MAC signaling, or written in advance at the UE.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart diagram of another data transmission method based on a beam group according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 3, the embodiment includes: Steps S310-S320, specifically as follows:
  • S310 The UE determines to use the first beam group as a reference, or uses the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference.
  • the UE measures each beam, divides into a beam group, and determines a beam group identifier and a measurement result of the corresponding beam group for the divided beam group.
  • the split beam group is a group of beams that have the same feature for the UE, and the remaining beams that do not contain the same feature are grouped.
  • a beam that does not include the same feature one case may be a beam group having only one beam, and the beam group includes only one beam.
  • beam grouping may be performed according to whether each beam has the same subcarrier spacing, beams having the same subcarrier spacing are divided into one beam group; or, depending on whether they have the same waveform Beam grouping is performed, beams having the same waveform are divided into one beam group; or beams are grouped according to whether or not there are similar measurement values, and beams having similar measurement values are divided into one beam group.
  • the measurement result of the corresponding beam group is determined according to the measured value of each beam, and the measurement value of the beam group is derived, and the measurement result of the beam group is obtained by the mapping relationship or the correspondence between the measurement value and the measurement result.
  • the measured values of the beam set are derived from the measured values of the individual beams and are derived from linear or non-linear functions.
  • the manner in which the UE determines the first beam group may include: the UE determines that the beam group having the largest group number is the first beam group; or the UE determines that the beam group having the smallest group number is the first beam group; or the UE determines that the group has the intermediate group The beam group of the number is the first beam group.
  • the method of determining the first beam group is to select the beam group having the largest group number as the first beam group, the UE determines that the group has the largest group number.
  • the beam group is a first beam group;
  • the method of determining the first beam group is to select the beam group having the smallest group number as the first beam group, the UE determines that the group has the smallest group number.
  • the beam group is a first beam group;
  • the UE determines that the intermediate group number is The beam group is the first beam group.
  • the manner in which the UE determines the first beam group may further include: the UE determines that the beam group having the largest measurement value is the first beam group; or the UE determines that the beam group having the smallest measurement value is the first beam group; or the UE determines to have the middle
  • the beam set of measured values is the first beam set.
  • the method of determining the first beam group is to select the beam group having the largest measurement value as the first beam group, the UE determines that the first measurement group has the largest measurement value.
  • the beam group is a first beam group;
  • the UE determines that the minimum measurement value is The beam group is a first beam group
  • the UE determines that the intermediate measurement value is The beam group is the first beam group.
  • the manner in which the UE determines the reference measurement result may be multiple, and specifically includes:
  • the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the intermediate measurement value is selected as the reference measurement result.
  • the method for determining an intermediate measurement value includes: determining an intermediate measurement value according to an average value calculated by multiple measurement values or an average value calculated according to the maximum measurement value and the minimum measurement value among the measurement values of the multiple beam groups; or The value of the centered distribution among the measured values of the plurality of beam sets is selected as the intermediate measurement result value.
  • the beam group except the first beam group in the multiple beam groups becomes the second beam group
  • the second beam group may include at least one of the multiple beam groups.
  • the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the largest group number is selected as a reference measurement result;
  • the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest group number is selected as a reference measurement result;
  • the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the intermediate group number is a reference measurement result, wherein the beam group of the intermediate group number is a beam group corresponding to the group number of the medium distribution among the group numbers of the plurality of beam groups.
  • the UE may perform group name naming for multiple beam groups and determine the group number of multiple beam groups.
  • the base station may perform beam group division of the UE and deliver the group number.
  • the method for determining the reference measurement result is to select the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the largest measurement value as the reference measurement result.
  • the UE determines that the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the largest measurement value is a reference measurement result;
  • the method for determining the reference measurement result is to select the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest measurement value as the reference measurement
  • the UE determines that the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest measurement value is a reference measurement result
  • the method for determining the reference measurement result is the measurement result of selecting the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the intermediate measurement value as the reference measurement
  • the UE determines that the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the intermediate measurement value is a reference measurement result
  • the method for determining the reference measurement result is to select the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the largest group number as the reference measurement As a result, the UE determines that the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the largest group number is a reference measurement result;
  • the method for determining the reference measurement result is to select the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest group number as the reference measurement As a result, the UE determines that the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest group number is a reference measurement result;
  • the method for determining the reference measurement result is the measurement result of selecting the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the intermediate group number as the reference measurement
  • the UE determines that the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the intermediate group number is the reference measurement result.
  • S320 The UE sends the UCI to the base station according to the first format that the uplink control information UCI has.
  • the UCI sent by the UE in the first format includes at least one of measurement result information of a beam group and information of a beam group.
  • the beam group includes: a first beam group and a second beam group
  • the measurement result information of the beam group includes: a measurement result of the first beam group and an offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the measurement result of the first beam group .
  • the measurement result of the first beam group is a reference measurement result
  • the information of the beam group is used to indicate a beam group corresponding to at least one of the measurement result of the first beam group and the measurement result of the second beam group, the beam group is one Or multiple beam groups.
  • the UCI transmitted in the first format includes: information of a beam group.
  • the UCI sent in the first format further includes: a first beam group identifier and a second beam group identifier, wherein the first beam group identifier is referenced.
  • the UCI includes: a first beam identifier itself and a second beam identifier, wherein the second beam identifier is an identifier of the second beam itself or an offset relative to the identifier of the first beam.
  • the second beam may be one or more.
  • the UCI includes: an identification of a respective beam corresponding to a measurement result of the first beam and a measurement result of the second beam, wherein the first beam identification is used as a reference.
  • the UCI transmitted in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam group.
  • the manner of determining the UCI according to the identifier of the beam group to which the measurement result of the beam group belongs may include:
  • Manner 1 The measurement result of the first beam group, the identifier of the first beam group, the measurement result of the second beam group, and the identifier of the second beam group.
  • the identifier of the first beam group is a dominant indication
  • the identifier of the second beam group is a dominant indication.
  • Manner 2 The measurement result of the first beam group, the identifier of the first beam group, the measurement result of the second beam group, and the identifier of the second beam group.
  • the identifier of the first beam group is an implicit indication
  • the identifier of the second beam group is an explicit indication.
  • Manner 3 the measurement result of the first beam group, the identifier of the first beam group, and the measurement result of the second beam group.
  • the identifier of the first beam group is explicitly indicated, and the identifier of the second beam group is implicitly indicated.
  • Mode 4 measurement result of the first beam group, measurement result of the second beam group.
  • the identifier of the first beam group is implicitly indicated, and the identifier of the second beam group is implicitly indicated.
  • the implicit indication described above indicates that no indication is required, and the correspondence between the measurement result of the beam group and the beam group can be analyzed in a predefined or default manner.
  • the identifier of the second beam group when the identifier of the second beam group is a dominant indication, the identifier of the second beam group is the identifier of the second beam group; or the identifier of the second beam group is relative to the first beam.
  • the offset of the group's identity when the identifier of the second beam group is a dominant indication, the identifier of the second beam group is the identifier of the second beam group; or the identifier of the second beam group is relative to the first beam. The offset of the group's identity.
  • the identifier of the second beam group is a dominant indication
  • the identifier of the first beam group is “5”
  • the identifier of the second beam group may be “6” or “1”.
  • the identifier of the first beam group corresponds to the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam group, that is, the identifier of the first beam group is “5”, and the corresponding identifier of the corresponding reference measurement result is also “5”.
  • the identifier of the second beam group may be “6”, and the corresponding identifier of the corresponding measurement result may also be “6”; or the identifier of the second beam group is “1”, that is, the second beam.
  • the identifier of the group is an offset from the identifier of the first beam group, and the corresponding identifier on the corresponding measurement result also corresponds to “1”.
  • the beam groups are sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the group number of the beam group. It should be noted that the UE may perform group name naming for multiple beam groups to determine the group number of multiple beam groups. Alternatively, the base station may also send the group number.
  • the group 1 when the group number is 1, 2, 3...M, the group 1, the group 2, the group 3, the group M are sequentially arranged in one format for reporting; when the group number is x, x+1...N, For group x, group x+1...group N is arranged in a format for reporting; or, when the group number is M, M-1,...1, for group M, group M-1...group 1 is arranged in order In a format for reporting; when the group number is N, N-1...x, for group N, group N-1... group x is arranged in a format for reporting.
  • the beam groups are sequentially arranged in the order of odd or ascending order of the group number of the beam group.
  • group number is 1, 2, 3...M, for group 1, group 3, group 5... group M (ie if M is odd, the last one is group M; if M is even, the last one is M-1) is arranged in a format for reporting, and so on; or, when the group number is 1, 2, 3...M, for group 2, group 4, group 6... group M (ie, if M is even The last one is the group M; if M is an odd number, the last one is M-1) is arranged in a format for reporting, and so on.
  • the beam group is sequentially arranged in the order of odd or descending order of the group number of the beam group.
  • the beam groups are arranged according to a preset arrangement manner, that is, a sequence corresponding to a preset sequence design.
  • the preset arrangement is sent from the base station to the UE by using the radio resource control RRC signaling or the medium access control signaling; or the preset arrangement is configured at the UE in a pre-configured manner.
  • a predetermined sequence design may be an unordered design according to a certain frequency hopping sequence.
  • the UCI transmitted in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam group and information of the beam group.
  • determining, according to the measurement result of the beam group, the manner of reporting the UCI may include:
  • the measurement result of the first beam group, the identifier of the first beam group, the measurement result of the second beam group, and the identifier of the second beam group is a reference measurement result; the information of the first beam group may be a dominant or implicit indication; and the information of the second beam group may also be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the measurement result is the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group of the largest group number.
  • the identification of the first beam set may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the identifier of the first beam group is a dominant indication
  • the identifier of the first beam group is an index of the first beam group.
  • the identity of the second beam set can be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in descending or increasing order of the group number of the beam group.
  • the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group whose measurement result is the smallest group number is referred to.
  • the identification of the first beam set may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the identifier of the first beam group is a dominant indication
  • the identifier of the first beam group is an index of the first beam group.
  • the identity of the second beam set can be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the group number of the beam group.
  • the reference measurement result is the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group of the intermediate group number.
  • the identification of the first beam set may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the identifier of the first beam group is a dominant indication
  • the identifier of the first beam group is an index of the first beam group.
  • the identity of the second beam set can be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group relative to the reference measurement result is increased from the minimum group number according to the group number of the beam group, or is decreased from the maximum group number, or The number is incremented from the intermediate group number to the largest group number and is decremented from the intermediate group number to the minimum group number, or from the intermediate group number to the minimum group number and sequentially from the intermediate group number to the largest group number.
  • the reference measurement result is the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the largest measurement value.
  • the identification of the first beam set may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the identifier of the first beam group is a dominant indication
  • the identifier of the first beam group is an index of the first beam group.
  • the identity of the second beam set can be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in descending or increasing order of the group number of the beam group.
  • the reference measurement result is a measurement result of a beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest measurement value.
  • the identification of the first beam set may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the identifier of the first beam group is a dominant indication
  • the identifier of the first beam group is an index of the first beam group.
  • the identity of the second beam set can be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the group number of the beam group.
  • the reference measurement result is a measurement result of a beam group corresponding to a beam group having an intermediate measurement value.
  • the identification of the first beam set may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the identifier of the first beam group is a dominant indication
  • the identifier of the first beam group is an index of the first beam group.
  • the identity of the second beam set can be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the group number of the beam group.
  • the measurement result of the beam group greater than the preset threshold is reported.
  • the preset threshold is sent from the base station to the UE by using radio resource control RRC signaling or media access control signaling; or the preset threshold is configured in the UE in a pre-configured manner.
  • the identification of the beam group is a dominant indication.
  • the measurement results are arranged and reported according to a preset arrangement manner.
  • the preset arrangement may be any order in which each of the above modes is sequentially arranged.
  • the offset of the measurement result relative to the reference measurement result is greater than the preset threshold value
  • the offset of the measurement result relative to the reference measurement result is arranged according to a preset arrangement manner; or, when the measurement result is greater than the preset At the threshold value, the measurement results are arranged in a preset arrangement.
  • At least one of the preset threshold value and the preset arrangement manner is sent from the base station to the UE by using at least one of radio resource control RRC signaling and media access control signaling; or, preset At least one of the threshold value and the preset arrangement is configured at the UE in a pre-configured manner.
  • the UCI transmitted by the UE in the first format further includes: at least one of a reference signal used for measurement or a reference signal used as a basis for reporting the measurement result of the beam group.
  • the reference signal includes at least one of a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier, a channel state indication reference signal CSI-RS, and a CSI-RS resource identifier.
  • the base station can process the beam group according to the UCI sent by the UE.
  • the UE may determine one of the plurality of beam groups as a reference according to the multiple beam groups by using an average value algorithm.
  • All of the foregoing preset, pre-configured or pre-notified may be notified to the UE from the network device through RRC signaling, or MAC signaling, or written in advance at the UE.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a beam-based data transmission method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a beam-based data transmission method according to an embodiment of the present invention. 4 is an example in which the UE reports the uplink control information UCI according to at least one of the first beam and the first beam in the at least one beam. As shown in FIG. 4, this embodiment includes steps S410-S430, as follows:
  • S410 The UE acquires indication information.
  • the UE acquisition indication information may be obtained by receiving indication information from the base station or according to information pre-configured at the UE.
  • the indication information may include any one or more of the following contents. It should be noted that any one or more of the following may be acquired from the base station and the remaining ones are preset:
  • the indication information may be used to indicate whether the UE performs reporting based on the beam.
  • the indication information may also be used to indicate whether the UE groups the beams having the same feature into one group.
  • the same feature may be the same subcarrier spacing, the same waveform, or a set of measured values, any one or more of these features.
  • the indication information may also be used to indicate whether the UE uses the first beam as a reference or uses the measurement result of the first beam as a reference to report the UCI, and the measurement result of the first beam is a reference measurement result.
  • the method for determining to use the first beam as a reference may include: the first beam may be a beam with the largest number, or a beam with the smallest number, or a beam with an intermediate number. The first beam can also be the beam with the largest measurement, or the beam with the smallest measurement, or a beam with intermediate measurements.
  • the method of determining the measurement result using the first beam as the reference measurement result may include: the measurement result of the first beam may be the measurement result of the beam with the largest number, or the measurement result of the beam with the smallest number, or the beam with the middle number Measurement results.
  • the measurement result of the first beam may be the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam having the largest measurement value, or the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam having the smallest measurement value, or the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam having the intermediate measurement value.
  • the measured value may be a value corresponding to the measurement result, or the measured value may obtain a corresponding measurement result based on the mapping relationship.
  • the method for determining an intermediate measurement value includes: determining an intermediate measurement value according to an average value calculated by the plurality of measurement values or an average value calculated according to the maximum measurement value and the minimum measurement value, among the measurement values of the plurality of beams; or The value of the centered distribution among the measured values of the plurality of beams is selected as the intermediate measurement result value.
  • the indication information may also be used to indicate that the UCI sent by the UE in the first format includes: the identifier of the beam is a dominant indication or an implicit indication.
  • the indication information may further include: a method of determining the first beam;
  • the indication information may further include: a method of determining a measurement result of the first beam as a reference measurement result.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate whether the identifier of the beam is included in the UCI, or only the identifier of the beam.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the beam is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate that the UCI sent by the UE in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam and hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ multiplexing or HARQ multiplexing format.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or a reference signal as a basis for reporting a measurement result of the beam; wherein the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier, a channel state indication reference signal CSI-RS or a At least one of the CSI-RS resource identifiers.
  • the indication information may be performed by using at least one of radio resource control (RRC) signaling, media access control (MAC) signaling, or physical layer signaling. Instructed.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • MAC media access control
  • S420 The UE determines, according to the indication information, that the first beam is used as a reference, or the measurement result of the first beam is used as a reference.
  • the UE measures each beam, divides it into a beam, and determines a beam identifier and a measurement result of the corresponding beam for the divided beam.
  • the splitting beam is that the UE divides the beams containing the same feature into one group according to the indication information, and divides the remaining beams that do not include the same feature into one group.
  • one of the cases may be a beam with only one beam, then the beam includes only one beam.
  • beam grouping may be performed according to whether each beam has the same subcarrier spacing, and beams having the same subcarrier spacing are divided into one beam; or, according to whether or not the same waveform is present Beams are grouped, beams with the same waveform are divided into one beam; or beams are grouped according to whether they have similar measured values, and beams with similar measured values are divided into one beam.
  • the measurement result of the corresponding beam is determined according to the measured value of each beam, and the measured value of the beam is derived, and the measurement result of the beam is obtained by the mapping relationship or the corresponding relationship between the measured value and the measured result.
  • the measured values of the beams are derived from the measured values of the individual beams and are derived from linear or non-linear functions.
  • the manner in which the UE determines the first beam may include: the UE determines that the beam with the largest number is the first beam; or the UE determines that the beam with the smallest number is the first beam; or the UE determines that the beam with the intermediate number is the first beam.
  • the UE determines, according to the indication information, that has the largest number.
  • the beam is the first beam
  • the UE determines, according to the indication information, that the device has the smallest number.
  • the beam is the first beam
  • the UE determines, according to the indication information, that the intermediate number is used.
  • the beam is the first beam.
  • the manner in which the UE determines the first beam may further include: the UE determines that the beam having the largest measurement value is the first beam; or the UE determines that the beam with the smallest measurement value is the first beam; or the UE determines that the beam with the intermediate measurement value is The first beam.
  • the UE determines that the maximum measurement is performed according to the indication information.
  • the beam of the value is the first beam
  • the UE determines that the minimum measurement is performed according to the indication information.
  • the beam of the value is the first beam
  • the UE determines that the intermediate measurement is performed according to the indication information.
  • the beam of the value is the first beam.
  • the manner in which the UE determines the reference measurement result may be multiple, and specifically includes:
  • the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam having the largest measurement value is selected as a reference measurement result
  • the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam having the intermediate measurement value is selected as the reference measurement result.
  • the method for determining an intermediate measurement value includes: determining an intermediate measurement value according to an average value calculated by multiple measurement values or an average value calculated according to the maximum measurement value and the minimum measurement value among the measurement values of the multiple beams; or, selecting The value of the centered distribution among the measured values of the plurality of beams is the intermediate measurement result value.
  • a beam other than the first beam among the plurality of beams becomes a second beam
  • the second beam may include at least one of the plurality of beams.
  • the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the largest number is selected as the reference measurement result;
  • the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the smallest number is selected as the reference measurement result;
  • the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam having the intermediate number is selected as a reference measurement result, wherein the intermediate numbered beam is a beam corresponding to the number of the centrally distributed number among the plurality of beam numbers.
  • the UE may number the multiple beams to determine the number of the multiple beams.
  • the base station may perform beam splitting of the UE and issue the number.
  • the method for determining the reference measurement result is to select the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the largest measurement value as the reference measurement result.
  • the UE determines, according to the indication information, that the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the largest measurement value is a reference measurement result;
  • the UE determines, according to the indication information, a measurement result of a beam corresponding to the beam having the smallest measurement value as a reference measurement result;
  • the method for determining the reference measurement result is to select the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the intermediate measurement value as the reference measurement.
  • the UE determines, according to the indication information, a measurement result of a beam corresponding to the beam having the intermediate measurement value as a reference measurement result;
  • the method for determining the reference measurement result is to select the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the largest number as the reference measurement result.
  • the UE determines, according to the indication information, that the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the largest number is the reference measurement result;
  • the method for determining the reference measurement result is to select the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the smallest number as the reference measurement result.
  • the UE determines, according to the indication information, that the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the smallest number is the reference measurement result;
  • the method for determining the reference measurement result is to select the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the intermediate number as the reference measurement result.
  • the UE determines, according to the indication information, that the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the intermediate number is the reference measurement result.
  • S430 The UE sends the UCI to the base station according to the first format that the uplink control information UCI has.
  • the UCI sent by the UE in the first format includes at least one of measurement result information of the beam and information of the beam.
  • the beam includes: a first beam and a second beam
  • the measurement result information of the beam includes: a measurement result of the first beam and an offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the measurement result of the first beam.
  • the measurement result of the first beam is a reference measurement result
  • the information of the beam is used to indicate a beam corresponding to at least one of the measurement result of the first beam and the measurement result of the second beam, the beam being one or more beams.
  • the UCI transmitted in the first format includes: information of the beam.
  • the UCI transmitted in the first format further includes: a first beam identifier and a second beam identifier, wherein the first beam identifier is used as a reference.
  • the UCI includes: a first beam identifier itself and a second beam identifier, wherein the second beam identifier is an identifier of the second beam itself or an offset relative to the identifier of the first beam.
  • the second beam may be one or more.
  • the UCI includes: an identifier of a respective beam corresponding to a measurement result of the first beam and a measurement result of the second beam, wherein the first beam identifier is used as a reference.
  • the UCI transmitted in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam.
  • the manner of determining the reported UCI according to the identifier of the beam to which the measurement result of the beam belongs may include:
  • Manner 1 The measurement result of the first beam, the identifier of the first beam, the measurement result of the second beam, and the identifier of the second beam.
  • the identifier of the first beam is a dominant indication
  • the identifier of the second beam is a dominant indication.
  • Manner 2 The measurement result of the first beam, the identifier of the first beam, the measurement result of the second beam, and the identifier of the second beam.
  • the identifier of the first beam is an implicit indication
  • the identifier of the second beam is an explicit indication.
  • Manner 3 The measurement result of the first beam, the identification of the first beam, and the measurement result of the second beam.
  • the identifier of the first beam is explicitly indicated, and the identifier of the second beam is implicitly indicated.
  • Mode 4 the measurement result of the first beam and the measurement result of the second beam.
  • the identifier of the first beam is implicitly indicated, and the identifier of the second beam is implicitly indicated.
  • the implicit indication described above indicates that no indication is needed, and the correspondence between the measurement result of the beam and the beam can be analyzed in a predefined or default manner.
  • the identifier of the second beam when the identifier of the second beam is a dominant indication, the identifier of the second beam is the identifier of the second beam; or the identifier of the second beam is the offset of the identifier of the first beam. Transfer amount.
  • the identifier of the second beam when the identifier of the second beam is a dominant indication, the identifier of the first beam is “5”, and the identifier of the second beam may be “6” or “1”.
  • the identifier of the first beam corresponds to the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam, that is, the identifier of the first beam is “5”, and the corresponding identifier on the corresponding reference measurement result is also “5”.
  • the identifier of the second beam may be “6”, and the identifier corresponding to the measurement result may also be “6”; or the identifier of the second beam is “1”, that is, the identifier of the second beam is relative to The offset of the identifier of the first beam, corresponding to the corresponding measurement result, is also corresponding to "1".
  • the beams are sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the number of the beams. It should be noted that the numbering of multiple beams may be performed by the UE to determine the number of multiple beams. Alternatively, the base station may also issue the number. For example, when the number is 1, 2, 3...M, for group 1, group 2, group 3...
  • group M is arranged in a format for reporting; when the number is x, x+1...N, for group x, group x+1...group N are arranged in a format for reporting; or, when numbered M, M-1,...1, for group M, group M-1...group 1 is placed one after another
  • the report is reported in the format; when the number is N, N-1...x, for the group N, the group N-1...the group x is sequentially arranged in a format for reporting.
  • the beams are sequentially arranged in the order of the odd-numbered or even-order ascending order of the beam.
  • the beams are sequentially arranged in the order of the odd-numbered descending order or the even-numbered descending order of the beam.
  • the beams are arranged according to a preset arrangement, that is, a sequence corresponding to a preset sequence design.
  • the preset arrangement is sent from the base station to the UE by using the radio resource control RRC signaling or the medium access control signaling; or the preset arrangement is configured at the UE in a pre-configured manner.
  • a predetermined sequence design may be an unordered design according to a certain frequency hopping sequence.
  • the UCI transmitted in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam and information of the beam.
  • determining, according to the measurement result of the beam, the manner of reporting the UCI may include:
  • the measurement result of the first beam, the identification of the first beam, the measurement result of the second beam, and the identification of the second beam is a reference measurement result; the information of the first beam may be a dominant or implicit indication; and the information of the second beam may also be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the reference measurement result is the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the largest numbered beam.
  • the identification of the first beam may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the identifier of the first beam is a dominant indication
  • the identifier of the first beam is an index of the first beam.
  • the identification of the second beam may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in descending or increasing order of the number of the beam.
  • the measurement result is the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam of the smallest number.
  • the identification of the first beam may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the identifier of the first beam is an index of the first beam.
  • the identification of the second beam may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the number of the beam.
  • the reference measurement result is a measurement result of a beam corresponding to the intermediate numbered beam.
  • the identification of the first beam may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the identification of the first beam is an index of the first beam.
  • the identification of the second beam may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the offset of the measurement result of the second beam relative to the reference measurement is increased from the smallest number according to the number of the beam, or is decreased from the maximum number, or is incremented from the middle number to the maximum. The number is decremented from the middle number to the smallest number, or from the middle number to the lowest number and in order from the middle number to the largest number.
  • the reference measurement result is a measurement result of a beam corresponding to the beam having the largest measurement value.
  • the identification of the first beam may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the identifier of the first beam is an index of the first beam.
  • the identification of the second beam may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in descending or increasing order of the number of the beam.
  • the reference measurement result is a measurement result of a beam corresponding to a beam having the smallest measurement value.
  • the identification of the first beam may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the identifier of the first beam is an index of the first beam.
  • the identification of the second beam may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the number of the beam.
  • the reference measurement result is a measurement result of a beam corresponding to a beam having an intermediate measurement value.
  • the identification of the first beam may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the identifier of the first beam is a dominant indication
  • the identifier of the first beam is an index of the first beam.
  • the identification of the second beam may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the number of the beam.
  • the measurement result of the beam larger than the preset threshold is reported.
  • the preset threshold is sent from the base station to the UE by using radio resource control RRC signaling or media access control signaling; or the preset threshold is configured in the UE in a pre-configured manner.
  • the identification of the beam is a dominant indication.
  • the measurement results are arranged and reported according to a preset arrangement manner.
  • the preset arrangement may be any order in which each of the above modes is sequentially arranged.
  • the offset of the measurement result relative to the reference measurement result is greater than the preset threshold value
  • the offset of the measurement result relative to the reference measurement result is arranged according to a preset arrangement manner; or, when the measurement result is greater than the preset At the threshold value, the measurement results are arranged in a preset arrangement.
  • At least one of the preset threshold value and the preset arrangement manner is sent from the base station to the UE by using at least one of radio resource control RRC signaling and media access control signaling; or, preset At least one of the threshold value and the preset arrangement is configured at the UE in a pre-configured manner.
  • the UCI transmitted by the UE in the first format further includes at least one of a reference signal for measurement or a reference signal for reporting the measurement result of the beam.
  • the reference signal includes at least one of a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier, a channel state indication reference signal CSI-RS, and a CSI-RS resource identifier.
  • the UE may also report the reference signal according to the reference signal specified in the indication information without reporting the reference signal.
  • the base station can process the beam according to the UCI sent by the UE.
  • the UE may determine one of the multiple beams as a reference according to the multiple beams by using an average value algorithm.
  • All of the foregoing preset, pre-configured or pre-notified may be notified to the UE from the network device through RRC signaling, or MAC signaling, or written in advance at the UE.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart diagram of another beam-based data transmission method according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 5, the embodiment includes: Steps S510-S520, specifically as follows:
  • S510 The UE determines to use the first beam as a reference, or uses the measurement result of the first beam as a reference.
  • the UE measures each beam, divides it into a beam, and determines a beam identifier and a measurement result of the corresponding beam for the divided beam.
  • the split beam is a group of beams that have the same characteristics for the UE, and the remaining beams that do not contain the same feature are grouped.
  • one of the cases may be a beam with only one beam, then the beam includes only one beam.
  • beam grouping may be performed according to whether each beam has the same subcarrier spacing, and beams having the same subcarrier spacing are divided into one beam; or, according to whether or not the same waveform is present Beams are grouped, beams with the same waveform are divided into one beam; or beams are grouped according to whether they have similar measured values, and beams with similar measured values are divided into one beam.
  • the measurement result of the corresponding beam is determined according to the measured value of each beam, and the measured value of the beam is derived, and the measurement result of the beam is obtained by the mapping relationship or the corresponding relationship between the measured value and the measured result.
  • the measured values of the beams are derived from the measured values of the individual beams and are derived from linear or non-linear functions.
  • the manner in which the UE determines the first beam may include: the UE determines that the beam with the largest number is the first beam; or the UE determines that the beam with the smallest number is the first beam; or the UE determines that the beam with the intermediate number is the first beam.
  • the method for determining the first beam is to select the beam with the largest number as the first beam, the UE determines that the beam with the largest number is the first beam;
  • the UE determines that the beam with the smallest number is the first beam
  • the UE determines that the beam with the intermediate number is the first beam.
  • the manner in which the UE determines the first beam may further include: the UE determines that the beam having the largest measurement value is the first beam; or the UE determines that the beam with the smallest measurement value is the first beam; or the UE determines that the beam with the intermediate measurement value is The first beam.
  • the UE determines that the beam with the largest measurement value is the first.
  • the UE determines that the beam with the smallest measurement value is the first.
  • the UE determines that the beam with the intermediate measurement value is the first Beam.
  • the manner in which the UE determines the reference measurement result may be multiple, and specifically includes:
  • the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam having the largest measurement value is selected as a reference measurement result
  • the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam having the intermediate measurement value is selected as the reference measurement result.
  • the method for determining an intermediate measurement value includes: determining an intermediate measurement value according to an average value calculated by multiple measurement values or an average value calculated according to the maximum measurement value and the minimum measurement value among the measurement values of the multiple beams; or, selecting The value of the centered distribution among the measured values of the plurality of beams is the intermediate measurement result value.
  • a beam other than the first beam among the plurality of beams becomes a second beam
  • the second beam may include at least one of the plurality of beams.
  • the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the largest number is selected as the reference measurement result;
  • the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the smallest number is selected as the reference measurement result;
  • the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam having the middle number is selected as a reference measurement result, wherein the middle numbered beam is a beam corresponding to the number of the centrally distributed number among the numbers of the plurality of beams.
  • the UE may number the multiple beams to determine the number of the multiple beams.
  • the base station may perform beam splitting of the UE and issue the number.
  • the method for determining the reference measurement result is to select the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam having the largest measurement value as the reference measurement result
  • the UE Determining a measurement result of a beam corresponding to a beam having the largest measurement value as a reference measurement result
  • the method for determining the reference measurement result is to select the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam having the smallest measurement value as the reference measurement result, The UE determines that the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the smallest measurement value is a reference measurement result;
  • the method for determining the reference measurement result is to select the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam having the intermediate measurement value as the reference measurement result, The UE determines that the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam having the intermediate measurement value is a reference measurement result;
  • the method for determining the reference measurement result is to select the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the largest number as the reference measurement result, the UE Determining the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the largest number as the reference measurement result;
  • the method for determining the reference measurement result is to select the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the smallest number as the reference measurement result, the UE Determining the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the smallest number as the reference measurement result;
  • the method for determining the reference measurement result is to select the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the intermediate number as the reference measurement result
  • the UE The measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the intermediate number is determined as the reference measurement result.
  • S520 The UE sends the UCI to the base station according to the first format that the uplink control information UCI has.
  • the UCI sent by the UE in the first format includes at least one of measurement result information of the beam and information of the beam.
  • the beam includes: a first beam and a second beam
  • the measurement result information of the beam includes: a measurement result of the first beam and an offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the measurement result of the first beam.
  • the measurement result of the first beam is a reference measurement result
  • the information of the beam is used to indicate a beam corresponding to at least one of the measurement result of the first beam and the measurement result of the second beam, the beam being one or more beams.
  • the UCI transmitted in the first format includes: information of the beam.
  • the UCI sent in the first format further includes: a first beam identifier and a second beam identifier, wherein the first beam identifier is used as a reference.
  • the UCI includes: a first beam identifier itself and a second beam identifier, wherein the second beam identifier is an identifier of the second beam itself or an offset relative to the identifier of the first beam.
  • the second beam may be one or more.
  • the UCI includes: an identifier of a respective beam corresponding to a measurement result of the first beam and a measurement result of the second beam, wherein the first beam identifier is used as a reference.
  • the UCI transmitted in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam.
  • the manner of determining the reported UCI according to the identifier of the beam to which the measurement result of the beam belongs may include:
  • Manner 1 The measurement result of the first beam, the identifier of the first beam, the measurement result of the second beam, and the identifier of the second beam.
  • the identifier of the first beam is a dominant indication
  • the identifier of the second beam is a dominant indication.
  • Manner 2 The measurement result of the first beam, the identifier of the first beam, the measurement result of the second beam, and the identifier of the second beam.
  • the identifier of the first beam is an implicit indication
  • the identifier of the second beam is an explicit indication.
  • Manner 3 The measurement result of the first beam, the identification of the first beam, and the measurement result of the second beam.
  • the identifier of the first beam is explicitly indicated, and the identifier of the second beam is implicitly indicated.
  • Mode 4 the measurement result of the first beam and the measurement result of the second beam.
  • the identifier of the first beam is implicitly indicated, and the identifier of the second beam is implicitly indicated.
  • the implicit indication described above indicates that no indication is needed, and the correspondence between the measurement result of the beam and the beam can be analyzed in a predefined or default manner.
  • the identifier of the second beam when the identifier of the second beam is a dominant indication, the identifier of the second beam is the identifier of the second beam; or the identifier of the second beam is the offset of the identifier of the first beam. Transfer amount.
  • the identifier of the second beam when the identifier of the second beam is a dominant indication, the identifier of the first beam is “5”, and the identifier of the second beam may be “6” or “1”.
  • the identifier of the first beam corresponds to the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam, that is, the identifier of the first beam is “5”, and the corresponding identifier on the corresponding reference measurement result is also “5”.
  • the identifier of the second beam may be “6”, and the identifier corresponding to the measurement result may also be “6”; or the identifier of the second beam is “1”, that is, the identifier of the second beam is relative to The offset of the identifier of the first beam, corresponding to the corresponding measurement result, is also corresponding to "1".
  • the beams are sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the number of the beams. It should be noted that the numbering of multiple beams may be performed by the UE to determine the number of multiple beams. Alternatively, the base station may also issue the number. For example, when the number is 1, 2, 3...M, for group 1, group 2, group 3...
  • group M is arranged in a format for reporting; when the number is x, x+1...N, for group x, group x+1...group N are arranged in a format for reporting; or, when numbered M, M-1,...1, for group M, group M-1...group 1 is placed one after another
  • the report is reported in the format; when the number is N, N-1...x, for the group N, the group N-1...the group x is sequentially arranged in a format for reporting.
  • the beams are sequentially arranged in the order of the odd-numbered or even-order ascending order of the beam.
  • the beams are sequentially arranged in the order of the odd-numbered descending order or the even-numbered descending order of the beam.
  • the beams are arranged according to a preset arrangement, that is, a sequence corresponding to a preset sequence design.
  • the preset arrangement is sent from the base station to the UE by using the radio resource control RRC signaling or the medium access control signaling; or the preset arrangement is configured at the UE in a pre-configured manner.
  • a predetermined sequence design may be an unordered design according to a certain frequency hopping sequence.
  • the UCI transmitted in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam and information of the beam.
  • determining, according to the measurement result of the beam, the manner of reporting the UCI may include:
  • the measurement result of the first beam, the identification of the first beam, the measurement result of the second beam, and the identification of the second beam is a reference measurement result; the information of the first beam may be a dominant or implicit indication; and the information of the second beam may also be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the reference measurement result is the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the largest numbered beam.
  • the identification of the first beam may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the identifier of the first beam is a dominant indication
  • the identifier of the first beam is an index of the first beam.
  • the identification of the second beam may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in descending or increasing order of the number of the beam.
  • the measurement result is the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam of the smallest number.
  • the identification of the first beam may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the identifier of the first beam is an index of the first beam.
  • the identification of the second beam may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the number of the beam.
  • the reference measurement result is a measurement result of a beam corresponding to the intermediate numbered beam.
  • the identification of the first beam may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the identifier of the first beam is a dominant indication
  • the identifier of the first beam is an index of the first beam.
  • the identification of the second beam may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the offset of the measurement result of the second beam relative to the reference measurement is increased from the smallest number according to the number of the beam, or is decreased from the maximum number, or is incremented from the middle number to the maximum. The number is decremented from the middle number to the smallest number, or from the middle number to the lowest number and in order from the middle number to the largest number.
  • the reference measurement result is a measurement result of a beam corresponding to the beam having the largest measurement value.
  • the identification of the first beam may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the identifier of the first beam is an index of the first beam.
  • the identification of the second beam may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in descending or increasing order of the number of the beam.
  • the reference measurement result is a measurement result of a beam corresponding to a beam having the smallest measurement value.
  • the identification of the first beam may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the identifier of the first beam is an index of the first beam.
  • the identification of the second beam may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the number of the beam.
  • the reference measurement result is a measurement result of a beam corresponding to a beam having an intermediate measurement value.
  • the identification of the first beam may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the identifier of the first beam is a dominant indication
  • the identifier of the first beam is an index of the first beam.
  • the identification of the second beam may be a dominant or implicit indication.
  • the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the number of the beam.
  • the measurement result of the beam larger than the preset threshold is reported.
  • the preset threshold is sent from the base station to the UE by using radio resource control RRC signaling or media access control signaling; or the preset threshold is configured in the UE in a pre-configured manner.
  • the identification of the beam is a dominant indication.
  • the measurement results are arranged and reported according to a preset arrangement manner.
  • the preset arrangement may be any order in which each of the above modes is sequentially arranged.
  • the offset of the measurement result relative to the reference measurement result is greater than the preset threshold value
  • the offset of the measurement result relative to the reference measurement result is arranged according to a preset arrangement manner; or, when the measurement result is greater than the preset At the threshold value, the measurement results are arranged in a preset arrangement.
  • At least one of the preset threshold value and the preset arrangement manner is sent from the base station to the UE by using at least one of radio resource control RRC signaling and media access control signaling; or, preset At least one of the threshold value and the preset arrangement is configured at the UE in a pre-configured manner.
  • the UCI transmitted by the UE in the first format further includes at least one of a reference signal for measurement or a reference signal for reporting the measurement result of the beam.
  • the reference signal includes at least one of a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier, a channel state indication reference signal CSI-RS, and a CSI-RS resource identifier.
  • the base station can process the beam according to the UCI sent by the UE.
  • the UE may determine one of the multiple beams as a reference according to the multiple beams by using an average value algorithm.
  • All of the foregoing preset, pre-configured or pre-notified may be notified to the UE from the network device through RRC signaling, or MAC signaling, or written in advance at the UE.
  • the parameters simultaneous HARQ and BMR beam management result
  • the multiplexing of the measurement results of the HARQ and the beam management is activated or enabled, and all the high layer signaling is the RRC signaling sent by the base station to the UE. It is periodic, or based on event-triggered, or time-triggered periodicity.
  • the beam measurement result report may be multiplexed with the HARQ-ACK in the data transmission of the same time resource unit (such as PUSCH transmission), if the UE is not configured by the higher layer signaling to perform simultaneous PUCCH and PUSCH transmission or if the UE
  • the high-level configuration parameter simultaneous HARQ and BMR is temporary (false); if the UE is configured by the higher layer signaling to perform simultaneous PUCCH and PUSCH transmission, and if the UE does not determine the PUCCH format for periodic beam measurement report reporting and HARQ-ACK or if the UE is configured with the high-level configuration parameter simultaneous HARQ and BMR, then the HARQ-ACK is transmitted to the PUCCH, and the periodic CSI is transmitted to the PUSCH; if the UE is configured by the higher layer signaling, the simultaneous PUCCH
  • the UE decides the PUCCH format for periodic beam measurement report and HARQ-ACK and as UE configured by higher layers simultaneous HARQ and BMR is true in at least one, then the beam periodically report measurement results of the HARQ-ACK is transmitted in the PUCCH.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal based on a beam group according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the terminal may include: a transceiver 610, configured to send, according to a first format that the uplink control information UCI has, a UCI to a radio access network device; where the UCI sent in the first format includes: a beam group At least one of the measurement result information and the beam group information, the beam group includes: a first beam group and a second beam group, and the measurement result information of the beam group includes: a measurement result of the first beam group and a measurement of the second beam group As a result, the measurement result of the first beam group is a reference measurement result, and the information of the beam group is used to indicate the measurement result of the first beam group and the measurement result of the second beam group.
  • the second beam group includes a plurality of corresponding beam groups, and the second beam group includes: a third beam group and a fourth beam group, where the second beam group has a plurality of second beam groups.
  • the measurement result of the second beam group includes: a measurement result corresponding to the third beam group and a measurement result corresponding to the fourth beam group.
  • the second beam group is not limited to include the third beam group and the fourth beam group, and may further include N beam groups, where N is a positive integer.
  • the foregoing terminal further includes: a processor 620, configured to determine a reference measurement result when the beam group is multiple, specifically, determining, according to the measurement values of the multiple beam groups, the reference measurement result; wherein, in the multiple beam groups Among the measured values, the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the largest measurement value is the reference measurement result; or the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest measurement value is the reference measurement result; or, with the intermediate measurement value The measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group is the reference measurement result.
  • a processor 620 configured to determine a reference measurement result when the beam group is multiple, specifically, determining, according to the measurement values of the multiple beam groups, the reference measurement result; wherein, in the multiple beam groups Among the measured values, the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the largest measurement value is the reference measurement result; or the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest measurement value is the reference measurement result; or, with the intermediate measurement value
  • the measurement result of the beam group and the beam group has a one-to-one correspondence, that is, the first beam group has the measurement result of the first beam group, or the measurement result of the first beam group corresponding to the first beam group, first
  • the measurement result of the beam group belongs to the first beam group, or the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the first beam group is the first beam group;
  • the second beam group has the measurement result of the second beam group, or the second beam group
  • the measurement result of the corresponding second beam group is that the measurement result of the second beam group belongs to the second beam group, or the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam group is the second beam group.
  • the processor 620 is further configured to determine an intermediate measurement value, where the average value is calculated according to the measured values of the multiple beam groups in the measured values of the multiple beam groups; or, according to the maximum measured value and the minimum measured value.
  • the average value determines the intermediate measurement value; or, the value of the centered distribution among the measurement values of the plurality of beam groups is selected as the intermediate measurement result value.
  • the processor 620 is further configured to: when the number of the beam groups is multiple, determine a reference measurement result, where the reference measurement result is specifically determined according to the group number of the beam group; wherein the group number of the plurality of beam groups has the largest group
  • the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group is the reference measurement result; or the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest group number is the reference measurement result; or the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the intermediate group number
  • the measurement result is a reference measurement result, wherein the beam group of the intermediate group number is a beam group corresponding to the group number of the medium distribution among the group numbers of the plurality of beam groups.
  • the information of the beam group includes: an identifier of a beam group corresponding to at least one of a measurement result of the first beam group and a measurement result of the second beam group, where the identifier of the beam group is the first beam to which the reference measurement result belongs At least one of the beam group identification of the group and the beam group identification of the second beam group to which the offset relative to the reference measurement result belongs.
  • the processor 620 is further configured to: when the identifier of the second beam group is an explicit indication, the identifier of the second beam group is the identifier of the second beam group; or the identifier of the second beam group is relative to the first The offset of the identity of the beam group.
  • the processor 620 is further configured to: when the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group relative to the reference measurement result is sequentially or sequentially decreased according to the group number of the beam group. Or arranging; or, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group relative to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of odd or ascending order of the group number of the beam group; or the measurement result of the second beam group is compared with the reference measurement result The offsets are sequentially arranged in the order of odd or descending order of the group number of the beam group; or, the offsets of the measurement results of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result are arranged according to a preset arrangement.
  • the processor 620 is further configured to: when the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam group is the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group of the largest group number, and the second beam group The measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of decreasing the group number of the beam group with respect to the offset of the reference measurement result; or the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam group is the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group of the smallest group number, The measurement result of the second beam group is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing the group number of the beam group, or the measurement result of the beam group larger than the preset threshold value is arranged according to a preset arrangement manner. .
  • At least one of the preset threshold value and the preset arrangement manner is sent from the radio access network device to the terminal by using at least one of radio resource control RRC signaling and media access control signaling; or, At least one of the threshold value and the preset arrangement manner is configured at the terminal by a pre-configured manner.
  • the transceiver 610 is further configured to receive indication information from the radio access network device, where the indication information is used to indicate whether the processor uses the first beam group as a reference or uses the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference to report the UCI.
  • the indication information may further include: a method for determining a first beam group; and when the indication information is used to instruct the processor to use the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference.
  • the indication information may further include: a method of determining a measurement result of the first beam group as a reference measurement result.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the identifier of the beam group or the identifier of only the beam group is included in the UCI.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the beam group is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate that the UCI sent by the transceiver in the first format includes: the measurement result information of the beam group and the hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ multiplexing or the HARQ multiplexing format.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or a reference signal as a basis for reporting a measurement result of the beam group; wherein, the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier, a channel state indication reference signal CSI-RS or At least one of CSI-RS resource identifiers.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a beam-based terminal according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the terminal may further include: a transceiver 710, configured to send UCI according to a first format that the uplink control information UCI has a radio access network device, wherein the UCI transmitted in the first format includes: at least one of a measurement result information of a beam and information of a beam, where the beam includes: a first beam and a second beam, and the measurement result information of the beam includes: The measurement result of one beam and the measurement result of the second beam are offset with respect to the measurement result of the first beam, the measurement result of the first beam is a reference measurement result, and the information of the beam is used to indicate that the measurement result of the first beam is One or more of the at least one of the measurements of the second beam, the beam may be one or more beams.
  • the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam is a plurality of respectively corresponding beams, that is, the second beam includes: a third beam and a fourth beam, and at this time, the second beam
  • the measurement result includes: a measurement result corresponding to the third beam and a measurement result corresponding to the fourth beam.
  • the second beam is not limited to include the third beam and the fourth beam, and may also include N beam groups, where N is a positive integer.
  • the foregoing terminal further includes: a processor 720, configured to determine a reference measurement result when the beam is multiple, specifically, determining, according to the measured values of the multiple beams, the reference measurement result; wherein, in the measurement values of the multiple beams The measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the largest measurement value is the reference measurement result; or the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the smallest measurement value is the reference measurement result; or the measurement of the beam corresponding to the beam with the intermediate measurement value The result is a reference measurement result.
  • the measurement result of the beam and the beam has a one-to-one correspondence, that is, the first beam has a measurement result of the first beam, or a measurement result of the first beam corresponding to the first beam, and the measurement result of the first beam belongs to the first
  • the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the first beam or the first beam is the first beam
  • the second beam has the measurement result of the second beam, or the measurement result of the second beam corresponding to the second beam
  • the measurement of the second beam belongs to the second beam, or the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam is the second beam.
  • the processor 720 is further configured to determine an intermediate measurement value, specifically, an average value calculated according to the measured values of the multiple beams in the measured values of the multiple beams; or an average calculated according to the maximum measured value and the minimum measured value.
  • the value determines the intermediate measurement value; or, the value of the centered distribution among the measurements of the plurality of beams is selected as the intermediate measurement result value.
  • the processor 720 is further configured to: when a plurality of beams are used, determine a reference measurement result, where the reference measurement result is specifically determined according to the number of the beam; wherein, among the numbers of the multiple beams, the beam corresponding to the beam with the largest number is used.
  • the measurement result is the reference measurement result; or the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the smallest number is the reference measurement result; or the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the middle number is the reference measurement result, wherein the middle numbered beam
  • the information about the beam includes: a beam identifier corresponding to at least one of a measurement result of the first beam and a measurement result of the second beam, where the identifier of the beam is a beam identifier and a relative of the first beam to which the reference measurement result belongs At least one of beam identification beams of the second beam to which the offset of the reference measurement result belongs.
  • the processor 720 is further configured to: when the identifier of the second beam is a dominant indication, the identifier of the second beam is the identifier of the second beam; or the identifier of the second beam is the identifier of the first beam. Offset.
  • the processor 720 is further configured to: when the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the number of the beam; or The offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of odd or ascending order of the beam number; or the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is according to the number of the beam The order of the odd descending order or the even descending order is sequentially arranged; or, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is arranged according to a preset arrangement manner.
  • the processor 720 is further configured to: when the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam is the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the largest numbered beam, and the measurement result of the second beam is relative to the reference.
  • the offset of the measurement result is sequentially arranged in descending order of the number of the beam; or the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam is the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam of the smallest number, and the measurement result of the second beam is compared with the reference measurement result
  • the offsets are sequentially arranged in the order of increasing the number of the beams; or, the measurement results of the beams larger than the preset threshold are arranged according to a preset arrangement.
  • At least one of the preset threshold value and the preset arrangement manner is sent from the radio access network device to the terminal by using at least one of radio resource control RRC signaling and media access control signaling; or, At least one of the threshold value and the preset arrangement manner is configured at the terminal by a pre-configured manner.
  • the transceiver 710 is further configured to receive indication information from the radio access network device, where the indication information is used to indicate whether the processor uses the first beam as a reference or uses the measurement result of the first beam as a reference to report the UCI.
  • the indication information may further include: a method for determining the first beam; and when the indication information is used to instruct the processor to use the measurement result of the first beam as a reference, the indication The information may further include: a method of determining a measurement result of the first beam as a reference measurement result.
  • the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the identifier of the beam or the identifier of only the beam is included in the UCI.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the beam is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate that the UCI sent by the transceiver in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam and hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ multiplexing or HARQ multiplexing format.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or a reference signal as a basis for measuring a measurement result of the beam; wherein the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier, a channel state indication reference signal CSI-RS or CSI - at least one of the RS resource identifiers.
  • the method provided by the embodiment of the present invention performs measurement on the grouped beam group or beam according to the indication message, and determines the measurement result.
  • beam grouping or beam grouping helps to reduce the cost of beam management.
  • the problem of reporting the uplink control information based on the beam packet in the millimeter wave system is solved, and the measurement of the beam group or the beam after the packet is reported by the uplink control information, the resource is used reasonably, and the overhead of reporting is reduced.
  • non-transitory media such as random access memory, read only memory, flash memory, hard disk, solid state disk, magnetic tape, floppy disk, optical disc, and any combination thereof.

Abstract

The embodiments of the present invention relate to a data transmission method. The method specifically comprises: a terminal sending, according to a first format of uplink control information (UCI), the UCI to a radio access network device, wherein the UCI sent in the first format comprises: at least one piece of measurement result information about a beam group and information about the beam group; the beam group comprises: a first beam group and a second beam group; the measurement information about the beam group comprises: a measurement result of the first beam group and an offset of a measurement result of the second beam group relative to the measurement result of the first beam group; the measurement result of the first beam group is a reference measurement result; the information about the beam group is used for indicating a beam group corresponding to at least one of the measurement result of the first beam group and the measurement result of the second beam group; and the beam group is one or more beam groups. In this solution, grouping beams helps to reduce the cost of beam management. In addition, the problem of uplink control information reporting being based on the grouped beam group in a millimeter wave system is solved, the measurement of the beam group after grouping and the reporting thereof through the uplink control information are implemented, the resources are rationally used, and the indirect cost of reporting is reduced.

Description

传输控制方法Transmission control method 技术领域Technical field
本发明涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种上行数据传输的方法、无线接入网设备和终端。The present invention relates to the field of communications technologies, and in particular, to a method for uplink data transmission, a wireless access network device, and a terminal.
背景技术Background technique
在毫米波系统中,一个重要的限制就是在毫米波发射节点或基站和终端之间的通信链路很容易受到移动物体的阻碍,而解决这个问题的方法可以应用超密集网络部署和波束赋形(beamforming)操作,保障毫米波的通信质量。In millimeter-wave systems, an important limitation is that the communication link between the millimeter-wave transmitting node or the base station and the terminal is easily blocked by moving objects, and the solution to this problem can be applied to ultra-dense network deployment and beamforming. (beamforming) operation to ensure the communication quality of millimeter waves.
在5G领域中,我们将研究波束的分组、汇报、基于波束组的指示进行波束测量、基于波束的传输以及转换。其中,波束组的定义如下:对于一个传输点或者多个传输点,将多个传输波束和/或接收波束分成波束集合;或者,将多个传输和/或接收波束对分成波束对集合;或者,对于一个终端,将多个传输波束和/或接收波束分成波束集合;或者,将多个传输和/或接收波束对分成波束对集合。In the 5G field, we will study beam grouping, reporting, beam group based indication beam measurements, beam based transmission, and conversion. Wherein the beam group is defined as follows: for one transmission point or multiple transmission points, multiple transmission beams and/or reception beams are divided into beam sets; or, multiple transmission and/or reception beam pairs are divided into beam pairs; or For a terminal, split multiple transmit beams and/or receive beams into beam sets; or divide multiple transmit and/or receive beam pairs into sets of beam pairs.
目前,在波束汇报的领域中,讨论了需要进行多个波束经过过滤的参考信号接收功率(reference signal receiving power,RSRP)汇报。在一种情况下,当多个波束进行L1差分L1-RSRP汇报时,需要使用用作参考值的RSRP以便实现L1-RSRP的差分汇报。其中,该用作参考值的RSRP可以是预先定义或者可配置的,这样用作波束汇报的上行控制信息(UL control information,UCI)需要重新设计。但是,现有技术中尚未看到有效的实现基于波束分组的上行控制信息设计的方法或者基于波束的上行控制信息设计的方法。At present, in the field of beam reporting, reference signal reception power (RSRP) reporting that requires multiple beams to be filtered is discussed. In one case, when multiple beams perform L1 differential L1-RSRP reporting, it is necessary to use RSRP as a reference value in order to implement differential reporting of L1-RSRP. The RSRP used as the reference value may be predefined or configurable, so that the uplink control information (UCI) used for beam reporting needs to be redesigned. However, an effective method for implementing beam packet based uplink control information design or a beam-based uplink control information design method has not been seen in the prior art.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本发明实施例提供了一种数据传输的方法、无线接入网设备和终端,用于解决没有考虑到毫米波系统中的基于分组后的波束组的上行控制信息上报的问题以及基于波束的上行控制信息上报的问题。The embodiment of the invention provides a data transmission method, a radio access network device and a terminal, which are used for solving the problem of uplink control information reporting and the beam-based uplink without considering the packet-based beam group in the millimeter wave system. Control the problem reported by the information.
第一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种数据传输的方法。该方法具体包括:终端根据上行控制信息UCI具有的第一格式发送UCI至无线接入网设备;其中,以第一格式发送的UCI包括:波束组的测量结果信息和波束组的信息中的至少一个,波束组包括:第一波束组和第二波束组,波束组的测量结果信息包括:第一波束组的测量结果和第二波束组的测量结果相对于第一波束组的测量结果的偏移量,第一波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果,波束组的信息用于指示,第一波束组的测量结果与第二波束组的测量结果中的至少一个所 对应的波束组,该波束组为一个或多个波束组。In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a method for data transmission. The method specifically includes: the terminal transmitting the UCI to the radio access network device according to the first format that the uplink control information UCI has; wherein, the UCI sent in the first format includes: at least: the measurement result information of the beam group and the information of the beam group And the beam group includes: a first beam group and a second beam group, where the measurement result information of the beam group includes: a measurement result of the first beam group and a measurement result of the second beam group relative to a measurement result of the first beam group The measurement result of the first beam group is a reference measurement result, and the information of the beam group is used to indicate a beam group corresponding to at least one of the measurement result of the first beam group and the measurement result of the second beam group, the beam Groups are one or more beam groups.
其中,当第二波束组为多个时,该第二波束组的测量结果对应的波束组为多个分别对应的波束组,即第二波束组包括:第三波束组和第四波束组,此时,第二波束组的测量结果包括:第三波束组对应的测量结果和第四波束组对应的测量结果。需要说明的是,该第二波束组不仅限于包括第三波束组和第四波束组,还可以包括N个波束组,N为正整数。需要说明的是,本申请中所涉及到的“多个”,均指至少两个。The second beam group includes a plurality of corresponding beam groups, and the second beam group includes: a third beam group and a fourth beam group, where the second beam group has a plurality of second beam groups. At this time, the measurement result of the second beam group includes: a measurement result corresponding to the third beam group and a measurement result corresponding to the fourth beam group. It should be noted that the second beam group is not limited to include the third beam group and the fourth beam group, and may further include N beam groups, where N is a positive integer. It should be noted that “a plurality of” referred to in the present application means at least two.
本方案中,对波束分组有助于减少波束管理的成本。同时,解决毫米波系统中的基于分组后的波束组的上行控制信息上报的问题,实现了对于分组后波束组的测量并通过上行控制信息的将其上报,合理运用资源以及减少上报的间接费用。In this solution, grouping the beams helps to reduce the cost of beam management. At the same time, the problem of reporting the uplink control information of the grouped beam group in the millimeter wave system is solved, and the measurement of the grouped beam group is performed, and the uplink control information is reported, the resource is used reasonably, and the overhead of reporting is reduced. .
在一个可选的实现方式中,第一波束组包括:波束组中具有最大测量值对应的波束组;或者,具有最小测量值对应的波束组;或者,具有中间测量值对应的波束组。In an optional implementation manner, the first beam group includes: a beam group corresponding to a largest measurement value in the beam group; or a beam group corresponding to the smallest measurement value; or a beam group corresponding to the intermediate measurement value.
其中,波束组与波束组的测量结果具有一一对应性,即第一波束组有第一波束组的测量结果,或称之为第一波束组对应的第一波束组的测量结果,第一波束组的测量结果属于第一波束组,或第一波束组的测量结果对应的波束组为第一波束组;第二波束组有第二波束组的测量结果,或称之为第二波束组对应的第二波束组的测量结果,第二波束组的测量结果属于第二波束组,或第二波束组的测量结果对应的波束组为第二波束组。The measurement result of the beam group and the beam group has a one-to-one correspondence, that is, the first beam group has the measurement result of the first beam group, or the measurement result of the first beam group corresponding to the first beam group, first The measurement result of the beam group belongs to the first beam group, or the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the first beam group is the first beam group; the second beam group has the measurement result of the second beam group, or the second beam group The measurement result of the corresponding second beam group is that the measurement result of the second beam group belongs to the second beam group, or the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam group is the second beam group.
在另一个可选的实现方式中,中间测量值包括:波束组的测量值计算的平均值;或者,根据最大测量值和最小测量值计算的平均值;或者,波束组的测量值中居中分布的值。在又一个可选的实现方式中,第一波束组包括:波束组中具有最大波束组的组号对应的波束组;或者,具有最小波束组的组号对应的波束组;或者,具有中间组号对应的波束组。其中,中间组号的波束组为多个波束组的组号中居中分布的组号所对应的波束组。In another optional implementation manner, the intermediate measurement value includes: an average value of the measured value of the beam group; or an average value calculated according to the maximum measured value and the minimum measured value; or a centered distribution among the measured values of the beam group Value. In another optional implementation manner, the first beam group includes: a beam group corresponding to a group number of the largest beam group in the beam group; or a beam group corresponding to the group number of the smallest beam group; or, has a middle group The corresponding beam group. The beam group of the intermediate group number is a beam group corresponding to the group number of the medium-distributed group among the group numbers of the plurality of beam groups.
在另一个可选的实现方式中,上述波束组的信息,包括:第一波束组的测量结果与第二波束组的测量结果中的至少一个所对应的波束组的标识,其中,波束组的标识为参考测量结果所属的第一波束组的波束组标识和相对于参考测量结果的偏移量所属的第二波束组的波束组标识中至少一个。In another optional implementation manner, the information about the beam group includes: a identifier of a beam group corresponding to at least one of a measurement result of the first beam group and a measurement result of the second beam group, where the beam group And identifying at least one of a beam group identifier of the first beam group to which the reference measurement result belongs and a beam group identifier of the second beam group to which the offset with respect to the reference measurement result belongs.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述当第二波束组的标识为显性指示时,第二波束组的标识为第二波束组的标识本身;或者,第二波束组的标识为相对于第一波束组的标识的偏移量。In another optional implementation manner, when the identifier of the second beam group is a dominant indication, the identifier of the second beam group is the identifier of the second beam group; or the identifier of the second beam group is relative to The offset of the identity of the first beam set.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述当第二波束组的标识为隐性指示时,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号递增或递减的顺序依次排列;或者,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号奇数升序或偶数升序的顺序依次排列;或者,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号奇数降序或偶数降序的顺序依次排列;或者,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量根据预设排列方式进行排列。In still another optional implementation manner, when the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group relative to the reference measurement result is increased or decreased according to the group number of the beam group. Or sequentially, or sequentially, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group relative to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of odd or ascending order of the group number of the beam group; or the measurement result of the second beam group is relative to the reference The offset of the measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of odd or descending order of the group number of the beam group; or, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is arranged according to a preset arrangement.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述当第二波束组的标识为隐性指示时,第一波束组对 应的参考测量结果为最大组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号递减的顺序依次排列;或者,第一波束组对应的参考测量结果为最小组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号递增的顺序依次排列;或者,对大于预设门限值的波束组的测量结果根据预设排列方式进行排列。In another optional implementation manner, when the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam group is the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group of the largest group number, and the second The measurement result of the beam group relative to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in descending order of the group number of the beam group; or the reference beam measurement corresponding to the first beam group is the measurement of the beam group corresponding to the beam group of the smallest group number As a result, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing the group number of the beam group; or, the measurement result of the beam group larger than the preset threshold value is according to a preset arrangement manner. Arrange.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述预设门限值和预设排列方式中的至少一种通过无线资源控制无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)信令和媒体访问控制信令(media access control,MAC)信令中的至少一种信令从无线接入网设备发送至终端;或者,将预设门限值和预设排列方式中的至少一种通过预置在终端处。In another optional implementation manner, at least one of the foregoing preset threshold and the preset arrangement controls radio resource control (RRC) signaling and media access control signaling by using radio resources (media) At least one type of signaling in the access control (MAC) signaling is sent from the radio access network device to the terminal; or at least one of a preset threshold and a preset arrangement is preset at the terminal.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述在终端根据上行控制信息UCI具有的第一格式发送UCI至无线接入网设备的步骤之前,还包括:终端从无线接入网设备接收指示信息,指示信息,用于指示终端是否使用第一波束组作为参考或者使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考上报UCI。In still another optional implementation, before the step of transmitting, by the terminal, the UCI to the radio access network device according to the first format that the uplink control information UCI has, the method further includes: the terminal receiving the indication information from the radio access network device, the indication The information is used to indicate whether the terminal uses the first beam group as a reference or uses the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference to report the UCI.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述当指示信息用于指示终端使用第一波束组作为参考时,指示信息还可以包括:确定第一波束组的方法;当指示信息用于指示终端使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考时,指示信息还可以包括:确定第一波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果的方法。In still another optional implementation, when the indication information is used to indicate that the terminal uses the first beam group as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method for determining the first beam group; and when the indication information is used to indicate the terminal usage When the measurement result of a beam group is used as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method of determining a measurement result of the first beam group as a reference measurement result.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示UCI中是否包括波束组的标识或只包括波束组的标识。In another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the UCI includes an identifier of the beam group or only an identifier of the beam group.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示波束组的测量结果所对应的波束组的标识被显性指示或者隐性指示。In another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the beam group is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示终端以第一格式发送的UCI中包括:波束组的测量结果信息与混合自动重传请求HARQ复用或者所述HARQ复用格式。In another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to: indicate, in the UCI that the terminal sends in the first format, that the measurement result information of the beam group is hybrid HARQ multiplexing or the HARQ multiplexing. format.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示用于测量的参考信号或作为所述波束组的测量结果上报依据的所述参考信号;其中,参考信号包括:同步信号、同步信号资源标识,信道状态指示参考信号CSI-RS或所述CSI-RS资源标识中的至少一种。In another optional implementation manner, the indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or the reference signal that is used as a measurement result of the measurement result of the beam group; wherein the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, The synchronization signal resource identifier, the channel status indication at least one of a reference signal CSI-RS or the CSI-RS resource identifier.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供了一种数据传输的方法。该方法具体包括:终端根据上行控制信息UCI具有的第一格式发送所述UCI至无线接入网设备;其中,以第一格式发送的UCI包括:波束的测量结果信息和波束的信息中的至少一个,波束包括:第一波束和第二波束,波束的测量结果信息包括:第一波束的测量结果和第二波束的测量结果相对于第一波束的测量结果的偏移量,第一波束的测量结果为参考测量结果,波束的信息用于指示,第一波束的测量结果与第二波束的测量结果中的至少一个所对应的波束,该波束为一个或多个波束。其中,当第二波束为多个时,该第二波束的测量结果对应的波束为多个分别对 应的波束,即第二波束包括:第三波束和第四波束,此时,第二波束的测量结果包括:第三波束对应的测量结果和第四波束对应的测量结果。需要说明的是,该第二波束不仅限于包括第三波束和第四波束,还可以包括N个波束组,N为正整数。In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a method for data transmission. The method specifically includes: the terminal transmitting the UCI to the radio access network device according to the first format that the uplink control information UCI has; wherein, the UCI sent in the first format includes: at least: measurement result information of the beam and information of the beam The beam includes: a first beam and a second beam, and the measurement result information of the beam includes: a measurement result of the first beam and an offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the measurement result of the first beam, where the first beam The measurement result is a reference measurement result, and the information of the beam is used to indicate a beam corresponding to at least one of the measurement result of the first beam and the measurement result of the second beam, the beam being one or more beams. Wherein, when the second beam is multiple, the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam is a plurality of respectively corresponding beams, that is, the second beam includes: a third beam and a fourth beam, and at this time, the second beam The measurement result includes: a measurement result corresponding to the third beam and a measurement result corresponding to the fourth beam. It should be noted that the second beam is not limited to include the third beam and the fourth beam, and may also include N beam groups, where N is a positive integer.
本方案中,解决了在毫米波系统中的基于波束的上行控制信息上报的问题,实现了对于波束的测量并通过上行控制信息的将其上报,合理运用资源以及减少上报的间接费用。In this solution, the problem of reporting the beam-based uplink control information in the millimeter wave system is solved, and the measurement of the beam is performed, and the uplink control information is reported, the resource is used reasonably, and the overhead of reporting is reduced.
在一个可选的实现方式中,第一波束包括:波束中具有最大测量值对应的波束;或者,具有最小测量值对应的波束;或者,具有中间测量值对应的波束。其中,波束与波束的测量结果具有一一对应性,即第一波束有第一波束的测量结果,或称之为第一波束对应的第一波束的测量结果,第一波束的测量结果属于第一波束,或第一波束的测量结果对应的波束为第一波束;第二波束有第二波束的测量结果,或称之为第二波束对应的第二波束的测量结果,第二波束的测量结果属于第二波束,或第二波束的测量结果对应的波束为第二波束。In an optional implementation manner, the first beam includes: a beam corresponding to the largest measured value in the beam; or a beam corresponding to the smallest measured value; or a beam corresponding to the intermediate measured value. The measurement result of the beam and the beam has a one-to-one correspondence, that is, the first beam has a measurement result of the first beam, or a measurement result of the first beam corresponding to the first beam, and the measurement result of the first beam belongs to the first The beam corresponding to the measurement result of the first beam or the first beam is the first beam; the second beam has the measurement result of the second beam, or the measurement result of the second beam corresponding to the second beam, and the measurement of the second beam The result belongs to the second beam, or the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam is the second beam.
在另一个可选的实现方式中,中间测量值包括:波束的测量值计算的平均值;或者,根据最大测量值和最小测量值计算的平均值;或者,波束的测量值中居中分布的值。In another optional implementation, the intermediate measurement value includes: an average value of the measured value of the beam; or an average value calculated according to the maximum measured value and the minimum measured value; or a value of the centered distribution among the measured values of the beam .
在又一个可选的实现方式中,第一波束包括:波束中具有最大波束的编号对应的波束;或者,具有最小波束的编号对应的波束;或者,具有中间编号对应的波束。其中,中间编号的波束为多个波束的编号中居中分布的编号所对应的波束。In still another optional implementation manner, the first beam includes: a beam corresponding to the number of the largest beam in the beam; or a beam corresponding to the number of the smallest beam; or a beam corresponding to the intermediate number. The intermediate numbered beam is a beam corresponding to the number of the centrally distributed number among the plurality of beam numbers.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述波束的信息,包括:第一波束的测量结果与第二波束的测量结果中的至少一个所对应的波束的标识,其中,波束的标识为参考测量结果所属的第一波束的波束标识和相对于参考测量结果的偏移量所属的第二波束的波束标识中至少一个。In another optional implementation manner, the information about the beam includes: a identifier of a beam corresponding to at least one of a measurement result of the first beam and a measurement result of the second beam, where the identifier of the beam is a reference measurement result. At least one of a beam identifier of the associated first beam and a beam identifier of the second beam to which the offset relative to the reference measurement result belongs.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述波束的信息,包括:当第二波束的标识为显性指示时,第二波束的标识为第二波束的标识本身;或者,第二波束的标识为相对于第一波束的标识的偏移量。In another optional implementation manner, the information about the beam includes: when the identifier of the second beam is a dominant indication, the identifier of the second beam is the identifier of the second beam; or the identifier of the second beam is The offset from the identity of the first beam.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述当第二波束的标识为隐性指示时,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号递增或递减的顺序依次排列;或者,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号奇数升序或偶数升序的顺序依次排列;或者,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号奇数降序或偶数降序的顺序依次排列;或者,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量根据预设排列方式进行排列。In still another optional implementation manner, when the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam relative to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the number of the beam; Alternatively, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of odd or ascending order of the beam number; or the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result according to the beam The number of the odd-numbered descending order or the even-numbered descending order is sequentially arranged; or, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is arranged according to a preset arrangement manner.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述当第二波束的标识为隐性指示时,第一波束对应的参考测量结果为最大编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号递减的顺序依次排列;或者,第一波束对应的参考测量结果为最小编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号递增的顺序依次排列;或者,对大于预设门限值的波束的测量结 果根据预设排列方式进行排列。In another optional implementation manner, when the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam is the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the largest numbered beam, and the measurement result of the second beam is relatively The offsets of the reference measurement results are sequentially arranged in descending order of the number of the beams; or the reference measurement corresponding to the first beam is the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the smallest numbered beam, and the measurement result of the second beam is relative to the reference measurement The resulting offsets are sequentially arranged in the order in which the number of the beams is incremented; or, the measurement results of the beams larger than the preset threshold are arranged according to a preset arrangement.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述预设门限值和预设排列方式中的至少一种通过无线资源控制RRC信令和媒体访问控制信令中的至少一种信令从无线接入网设备发送至终端;或者,将预设门限值和预设排列方式中的至少一种预置在终端处。In another optional implementation manner, at least one of the foregoing preset threshold value and the preset arrangement manner is used to obtain radio access by using at least one of radio resource control RRC signaling and media access control signaling. The network device sends to the terminal; or, at least one of a preset threshold and a preset arrangement is preset at the terminal.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述在终端根据上行控制信息UCI具有的第一格式发送UCI至无线接入网设备的步骤之前,还包括:终端从无线接入网设备接收指示信息,指示信息,用于指示终端是否使用第一波束作为参考或者使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考上报UCI。In still another optional implementation, before the step of transmitting, by the terminal, the UCI to the radio access network device according to the first format that the uplink control information UCI has, the method further includes: the terminal receiving the indication information from the radio access network device, the indication The information is used to indicate whether the terminal uses the first beam as a reference or uses the measurement result of the first beam as a reference to report the UCI.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述当指示信息用于指示终端使用第一波束作为参考时,指示信息还可以包括:确定第一波束的方法;当指示信息用于指示终端使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考时,指示信息还可以包括:确定第一波束的测量结果为参考测量结果的方法。In still another optional implementation, when the indication information is used to indicate that the terminal uses the first beam as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method for determining the first beam; and the indication information is used to indicate that the terminal uses the first beam. When the measurement result is used as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method of determining a measurement result of the first beam as a reference measurement result.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示UCI中是否包括波束的标识或只包括波束的标识。In an optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the identifier of the beam or the identifier of only the beam is included in the UCI.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示波束的测量结果所对应的波束的标识被显性指示或者隐性指示。In another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the beam is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示终端以第一格式发送的UCI中包括:波束的测量结果信息与混合自动重传请求HARQ复用或者HARQ复用格式。In an optional implementation manner, the indication information is further used to indicate that the UCI sent by the terminal in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam and hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ multiplexing or HARQ multiplexing format.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示用于测量的参考信号或作为波束的测量结果上报依据的参考信号;其中,参考信号包括:同步信号、同步信号资源标识,信道状态指示参考信号CSI-RS或CSI-RS资源标识中的至少一种。In another optional implementation manner, the indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or a reference signal used as a measurement result of the measurement result of the beam; wherein, the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier, The channel status indicates at least one of a reference signal CSI-RS or a CSI-RS resource identifier.
第三方面,本申请实施例提供了一种数据传输的方法。该方法具体包括:无线接入网设备向终端发送指示信息,指示信息,用于指示终端是否使用第一波束组或者使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考上报上行控制信息UCI;无线接入网设备从终端接收以第一格式发送的UCI,UCI包括:波束组的测量结果信息和波束组的信息中的至少一个,波束组包括:第一波束组和第二波束组,波束组的测量结果信息包括:第一波束组的测量结果和第二波束组的测量结果相对于第一波束组的测量结果的偏移量,第一波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果,波束组的信息用于指示,第一波束组的测量结果与第二波束组的测量结果中的至少一个所对应的波束组,该波束组为一个或多个波束组。其中,当第二波束为多个时,该第二波束的测量结果对应的波束为多个分别对应的波束,即第二波束包括:第三波束和第四波束,此时,第二波束的测量结果包括:第三波束对应的测量结果和第四波束对应的测量结果。需要说明的是,该第二波束不仅限于包括第三波束和第四波束,还可以包括N个波束组,N为正整数。In a third aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a method for data transmission. The method specifically includes: the radio access network device sends the indication information to the terminal, and the indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal uses the first beam group or uses the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference to report the uplink control information UCI; the radio access network The device receives, from the terminal, the UCI sent in the first format, where the UCI includes at least one of the measurement result information of the beam group and the information of the beam group, where the beam group includes: the first beam group and the second beam group, and the measurement result of the beam group The information includes: a measurement result of the first beam group and an offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the measurement result of the first beam group, the measurement result of the first beam group is a reference measurement result, and the information of the beam group is used for And indicating a beam group corresponding to at least one of a measurement result of the first beam group and a measurement result of the second beam group, the beam group being one or more beam groups. Wherein, when the second beam is multiple, the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam is a plurality of respectively corresponding beams, that is, the second beam includes: a third beam and a fourth beam, and at this time, the second beam The measurement result includes: a measurement result corresponding to the third beam and a measurement result corresponding to the fourth beam. It should be noted that the second beam is not limited to include the third beam and the fourth beam, and may also include N beam groups, where N is a positive integer.
本方案中,对波束分组有助于减少波束管理的成本。同时,解决毫米波系统中的基于 分组后的波束组的上行控制信息上报的问题,实现了对于分组后波束组的测量并通过上行控制信息的将其上报,合理运用资源以及减少上报的间接费用。In this solution, grouping the beams helps to reduce the cost of beam management. At the same time, the problem of reporting the uplink control information of the grouped beam group in the millimeter wave system is solved, and the measurement of the grouped beam group is performed, and the uplink control information is reported, the resource is used reasonably, and the overhead of reporting is reduced. .
在一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示终端是否使用第一波束组作为参考或者使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考上报UCI。In an optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the terminal uses the first beam group as a reference or uses the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference to report the UCI.
在另一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示终端在多个波束组中确定第一波束组,并以第一波束组或者使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考上报UCI。In another optional implementation manner, the indication information is further used to: instruct the terminal to determine the first beam group in the multiple beam groups, and report the UCI in the first beam group or using the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference. .
在又一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示终端是否使用确定第一波束组的方法确定第一波束组。In still another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the terminal determines the first beam group by using a method for determining the first beam group.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示UCI中是否包括波束组的标识或只包括波束组的标识。In another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the UCI includes an identifier of the beam group or only an identifier of the beam group.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示波束组的测量结果所对应的波束组的标识被显性指示或者隐性指示。In another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the beam group is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示终端以第一格式发送的UCI中包括:波束组的测量结果信息与混合自动重传请求HARQ复用或者所述HARQ复用格式。In another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to: indicate, in the UCI that the terminal sends in the first format, that the measurement result information of the beam group is hybrid HARQ multiplexing or the HARQ multiplexing. format.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示用于测量的参考信号或作为所述波束组的测量结果上报依据的所述参考信号;其中,参考信号包括:同步信号、同步信号资源标识,信道状态指示参考信号CSI-RS或所述CSI-RS资源标识中的至少一种。In another optional implementation manner, the indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or the reference signal that is used as a measurement result of the measurement result of the beam group; wherein the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, The synchronization signal resource identifier, the channel status indication at least one of a reference signal CSI-RS or the CSI-RS resource identifier.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息通过无线资源控制信令、媒体访问控制信令和物理层信令中的至少一项来进行指示的。In still another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is indicated by at least one of radio resource control signaling, media access control signaling, and physical layer signaling.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供了一种数据传输的方法。该方法具体包括:无线接入网设备向终端发送指示信息,指示信息,用于指示终端是否使用第一波束或者使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考上报上行控制信息UCI;无线接入网设备从终端接收以第一格式发送的UCI,UCI包括:波束的测量结果信息和波束的信息中的至少一个,波束包括:第一波束和第二波束,波束的测量结果信息包括:第一波束的测量结果和第二波束的测量结果相对于第一波束的测量结果的偏移量,第一波束的测量结果为参考测量结果,波束的信息用于指示,第一波束的测量结果与第二波束的测量结果中的至少一个所对应的波束,该波束为一个或多个波束。其中,当第二波束为多个时,该第二波束的测量结果对应的波束为多个分别对应的波束,即第二波束包括:第三波束和第四波束,此时,第二波束的测量结果包括:第三波束对应的测量结果和第四波束对应的测量结果。需要说明的是,该第二波束不仅限于包括第三波束和第四波束,还可以包括N个波束组,N为正整数。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a method for data transmission. The method specifically includes: the radio access network device sends the indication information to the terminal, where the indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal uses the first beam or uses the measurement result of the first beam as a reference to report the uplink control information UCI; The terminal receives the UCI transmitted in the first format, where the UCI includes at least one of the measurement result information of the beam and the information of the beam, the beam includes: a first beam and a second beam, and the measurement result information of the beam includes: measurement of the first beam The result and the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the measurement result of the first beam, the measurement result of the first beam is a reference measurement result, and the information of the beam is used to indicate the measurement result of the first beam and the second beam A beam corresponding to at least one of the measurement results, the beam being one or more beams. Wherein, when the second beam is multiple, the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam is a plurality of respectively corresponding beams, that is, the second beam includes: a third beam and a fourth beam, and at this time, the second beam The measurement result includes: a measurement result corresponding to the third beam and a measurement result corresponding to the fourth beam. It should be noted that the second beam is not limited to include the third beam and the fourth beam, and may also include N beam groups, where N is a positive integer.
本方案中,解决了在毫米波系统中的基于波束的上行控制信息上报的问题,实现了对于波束的测量并通过上行控制信息的将其上报,合理运用资源以及减少上报的间接费用。In this solution, the problem of reporting the beam-based uplink control information in the millimeter wave system is solved, and the measurement of the beam is performed, and the uplink control information is reported, the resource is used reasonably, and the overhead of reporting is reduced.
在一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示终端是否使用第一波束作为参考或者使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考上报UCI。In an optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the terminal uses the first beam as a reference or uses the measurement result of the first beam as a reference to report the UCI.
在另一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示终端在多个波束中确定第一波束,并以第一波束或者使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考上报UCI。In another optional implementation manner, the indication information is further used to indicate that the terminal determines the first beam in the multiple beams, and reports the UCI by using the first beam or the measurement result of the first beam as a reference.
在又一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示终端是否使用确定第一波束组的方法确定第一波束组。In still another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the terminal determines the first beam group by using a method for determining the first beam group.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示UCI中是否包括波束的标识或只包括波束的标识。In an optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the identifier of the beam or the identifier of only the beam is included in the UCI.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示波束的测量结果所对应的波束的标识被显性指示或者隐性指示。In another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the beam is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示终端以第一格式发送的UCI中包括:波束的测量结果信息与混合自动重传请求HARQ复用或者HARQ复用格式。In an optional implementation manner, the indication information is further used to indicate that the UCI sent by the terminal in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam and hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ multiplexing or HARQ multiplexing format.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示用于测量的参考信号或作为波束的测量结果上报依据的参考信号;其中,参考信号包括:同步信号、同步信号资源标识,信道状态指示参考信号CSI-RS或CSI-RS资源标识中的至少一种。In another optional implementation manner, the indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or a reference signal used as a measurement result of the measurement result of the beam; wherein, the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier, The channel status indicates at least one of a reference signal CSI-RS or a CSI-RS resource identifier.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息通过无线资源控制信令、媒体访问控制信令和物理层信令中的至少一项来进行指示的。In still another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is indicated by at least one of radio resource control signaling, media access control signaling, and physical layer signaling.
第五方面,本申请实施例提供了一种终端。该终端具体可以包括:收发器,用于根据上行控制信息UCI具有的第一格式发送UCI至无线接入网设备;其中,以第一格式发送的UCI包括:波束组的测量结果信息和波束组的信息中的至少一个,波束组包括:第一波束组和第二波束组,波束组的测量结果信息包括:第一波束组的测量结果和第二波束组的测量结果相对于第一波束组的测量结果的偏移量,第一波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果,波束组的信息用于指示,第一波束组的测量结果与第二波束组的测量结果中的至少一个所对应的波束组,该波束组为一个或多个波束组。其中,当第二波束组为多个时,该第二波束组的测量结果对应的波束组为多个分别对应的波束组,即第二波束组包括:第三波束组和第四波束组,此时,第二波束组的测量结果包括:第三波束组对应的测量结果和第四波束组对应的测量结果。需要说明的是,该第二波束组不仅限于包括第三波束组和第四波束组,还可以包括N个波束组,N为正整数。In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a terminal. The terminal may include: a transceiver, configured to send the UCI to the radio access network device according to the first format that the uplink control information UCI has; wherein the UCI sent in the first format includes: the measurement result information and the beam group of the beam group At least one of the information, the beam group includes: a first beam group and a second beam group, and the measurement result information of the beam group includes: a measurement result of the first beam group and a measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the first beam group The offset of the measurement result, the measurement result of the first beam group is a reference measurement result, and the information of the beam group is used to indicate that the measurement result of the first beam group corresponds to at least one of the measurement results of the second beam group A beam group, the beam group being one or more beam groups. The second beam group includes a plurality of corresponding beam groups, and the second beam group includes: a third beam group and a fourth beam group, where the second beam group has a plurality of second beam groups. At this time, the measurement result of the second beam group includes: a measurement result corresponding to the third beam group and a measurement result corresponding to the fourth beam group. It should be noted that the second beam group is not limited to include the third beam group and the fourth beam group, and may further include N beam groups, where N is a positive integer.
本方案中,对波束分组有助于减少波束管理的成本。同时,解决毫米波系统中的基于分组后的波束组的上行控制信息上报的问题,实现了对于分组后波束组的测量并通过上行控制信息的将其上报,合理运用资源以及减少上报的间接费用。In this solution, grouping the beams helps to reduce the cost of beam management. At the same time, the problem of reporting the uplink control information of the grouped beam group in the millimeter wave system is solved, and the measurement of the grouped beam group is performed, and the uplink control information is reported, the resource is used reasonably, and the overhead of reporting is reduced. .
在一个可选的实现方式中,第一波束组包括:波束组中具有最大测量值对应的波束组;或者,具有最小测量值对应的波束组;或者,具有中间测量值对应的波束组。其中,波束 组与波束组的测量结果具有一一对应性,即第一波束组有第一波束组的测量结果,或称之为第一波束组对应的第一波束组的测量结果,第一波束组的测量结果属于第一波束组,或第一波束组的测量结果对应的波束组为第一波束组;第二波束组有第二波束组的测量结果,或称之为第二波束组对应的第二波束组的测量结果,第二波束组的测量结果属于第二波束组,或第二波束组的测量结果对应的波束组为第二波束组。In an optional implementation manner, the first beam group includes: a beam group corresponding to a largest measurement value in the beam group; or a beam group corresponding to the smallest measurement value; or a beam group corresponding to the intermediate measurement value. The measurement result of the beam group and the beam group has a one-to-one correspondence, that is, the first beam group has the measurement result of the first beam group, or the measurement result of the first beam group corresponding to the first beam group, first The measurement result of the beam group belongs to the first beam group, or the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the first beam group is the first beam group; the second beam group has the measurement result of the second beam group, or the second beam group The measurement result of the corresponding second beam group is that the measurement result of the second beam group belongs to the second beam group, or the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam group is the second beam group.
在另一个可选的实现方式中,中间测量值包括:波束组的测量值计算的平均值;或者,根据最大测量值和最小测量值计算的平均值;或者,波束组的测量值中居中分布的值。在又一个可选的实现方式中,第一波束组包括:波束组中具有最大波束组的组号对应的波束组;或者,具有最小波束组的组号对应的波束组;或者,具有中间组号对应的波束组。其中,中间组号的波束组为多个波束组的组号中居中分布的组号所对应的波束组。In another optional implementation manner, the intermediate measurement value includes: an average value of the measured value of the beam group; or an average value calculated according to the maximum measured value and the minimum measured value; or a centered distribution among the measured values of the beam group Value. In another optional implementation manner, the first beam group includes: a beam group corresponding to a group number of the largest beam group in the beam group; or a beam group corresponding to the group number of the smallest beam group; or, has a middle group The corresponding beam group. The beam group of the intermediate group number is a beam group corresponding to the group number of the medium-distributed group among the group numbers of the plurality of beam groups.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述波束组的信息,包括:第一波束组的测量结果与第二波束组的测量结果中的至少一个所对应的波束组的标识,其中,波束组的标识为参考测量结果所属的第一波束组的波束组标识和相对于参考测量结果的偏移量所属的第二波束组的波束组标识中至少一个。In another optional implementation manner, the information about the beam group includes: a identifier of a beam group corresponding to at least one of a measurement result of the first beam group and a measurement result of the second beam group, where the beam group And identifying at least one of a beam group identifier of the first beam group to which the reference measurement result belongs and a beam group identifier of the second beam group to which the offset with respect to the reference measurement result belongs.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述处理器还用于确定,当第二波束组的标识为显性指示时,第二波束组的标识为第二波束组的标识本身;或者,第二波束组的标识为相对于第一波束组的标识的偏移量。In another optional implementation manner, the processor is further configured to: when the identifier of the second beam group is an explicit indication, the identifier of the second beam group is the identifier of the second beam group; or, the second The identity of the beam set is an offset from the identity of the first beam set.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述处理器还用于确定,当第二波束组的标识为隐性指示时,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号递增或递减的顺序依次排列;或者,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号奇数升序或偶数升序的顺序依次排列;或者,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号奇数降序或偶数降序的顺序依次排列;或者,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量根据预设排列方式进行排列。In another optional implementation manner, the processor is further configured to determine, when the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group relative to the reference measurement result according to the beam group The group numbers are sequentially arranged in descending or decreasing order; or, the offsets of the measurement results of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result are sequentially arranged in the order of odd or ascending order of the group number of the beam group; or, the second beam The offset of the measurement result of the group relative to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of odd or descending order of the group number of the beam group; or the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is preset according to the preset Arrange the arrangement.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述处理器还用于确定,当第二波束组的标识为隐性指示时,第一波束组对应的参考测量结果为最大组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号递减的顺序依次排列;或者,第一波束组对应的参考测量结果为最小组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号递增的顺序依次排列;或者,对大于预设门限值的波束组的测量结果根据预设排列方式进行排列。In another optional implementation manner, the processor is further configured to determine, when the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam group is a beam corresponding to the beam group of the largest group number. The measurement result of the group, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group relative to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in descending order of the group number of the beam group; or the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam group is the beam of the smallest group number The measurement result of the corresponding beam group of the group, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing the group number of the beam group; or, for the beam group larger than the preset threshold value The measurement results are arranged according to a preset arrangement.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述预设门限值和预设排列方式中的至少一种通过无线资源控制RRC信令和媒体访问控制信令中的至少一种信令从无线接入网设备发送至终端;或者,将预设门限值和预设排列方式中的至少一种预置在终端处。In another optional implementation manner, at least one of the foregoing preset threshold value and the preset arrangement manner is used to obtain radio access by using at least one of radio resource control RRC signaling and media access control signaling. The network device sends to the terminal; or, at least one of a preset threshold and a preset arrangement is preset at the terminal.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述收发器还用于,从无线接入网设备接收指示信息,指示信息,用于指示处理器是否使用第一波束组作为参考或者使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考上报UCI。In an optional implementation manner, the transceiver is further configured to receive indication information from the radio access network device, and the indication information is used to indicate whether the processor uses the first beam group as a reference or uses the first beam group. The measurement results are reported to UCI as a reference.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述当指示信息用于指示处理器使用第一波束组作为参考时,指示信息还可以包括:确定第一波束组的方法;当指示信息用于指示处理器使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考时,指示信息还可以包括:确定第一波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果的方法。In still another optional implementation, when the indication information is used to indicate that the processor uses the first beam group as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method for determining the first beam group; and when the indication information is used to indicate the processor When the measurement result of the first beam group is used as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method of determining a measurement result of the first beam group as a reference measurement result.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示UCI中是否包括波束组的标识或只包括波束组的标识。In another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the UCI includes an identifier of the beam group or only an identifier of the beam group.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示波束组的测量结果所对应的波束组的标识被显性指示或者隐性指示。In another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the beam group is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示收发器以第一格式发送的UCI中包括:波束组的测量结果信息与混合自动重传请求HARQ复用或者HARQ复用格式。In another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to: indicate, in the UCI that the transceiver sends in the first format, that: the measurement result information of the beam group and the hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ multiplexing or the HARQ multiplexing format .
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示用于测量的参考信号或作为波束组的测量结果上报依据的参考信号;其中,参考信号包括:同步信号、同步信号资源标识,信道状态指示参考信号CSI-RS或CSI-RS资源标识中的至少一种。In another optional implementation manner, the indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or a reference signal used as a measurement result of the measurement result of the beam group; wherein the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier The channel status indicates at least one of a reference signal CSI-RS or a CSI-RS resource identifier.
第六方面,本申请实施例提供了一种终端。该终端具体可以包括:收发器,用于根据上行控制信息UCI具有的第一格式发送UCI至无线接入网设备;其中,以第一格式发送的UCI包括:波束的测量结果信息和波束的信息中的至少一个,波束包括:第一波束和第二波束,波束的测量结果信息包括:第一波束的测量结果和第二波束的测量结果相对于第一波束的测量结果的偏移量,第一波束的测量结果为参考测量结果,波束的信息用于指示,第一波束的测量结果与第二波束的测量结果中的至少一个所对应的波束,该波束为一个或多个波束。其中,当第二波束为多个时,该第二波束的测量结果对应的波束为多个分别对应的波束,即第二波束包括:第三波束和第四波束,此时,第二波束的测量结果包括:第三波束对应的测量结果和第四波束对应的测量结果。需要说明的是,该第二波束不仅限于包括第三波束和第四波束,还可以包括N个波束组,N为正整数。In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a terminal. The terminal may include: a transceiver, configured to send the UCI to the radio access network device according to the first format that the uplink control information UCI has; wherein the UCI sent in the first format includes: the measurement result information of the beam and the information of the beam At least one of the beams includes: a first beam and a second beam, and the measurement result information of the beam includes: a measurement result of the first beam and an offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the measurement result of the first beam, The measurement result of one beam is a reference measurement result, and the information of the beam is used to indicate a beam corresponding to at least one of the measurement result of the first beam and the measurement result of the second beam, the beam being one or more beams. Wherein, when the second beam is multiple, the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam is a plurality of respectively corresponding beams, that is, the second beam includes: a third beam and a fourth beam, and at this time, the second beam The measurement result includes: a measurement result corresponding to the third beam and a measurement result corresponding to the fourth beam. It should be noted that the second beam is not limited to include the third beam and the fourth beam, and may also include N beam groups, where N is a positive integer.
本方案中,解决了在毫米波系统中的基于波束的上行控制信息上报的问题,实现了对于波束的测量并通过上行控制信息的将其上报,合理运用资源以及减少上报的间接费用。In this solution, the problem of reporting the beam-based uplink control information in the millimeter wave system is solved, and the measurement of the beam is performed, and the uplink control information is reported, the resource is used reasonably, and the overhead of reporting is reduced.
在一个可选的实现方式中,第一波束包括:波束中具有最大测量值对应的波束;或者,具有最小测量值对应的波束;或者,具有中间测量值对应的波束。其中,波束与波束的测量结果具有一一对应性,即第一波束有第一波束的测量结果,或称之为第一波束对应的第一波束的测量结果,第一波束的测量结果属于第一波束,或第一波束的测量结果对应的波束为第一波束;第二波束有第二波束的测量结果,或称之为第二波束对应的第二波束的测量结果,第二波束的测量结果属于第二波束,或第二波束的测量结果对应的波束为第二波束。In an optional implementation manner, the first beam includes: a beam corresponding to the largest measured value in the beam; or a beam corresponding to the smallest measured value; or a beam corresponding to the intermediate measured value. The measurement result of the beam and the beam has a one-to-one correspondence, that is, the first beam has a measurement result of the first beam, or a measurement result of the first beam corresponding to the first beam, and the measurement result of the first beam belongs to the first The beam corresponding to the measurement result of the first beam or the first beam is the first beam; the second beam has the measurement result of the second beam, or the measurement result of the second beam corresponding to the second beam, and the measurement of the second beam The result belongs to the second beam, or the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam is the second beam.
在另一个可选的实现方式中,中间测量值包括:波束的测量值计算的平均值;或者,根据最大测量值和最小测量值计算的平均值;或者,波束的测量值中居中分布的值。在又一个可选的实现方式中,上述处理器还用于,第一波束包括:波束中具有最大波束的编号 对应的波束;或者,具有最小波束的编号对应的波束;或者,具有中间编号对应的波束。其中,中间编号的波束为多个波束的编号中居中分布的编号所对应的波束。In another optional implementation, the intermediate measurement value includes: an average value of the measured value of the beam; or an average value calculated according to the maximum measured value and the minimum measured value; or a value of the centered distribution among the measured values of the beam . In still another optional implementation, the processor is further configured to: the first beam includes: a beam corresponding to a number of the largest beam in the beam; or a beam corresponding to the number of the smallest beam; or, with a middle number corresponding Beam. The intermediate numbered beam is a beam corresponding to the number of the centrally distributed number among the plurality of beam numbers.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述波束的信息,包括:第一波束的测量结果与第二波束的测量结果中的至少一个所对应的波束的标识,其中,波束的标识为参考测量结果所属的第一波束的波束标识和相对于参考测量结果的偏移量所属的第二波束的波束标识波束中至少一个。In another optional implementation manner, the information about the beam includes: a identifier of a beam corresponding to at least one of a measurement result of the first beam and a measurement result of the second beam, where the identifier of the beam is a reference measurement result. At least one of a beam identifier of the associated first beam and a beam identification beam of the second beam to which the offset relative to the reference measurement result belongs.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述处理器还用于确定,当第二波束的标识为显性指示时,第二波束的标识为第二波束的标识本身;或者,第二波束的标识为相对于第一波束的标识的偏移量。In another optional implementation manner, the processor is further configured to: when the identifier of the second beam is a dominant indication, the identifier of the second beam is the identifier of the second beam; or the identifier of the second beam Is the offset from the identity of the first beam.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述处理器还用于确定,当第二波束的标识为隐性指示时,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号递增或递减的顺序依次排列;或者,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号奇数升序或偶数升序的顺序依次排列;或者,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号奇数降序或偶数降序的顺序依次排列;或者,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量根据预设排列方式进行排列。In still another optional implementation, the processor is further configured to determine that when the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam relative to the reference measurement is incremented by the number of the beam. Or the order of decreasing is sequentially arranged; or, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of odd or ascending order of the beam number; or the measurement result of the second beam is compared with the reference measurement The offset of the result is sequentially arranged in the order of odd or descending order of the number of the beam; or, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement is arranged according to a preset arrangement.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述处理器还用于确定,当第二波束的标识为隐性指示时,第一波束对应的参考测量结果为最大编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号递减的顺序依次排列;或者,第一波束对应的参考测量结果为最小编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号递增的顺序依次排列;或者,对大于预设门限值的波束的测量结果根据预设排列方式进行排列。In another optional implementation manner, the processor is further configured to: when the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam is a measurement result of a beam corresponding to the largest numbered beam, The measurement result of the second beam is sequentially arranged in the order of decreasing the number of the beam with respect to the offset of the reference measurement result; or the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam is the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam of the smallest number, the second beam The measurement results are sequentially arranged in the order of increasing the number of the beams with respect to the reference measurement result; or, the measurement results of the beams larger than the preset threshold are arranged according to a preset arrangement.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述预设门限值和预设排列方式中的至少一种通过无线资源控制RRC信令和媒体访问控制信令中的至少一种信令从无线接入网设备发送至终端;或者,将预设门限值和预设排列方式中的至少一种预置在终端处。In another optional implementation manner, at least one of the foregoing preset threshold value and the preset arrangement manner is used to obtain radio access by using at least one of radio resource control RRC signaling and media access control signaling. The network device sends to the terminal; or, at least one of a preset threshold and a preset arrangement is preset at the terminal.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述收发器还用于,从无线接入网设备接收指示信息,指示信息,用于指示处理器是否使用第一波束作为参考或者使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考上报UCI。In still another optional implementation, the transceiver is further configured to receive indication information from the radio access network device, and the indication information is used to indicate whether the processor uses the first beam as a reference or uses the measurement result of the first beam. Reported to UCI as a reference.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述当指示信息用于指示处理器使用第一波束作为参考时,指示信息还可以包括:确定第一波束的方法;当指示信息用于指示处理器使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考时,指示信息还可以包括:确定第一波束的测量结果为参考测量结果的方法。In still another optional implementation, when the indication information is used to indicate that the processor uses the first beam as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method for determining the first beam; and when the indication information is used to indicate that the processor uses the When the measurement result of a beam is used as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method of determining a measurement result of the first beam as a reference measurement result.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示UCI中是否包括波束的标识或只包括波束的标识。In an optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the identifier of the beam or the identifier of only the beam is included in the UCI.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示波束的测量结果所对应的波 束的标识被显性指示或者隐性指示。In still another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the beam is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示收发器以第一格式发送的UCI中包括:波束的测量结果信息与混合自动重传请求HARQ复用或者HARQ复用格式。In another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to: indicate, in the UCI that the transceiver sends in the first format, the measurement result information of the beam and the hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ multiplexing or the HARQ multiplexing format.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示用于测量的参考信号或作为波束的测量结果上报依据的参考信号;其中,参考信号包括:同步信号、同步信号资源标识,信道状态指示参考信号CSI-RS或CSI-RS资源标识中的至少一种。In another optional implementation manner, the indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or a reference signal used as a measurement result of the measurement result of the beam; wherein, the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier, The channel status indicates at least one of a reference signal CSI-RS or a CSI-RS resource identifier.
第七方面,本申请实施例提供了一种无线接入网设备。该无线接入网设备具体可以包括:收发器,用于向终端发送指示信息,指示信息,用于指示终端是否使用第一波束组或者使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考上报上行控制信息UCI;收发器还用于,从终端接收以第一格式发送的UCI,UCI包括:波束组的测量结果信息和波束组的信息中的至少一个,波束组包括:第一波束组和第二波束组,波束组的测量结果信息包括:第一波束组的测量结果和第二波束组的测量结果相对于第一波束组的测量结果的偏移量,第一波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果,波束组的信息用于指示,第一波束组的测量结果与第二波束组的测量结果中的至少一个所对应的波束组,该波束组为一个或多个波束组。其中,当第二波束为多个时,该第二波束的测量结果对应的波束为多个分别对应的波束,即第二波束包括:第三波束和第四波束,此时,第二波束的测量结果包括:第三波束对应的测量结果和第四波束对应的测量结果。需要说明的是,该第二波束不仅限于包括第三波束和第四波束,还可以包括N个波束组,N为正整数。In a seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a radio access network device. The radio access network device may include: a transceiver, configured to send the indication information to the terminal, where the indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal uses the first beam group or uses the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference to report the uplink control information UCI. The transceiver is further configured to receive, by the terminal, the UCI sent in the first format, where the UCI includes: at least one of the measurement result information of the beam group and the information of the beam group, where the beam group includes: the first beam group and the second beam group The measurement result information of the beam group includes: a measurement result of the first beam group and an offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the measurement result of the first beam group, and the measurement result of the first beam group is a reference measurement result, The information of the beam group is used to indicate a beam group corresponding to at least one of the measurement result of the first beam group and the measurement result of the second beam group, the beam group being one or more beam groups. Wherein, when the second beam is multiple, the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam is a plurality of respectively corresponding beams, that is, the second beam includes: a third beam and a fourth beam, and at this time, the second beam The measurement result includes: a measurement result corresponding to the third beam and a measurement result corresponding to the fourth beam. It should be noted that the second beam is not limited to include the third beam and the fourth beam, and may also include N beam groups, where N is a positive integer.
本方案中,解决了在毫米波系统中的基于波束的上行控制信息上报的问题,实现了对于波束的测量并通过上行控制信息的将其上报,合理运用资源以及减少上报的间接费用。In this solution, the problem of reporting the beam-based uplink control information in the millimeter wave system is solved, and the measurement of the beam is performed, and the uplink control information is reported, the resource is used reasonably, and the overhead of reporting is reduced.
在一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示终端是否使用第一波束组作为参考或者使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考上报UCI。In an optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the terminal uses the first beam group as a reference or uses the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference to report the UCI.
在另一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示终端在多个波束组中确定第一波束组,并以第一波束组或者使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考上报UCI。In another optional implementation manner, the indication information is further used to: instruct the terminal to determine the first beam group in the multiple beam groups, and report the UCI in the first beam group or using the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference. .
在又一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示终端是否使用确定第一波束组的方法确定第一波束组。In still another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the terminal determines the first beam group by using a method for determining the first beam group.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示UCI中是否包括波束组的标识或只包括波束组的标识。In another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the UCI includes an identifier of the beam group or only an identifier of the beam group.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示波束组的测量结果所对应的波束组的标识被显性指示或者隐性指示。In another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the beam group is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示终端以第一格式发送的UCI中包括:波束组的测量结果信息与混合自动重传请求HARQ复用或者所述HARQ复用格式。In another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to: indicate, in the UCI that the terminal sends in the first format, that the measurement result information of the beam group is hybrid HARQ multiplexing or the HARQ multiplexing. format.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示用于测量的参考信号或作为所述波束组的测量结果上报依据的所述参考信号;其中,参考信号包括:同步信号、同步 信号资源标识,信道状态指示参考信号CSI-RS或所述CSI-RS资源标识中的至少一种。In another optional implementation manner, the indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or the reference signal that is used as a measurement result of the measurement result of the beam group; wherein the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, The synchronization signal resource identifier, the channel status indication at least one of a reference signal CSI-RS or the CSI-RS resource identifier.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息通过无线资源控制信令、媒体访问控制信令和物理层信令中的至少一项来进行指示的。In still another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is indicated by at least one of radio resource control signaling, media access control signaling, and physical layer signaling.
第八方面,本申请实施例提供了一种无线接入网设备。该无线接入网设备具体可以包括:收发器,用于向终端发送指示信息,指示信息,用于指示终端是否使用第一波束或者使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考上报上行控制信息UCI;收发器还用于,从终端接收以第一格式发送的UCI,UCI包括:波束的测量结果信息和波束的信息中的至少一个,波束包括:第一波束和第二波束,波束的测量结果信息包括:第一波束的测量结果和第二波束的测量结果相对于第一波束的测量结果的偏移量,第一波束的测量结果为参考测量结果,波束的信息用于指示,第一波束的测量结果与第二波束的测量结果中的至少一个所对应的波束,该波束为一个或多个波束。其中,当第二波束为多个时,该第二波束的测量结果对应的波束为多个分别对应的波束,即第二波束包括:第三波束和第四波束,此时,第二波束的测量结果包括:第三波束对应的测量结果和第四波束对应的测量结果。需要说明的是,该第二波束不仅限于包括第三波束和第四波束,还可以包括N个波束组,N为正整数。In an eighth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a radio access network device. The radio access network device may include: a transceiver, configured to send the indication information to the terminal, where the indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal uses the first beam or uses the measurement result of the first beam as a reference to report the uplink control information UCI; The device is further configured to receive, by the terminal, the UCI sent in the first format, where the UCI includes at least one of the measurement result information of the beam and the information of the beam, where the beam includes: the first beam and the second beam, and the measurement result information of the beam includes The measurement result of the first beam and the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the measurement result of the first beam, the measurement result of the first beam is a reference measurement result, and the information of the beam is used to indicate the measurement of the first beam The result is a beam corresponding to at least one of the measurements of the second beam, the beam being one or more beams. Wherein, when the second beam is multiple, the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam is a plurality of respectively corresponding beams, that is, the second beam includes: a third beam and a fourth beam, and at this time, the second beam The measurement result includes: a measurement result corresponding to the third beam and a measurement result corresponding to the fourth beam. It should be noted that the second beam is not limited to include the third beam and the fourth beam, and may also include N beam groups, where N is a positive integer.
本方案中,解决了在毫米波系统中的基于波束的上行控制信息上报的问题,实现了对于波束的测量并通过上行控制信息的将其上报,合理运用资源以及减少上报的间接费用。In this solution, the problem of reporting the beam-based uplink control information in the millimeter wave system is solved, and the measurement of the beam is performed, and the uplink control information is reported, the resource is used reasonably, and the overhead of reporting is reduced.
在一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示终端是否使用第一波束作为参考或者使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考上报UCI。In an optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the terminal uses the first beam as a reference or uses the measurement result of the first beam as a reference to report the UCI.
在另一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示终端在多个波束中确定第一波束,并以第一波束或者使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考上报UCI。In another optional implementation manner, the indication information is further used to indicate that the terminal determines the first beam in the multiple beams, and reports the UCI by using the first beam or the measurement result of the first beam as a reference.
在又一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示终端是否使用确定第一波束组的方法确定第一波束组。In still another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the terminal determines the first beam group by using a method for determining the first beam group.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示UCI中是否包括波束的标识或只包括波束的标识。In an optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the identifier of the beam or the identifier of only the beam is included in the UCI.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示波束的测量结果所对应的波束的标识被显性指示或者隐性指示。In another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the beam is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示终端以第一格式发送的UCI中包括:波束的测量结果信息与混合自动重传请求HARQ复用或者HARQ复用格式。In an optional implementation manner, the indication information is further used to indicate that the UCI sent by the terminal in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam and hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ multiplexing or HARQ multiplexing format.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示用于测量的参考信号或作为波束的测量结果上报依据的参考信号;其中,参考信号包括:同步信号、同步信号资源标识,信道状态指示参考信号CSI-RS或CSI-RS资源标识中的至少一种。In another optional implementation manner, the indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or a reference signal used as a measurement result of the measurement result of the beam; wherein, the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier, The channel status indicates at least one of a reference signal CSI-RS or a CSI-RS resource identifier.
第九方面,本申请实施例提供了一种终端。该终端具体可以包括:收发单元,用于根 据上行控制信息UCI具有的第一格式发送UCI至无线接入网设备;其中,以第一格式发送的UCI包括:波束组的测量结果信息和波束组的信息中的至少一个,波束组包括:第一波束组和第二波束组,波束组的测量结果信息包括:第一波束组的测量结果和第二波束组的测量结果相对于第一波束组的测量结果的偏移量,第一波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果,波束组的信息用于指示,第一波束组的测量结果与第二波束组的测量结果中的至少一个所对应的波束组,该波束组为一个或多个波束组。其中,当第二波束组为多个时,该第二波束组的测量结果对应的波束组为多个分别对应的波束组,即第二波束组包括:第三波束组和第四波束组,此时,第二波束组的测量结果包括:第三波束组对应的测量结果和第四波束组对应的测量结果。需要说明的是,该第二波束组不仅限于包括第三波束组和第四波束组,还可以包括N个波束组,N为正整数。In a ninth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a terminal. The terminal may include: a transceiver unit, configured to send the UCI to the radio access network device according to the first format that the uplink control information UCI has; wherein the UCI sent in the first format includes: the measurement result information and the beam group of the beam group At least one of the information, the beam group includes: a first beam group and a second beam group, and the measurement result information of the beam group includes: a measurement result of the first beam group and a measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the first beam group The offset of the measurement result, the measurement result of the first beam group is a reference measurement result, and the information of the beam group is used to indicate that the measurement result of the first beam group corresponds to at least one of the measurement results of the second beam group A beam group, the beam group being one or more beam groups. The second beam group includes a plurality of corresponding beam groups, and the second beam group includes: a third beam group and a fourth beam group, where the second beam group has a plurality of second beam groups. At this time, the measurement result of the second beam group includes: a measurement result corresponding to the third beam group and a measurement result corresponding to the fourth beam group. It should be noted that the second beam group is not limited to include the third beam group and the fourth beam group, and may further include N beam groups, where N is a positive integer.
本方案中,对波束分组有助于减少波束管理的成本。同时,解决毫米波系统中的基于分组后的波束组的上行控制信息上报的问题,实现了对于分组后波束组的测量并通过上行控制信息的将其上报,合理运用资源以及减少上报的间接费用(overhead)。In this solution, grouping the beams helps to reduce the cost of beam management. At the same time, the problem of reporting the uplink control information of the grouped beam group in the millimeter wave system is solved, and the measurement of the grouped beam group is performed, and the uplink control information is reported, the resource is used reasonably, and the overhead of reporting is reduced. (overhead).
在一个可选的实现方式中,上述终端还以包括:第一波束组包括:波束组中具有最大测量值对应的波束组;或者,具有最小测量值对应的波束组;或者,具有中间测量值对应的波束组。其中,波束组与波束组的测量结果具有一一对应性,即第一波束组有第一波束组的测量结果,或称之为第一波束组对应的第一波束组的测量结果,第一波束组的测量结果属于第一波束组,或第一波束组的测量结果对应的波束组为第一波束组;第二波束组有第二波束组的测量结果,或称之为第二波束组对应的第二波束组的测量结果,第二波束组的测量结果属于第二波束组,或第二波束组的测量结果对应的波束组为第二波束组。In an optional implementation manner, the foregoing terminal further includes: the first beam group includes: a beam group corresponding to the largest measured value in the beam group; or a beam group corresponding to the smallest measured value; or, with an intermediate measurement value Corresponding beam group. The measurement result of the beam group and the beam group has a one-to-one correspondence, that is, the first beam group has the measurement result of the first beam group, or the measurement result of the first beam group corresponding to the first beam group, first The measurement result of the beam group belongs to the first beam group, or the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the first beam group is the first beam group; the second beam group has the measurement result of the second beam group, or the second beam group The measurement result of the corresponding second beam group is that the measurement result of the second beam group belongs to the second beam group, or the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam group is the second beam group.
在另一个可选的实现方式中,中间测量值包括:波束组的测量值计算的平均值;或者,根据最大测量值和最小测量值计算的平均值;或者,波束组的测量值中居中分布的值。在又一个可选的实现方式中,第一波束组包括:波束组中具有最大波束组的组号对应的波束组;或者,具有最小波束组的组号对应的波束组;或者,具有中间组号对应的波束组。其中,中间组号的波束组为多个波束组的组号中居中分布的组号所对应的波束组。In another optional implementation manner, the intermediate measurement value includes: an average value of the measured value of the beam group; or an average value calculated according to the maximum measured value and the minimum measured value; or a centered distribution among the measured values of the beam group Value. In another optional implementation manner, the first beam group includes: a beam group corresponding to a group number of the largest beam group in the beam group; or a beam group corresponding to the group number of the smallest beam group; or, has a middle group The corresponding beam group. The beam group of the intermediate group number is a beam group corresponding to the group number of the medium-distributed group among the group numbers of the plurality of beam groups.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述波束组的信息,包括:第一波束组的测量结果与第二波束组的测量结果中的至少一个所对应的波束组的标识,其中,波束组的标识为参考测量结果所属的第一波束组的波束组标识和相对于参考测量结果的偏移量所属的第二波束组的波束组标识中至少一个。In another optional implementation manner, the information about the beam group includes: a identifier of a beam group corresponding to at least one of a measurement result of the first beam group and a measurement result of the second beam group, where the beam group And identifying at least one of a beam group identifier of the first beam group to which the reference measurement result belongs and a beam group identifier of the second beam group to which the offset with respect to the reference measurement result belongs.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述处理单元还用于确定,当第二波束组的标识为显性指示时,第二波束组的标识为第二波束组的标识本身;或者,第二波束组的标识为相对于第一波束组的标识的偏移量。In another optional implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to: when the identifier of the second beam group is an explicit indication, the identifier of the second beam group is the identifier of the second beam group; or, the second The identity of the beam set is an offset from the identity of the first beam set.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述处理单元还用于确定,当第二波束组的标识为隐性指示时,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号递增或递减的顺序依次排列;或者,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号奇数升序或偶数升序的顺序依次排列;或者,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考 测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号奇数降序或偶数降序的顺序依次排列;或者,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量根据预设排列方式进行排列。In another optional implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to determine, when the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group relative to the reference measurement result according to the beam group The group numbers are sequentially arranged in descending or decreasing order; or, the offsets of the measurement results of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result are sequentially arranged in the order of odd or ascending order of the group number of the beam group; or, the second beam The offset of the measurement result of the group relative to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of odd or descending order of the group number of the beam group; or the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is preset according to the preset Arrange the arrangement.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述处理单元还用于确定,当第二波束组的标识为隐性指示时,第一波束组对应的参考测量结果为最大组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号递减的顺序依次排列;或者,第一波束组对应的参考测量结果为最小组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号递增的顺序依次排列;或者,对大于预设门限值的波束组的测量结果根据预设排列方式进行排列。In another optional implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to: when the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam group is a beam corresponding to the beam group of the largest group number. The measurement result of the group, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group relative to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in descending order of the group number of the beam group; or the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam group is the beam of the smallest group number The measurement result of the corresponding beam group of the group, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing the group number of the beam group; or, for the beam group larger than the preset threshold value The measurement results are arranged according to a preset arrangement.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述预设门限值和预设排列方式中的至少一种通过无线资源控制RRC信令和媒体访问控制信令中的至少一种信令从无线接入网设备发送至终端;或者,将预设门限值和预设排列方式中的至少一种预置在终端处。In another optional implementation manner, at least one of the foregoing preset threshold value and the preset arrangement manner is used to obtain radio access by using at least one of radio resource control RRC signaling and media access control signaling. The network device sends to the terminal; or, at least one of a preset threshold and a preset arrangement is preset at the terminal.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述收发单元还用于,从无线接入网设备接收指示信息,指示信息,用于指示处理单元是否使用第一波束组作为参考或者使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考上报UCI。In an optional implementation manner, the transceiver unit is further configured to: receive, by the radio access network device, indication information, the indication information, used to indicate whether the processing unit uses the first beam group as a reference or uses the first beam group. The measurement results are reported to UCI as a reference.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述当指示信息用于指示处理单元使用第一波束组作为参考时,指示信息还可以包括:确定第一波束组的方法;当指示信息用于指示处理单元使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考时,指示信息还可以包括:确定第一波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果的方法。In still another optional implementation manner, when the indication information is used to indicate that the processing unit uses the first beam group as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method for determining the first beam group; and when the indication information is used to indicate the processing unit When the measurement result of the first beam group is used as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method of determining a measurement result of the first beam group as a reference measurement result.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示UCI中是否包括波束组的标识或只包括波束组的标识。In another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the UCI includes an identifier of the beam group or only an identifier of the beam group.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示波束组的测量结果所对应的波束组的标识被显性指示或者隐性指示。In another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the beam group is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示收发单元以第一格式发送的UCI中包括:波束组的测量结果信息与混合自动重传请求HARQ复用或者HARQ复用格式。In another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to: indicate, in the UCI that the transceiver unit sends in the first format, that: the measurement result information of the beam group and the hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ multiplexing or the HARQ multiplexing format .
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示用于测量的参考信号或作为波束组的测量结果上报依据的参考信号;其中,参考信号包括:同步信号、同步信号资源标识,信道状态指示参考信号CSI-RS或CSI-RS资源标识中的至少一种。In another optional implementation manner, the indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or a reference signal used as a measurement result of the measurement result of the beam group; wherein the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier The channel status indicates at least one of a reference signal CSI-RS or a CSI-RS resource identifier.
第十方面,本申请实施例提供了一种终端。该终端具体可以包括:收发单元,用于根据上行控制信息UCI具有的第一格式发送UCI至无线接入网设备;其中,以第一格式发送的UCI包括:波束的测量结果信息和波束的信息中的至少一个,波束包括:第一波束和第二波束,波束的测量结果信息包括:第一波束的测量结果和第二波束的测量结果相对于第一波束的测量结果的偏移量,第一波束的测量结果为参考测量结果,波束的信息用于指示,第一波束的测量结果与第二波束的测量结果中的至少一个所对应的波束,该波束为一个或 多个波束。其中,当第二波束为多个时,该第二波束的测量结果对应的波束为多个分别对应的波束,即第二波束包括:第三波束和第四波束,此时,第二波束的测量结果包括:第三波束对应的测量结果和第四波束对应的测量结果。需要说明的是,该第二波束不仅限于包括第三波束和第四波束,还可以包括N个波束组,N为正整数。In a tenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a terminal. The terminal may specifically include: a transceiver unit, configured to send the UCI to the radio access network device according to the first format that the uplink control information UCI has; wherein the UCI sent in the first format includes: the measurement result information of the beam and the information of the beam At least one of the beams includes: a first beam and a second beam, and the measurement result information of the beam includes: a measurement result of the first beam and an offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the measurement result of the first beam, The measurement result of one beam is a reference measurement result, and the information of the beam is used to indicate a beam corresponding to at least one of the measurement result of the first beam and the measurement result of the second beam, the beam being one or more beams. Wherein, when the second beam is multiple, the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam is a plurality of respectively corresponding beams, that is, the second beam includes: a third beam and a fourth beam, and at this time, the second beam The measurement result includes: a measurement result corresponding to the third beam and a measurement result corresponding to the fourth beam. It should be noted that the second beam is not limited to include the third beam and the fourth beam, and may also include N beam groups, where N is a positive integer.
本方案中,解决了在毫米波系统中的基于波束的上行控制信息上报的问题,实现了对于波束的测量并通过上行控制信息的将其上报,合理运用资源以及减少上报的间接费用。In this solution, the problem of reporting the beam-based uplink control information in the millimeter wave system is solved, and the measurement of the beam is performed, and the uplink control information is reported, the resource is used reasonably, and the overhead of reporting is reduced.
在一个可选的实现方式中,第一波束包括:波束中具有最大测量值对应的波束;或者,具有最小测量值对应的波束;或者,具有中间测量值对应的波束。其中,波束与波束的测量结果具有一一对应性,即第一波束有第一波束的测量结果,或称之为第一波束对应的第一波束的测量结果,第一波束的测量结果属于第一波束,或第一波束的测量结果对应的波束为第一波束;第二波束有第二波束的测量结果,或称之为第二波束对应的第二波束的测量结果,第二波束的测量结果属于第二波束,或第二波束的测量结果对应的波束为第二波束。In an optional implementation manner, the first beam includes: a beam corresponding to the largest measured value in the beam; or a beam corresponding to the smallest measured value; or a beam corresponding to the intermediate measured value. The measurement result of the beam and the beam has a one-to-one correspondence, that is, the first beam has a measurement result of the first beam, or a measurement result of the first beam corresponding to the first beam, and the measurement result of the first beam belongs to the first The beam corresponding to the measurement result of the first beam or the first beam is the first beam; the second beam has the measurement result of the second beam, or the measurement result of the second beam corresponding to the second beam, and the measurement of the second beam The result belongs to the second beam, or the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam is the second beam.
在另一个可选的实现方式中,中间测量值包括:波束的测量值计算的平均值;或者,根据最大测量值和最小测量值计算的平均值;或者,波束的测量值中居中分布的值。在又一个可选的实现方式中,上述处理单元还用于,第一波束包括:波束中具有最大波束的编号对应的波束;或者,具有最小波束的编号对应的波束;或者,具有中间编号对应的波束。其中,中间编号的波束为多个波束的编号中居中分布的编号所对应的波束。In another optional implementation, the intermediate measurement value includes: an average value of the measured value of the beam; or an average value calculated according to the maximum measured value and the minimum measured value; or a value of the centered distribution among the measured values of the beam . In another optional implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to: the first beam includes: a beam corresponding to the number of the largest beam in the beam; or a beam corresponding to the number of the smallest beam; or, with a middle number corresponding Beam. The intermediate numbered beam is a beam corresponding to the number of the centrally distributed number among the plurality of beam numbers.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述波束的信息,包括:第一波束的测量结果与第二波束的测量结果中的至少一个所对应的波束的标识,其中,波束的标识为参考测量结果所属的第一波束的波束标识和相对于参考测量结果的偏移量所属的第二波束的波束标识波束中至少一个。In another optional implementation manner, the information about the beam includes: a identifier of a beam corresponding to at least one of a measurement result of the first beam and a measurement result of the second beam, where the identifier of the beam is a reference measurement result. At least one of a beam identifier of the associated first beam and a beam identification beam of the second beam to which the offset relative to the reference measurement result belongs.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述处理单元还用于确定,当第二波束的标识为显性指示时,第二波束的标识为第二波束的标识本身;或者,第二波束的标识为相对于第一波束的标识的偏移量。In another optional implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to: when the identifier of the second beam is a dominant indication, the identifier of the second beam is the identifier of the second beam; or the identifier of the second beam Is the offset from the identity of the first beam.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述处理单元还用于确定,当第二波束的标识为隐性指示时,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号递增或递减的顺序依次排列;或者,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号奇数升序或偶数升序的顺序依次排列;或者,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号奇数降序或偶数降序的顺序依次排列;或者,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量根据预设排列方式进行排列。In still another optional implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to: when the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam relative to the reference measurement is increased according to the number of the beam. Or the order of decreasing is sequentially arranged; or, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of odd or ascending order of the beam number; or the measurement result of the second beam is compared with the reference measurement The offset of the result is sequentially arranged in the order of odd or descending order of the number of the beam; or, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement is arranged according to a preset arrangement.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述处理单元还用于确定,当第二波束的标识为隐性指示时,第一波束对应的参考测量结果为最大编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号递减的顺序依次排列;或者,第一波束对应的参考测量结果为最小编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果,第二波束的测量结 果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号递增的顺序依次排列;或者,对大于预设门限值的波束的测量结果根据预设排列方式进行排列。In another optional implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to: when the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam is a measurement result of a beam corresponding to the largest numbered beam, The measurement result of the second beam is sequentially arranged in the order of decreasing the number of the beam with respect to the offset of the reference measurement result; or the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam is the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam of the smallest number, the second beam The measurement results are sequentially arranged in the order of increasing the number of the beams with respect to the reference measurement result; or, the measurement results of the beams larger than the preset threshold are arranged according to a preset arrangement.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述预设门限值和预设排列方式中的至少一种通过无线资源控制RRC信令和媒体访问控制信令中的至少一种信令从无线接入网设备发送至终端;或者,将预设门限值和预设排列方式中的至少一种预置在终端处。In another optional implementation manner, at least one of the foregoing preset threshold value and the preset arrangement manner is used to obtain radio access by using at least one of radio resource control RRC signaling and media access control signaling. The network device sends to the terminal; or, at least one of a preset threshold and a preset arrangement is preset at the terminal.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述收发单元还用于,从无线接入网设备接收指示信息,指示信息,用于指示处理单元是否使用第一波束作为参考或者使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考上报UCI。In another optional implementation manner, the transceiver unit is further configured to: receive, by the radio access network device, indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate whether the processing unit uses the first beam as a reference or uses the measurement result of the first beam. Reported to UCI as a reference.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述当指示信息用于指示处理单元使用第一波束作为参考时,指示信息还可以包括:确定第一波束的方法;当指示信息用于指示处理单元使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考时,指示信息还可以包括:确定第一波束的测量结果为参考测量结果的方法。In still another optional implementation, when the indication information is used to indicate that the processing unit uses the first beam as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method for determining the first beam; and when the indication information is used to indicate that the processing unit uses the When the measurement result of a beam is used as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method of determining a measurement result of the first beam as a reference measurement result.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示UCI中是否包括波束的标识或只包括波束的标识。In an optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the identifier of the beam or the identifier of only the beam is included in the UCI.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示波束的测量结果所对应的波束的标识被显性指示或者隐性指示。In another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the beam is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示收发单元以第一格式发送的UCI中包括:波束的测量结果信息与混合自动重传请求HARQ复用或者HARQ复用格式。In another optional implementation manner, the indication information is further used to indicate that the UCI sent by the transceiver unit in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam and hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ multiplexing or HARQ multiplexing format.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示用于测量的参考信号或作为波束的测量结果上报依据的参考信号;其中,参考信号包括:同步信号、同步信号资源标识,信道状态指示参考信号CSI-RS或CSI-RS资源标识中的至少一种。In another optional implementation manner, the indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or a reference signal used as a measurement result of the measurement result of the beam; wherein, the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier, The channel status indicates at least one of a reference signal CSI-RS or a CSI-RS resource identifier.
第十一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种无线接入网设备。该无线接入网设备具体可以包括:收发单元,用于向终端发送指示信息,指示信息,用于指示终端是否使用第一波束组或者使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考上报上行控制信息UCI;收发单元还用于,从终端接收以第一格式发送的UCI,UCI包括:波束组的测量结果信息和波束组的信息中的至少一个,波束组包括:第一波束组和第二波束组,波束组的测量结果信息包括:第一波束组的测量结果和第二波束组的测量结果相对于第一波束组的测量结果的偏移量,第一波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果,波束组的信息用于指示,第一波束组的测量结果与第二波束组的测量结果中的至少一个所对应的波束组,该波束组为一个或多个波束组。其中,当第二波束为多个时,该第二波束的测量结果对应的波束为多个分别对应的波束,即第二波束包括:第三波束和第四波束,此时,第二波束的测量结果包括:第三波束对应的测量结果和第四波束对应的测量结果。需要说明的是,该第二波束不仅限于包括第三波束和第四波束,还可以包括N个波束组,N为正整数。In an eleventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a radio access network device. The radio access network device may include: a transceiver unit, configured to send the indication information to the terminal, where the indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal uses the first beam group or uses the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference to report the uplink control information UCI. The transceiver unit is further configured to: receive, by the terminal, the UCI sent in the first format, where the UCI includes: at least one of the measurement result information of the beam group and the information of the beam group, where the beam group includes: the first beam group and the second beam group The measurement result information of the beam group includes: a measurement result of the first beam group and an offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the measurement result of the first beam group, and the measurement result of the first beam group is a reference measurement result, The information of the beam group is used to indicate a beam group corresponding to at least one of the measurement result of the first beam group and the measurement result of the second beam group, the beam group being one or more beam groups. Wherein, when the second beam is multiple, the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam is a plurality of respectively corresponding beams, that is, the second beam includes: a third beam and a fourth beam, and at this time, the second beam The measurement result includes: a measurement result corresponding to the third beam and a measurement result corresponding to the fourth beam. It should be noted that the second beam is not limited to include the third beam and the fourth beam, and may also include N beam groups, where N is a positive integer.
本方案中,解决了在毫米波系统中的基于波束的上行控制信息上报的问题,实现了对 于波束的测量并通过上行控制信息的将其上报,合理运用资源以及减少上报的间接费用。In this solution, the problem of reporting the beam-based uplink control information in the millimeter wave system is solved, and the measurement of the beam is performed, and the information is reported by the uplink control information, the resources are rationally used, and the overhead of reporting is reduced.
在一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示终端是否使用第一波束组作为参考或者使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考上报UCI。In an optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the terminal uses the first beam group as a reference or uses the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference to report the UCI.
在另一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示终端在多个波束组中确定第一波束组,并以第一波束组或者使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考上报UCI。In another optional implementation manner, the indication information is further used to: instruct the terminal to determine the first beam group in the multiple beam groups, and report the UCI in the first beam group or using the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference. .
在又一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示终端是否使用确定第一波束组的方法确定第一波束组。In still another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the terminal determines the first beam group by using a method for determining the first beam group.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示UCI中是否包括波束组的标识或只包括波束组的标识。In another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the UCI includes an identifier of the beam group or only an identifier of the beam group.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示波束组的测量结果所对应的波束组的标识被显性指示或者隐性指示。In another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the beam group is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示终端以第一格式发送的UCI中包括:波束组的测量结果信息与混合自动重传请求HARQ复用或者所述HARQ复用格式。In another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to: indicate, in the UCI that the terminal sends in the first format, that the measurement result information of the beam group is hybrid HARQ multiplexing or the HARQ multiplexing. format.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示用于测量的参考信号或作为所述波束组的测量结果上报依据的所述参考信号;其中,参考信号包括:同步信号、同步信号资源标识,信道状态指示参考信号CSI-RS或所述CSI-RS资源标识中的至少一种。In another optional implementation manner, the indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or the reference signal that is used as a measurement result of the measurement result of the beam group; wherein the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, The synchronization signal resource identifier, the channel status indication at least one of a reference signal CSI-RS or the CSI-RS resource identifier.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息通过无线资源控制信令、媒体访问控制信令和物理层信令中的至少一项来进行指示的。In still another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is indicated by at least one of radio resource control signaling, media access control signaling, and physical layer signaling.
第十二方面,本申请实施例提供了一种无线接入网设备。该无线接入网设备具体可以包括:收发单元,用于向终端发送指示信息,指示信息,用于指示终端是否使用第一波束或者使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考上报上行控制信息UCI;收发单元还用于,从终端接收以第一格式发送的UCI,UCI包括:波束的测量结果信息和波束的信息中的至少一个,波束包括:第一波束和第二波束,波束的测量结果信息包括:第一波束的测量结果和第二波束的测量结果相对于第一波束的测量结果的偏移量,第一波束的测量结果为参考测量结果,波束的信息用于指示,第一波束的测量结果与第二波束的测量结果中的至少一个所对应的波束,该波束为一个或多个波束。其中,当第二波束为多个时,该第二波束的测量结果对应的波束为多个分别对应的波束,即第二波束包括:第三波束和第四波束,此时,第二波束的测量结果包括:第三波束对应的测量结果和第四波束对应的测量结果。需要说明的是,该第二波束不仅限于包括第三波束和第四波束,还可以包括N个波束组,N为正整数。本方案中,解决了在毫米波系统中的基于波束的上行控制信息上报的问题,实现了对于波束的测量并通过上行控制信息的将其上报,合理运用资源以及减少上报的间接费用。In a twelfth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a radio access network device. The radio access network device may include: a transceiver unit, configured to send the indication information to the terminal, where the indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal uses the first beam or uses the measurement result of the first beam as a reference to report the uplink control information UCI; The unit is further configured to: receive, by the terminal, the UCI sent in the first format, where the UCI includes at least one of the measurement result information of the beam and the information of the beam, where the beam includes: the first beam and the second beam, and the measurement result information of the beam includes The measurement result of the first beam and the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the measurement result of the first beam, the measurement result of the first beam is a reference measurement result, and the information of the beam is used to indicate the measurement of the first beam The result is a beam corresponding to at least one of the measurements of the second beam, the beam being one or more beams. Wherein, when the second beam is multiple, the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam is a plurality of respectively corresponding beams, that is, the second beam includes: a third beam and a fourth beam, and at this time, the second beam The measurement result includes: a measurement result corresponding to the third beam and a measurement result corresponding to the fourth beam. It should be noted that the second beam is not limited to include the third beam and the fourth beam, and may also include N beam groups, where N is a positive integer. In this solution, the problem of reporting the beam-based uplink control information in the millimeter wave system is solved, and the measurement of the beam is performed, and the uplink control information is reported, the resource is used reasonably, and the overhead of reporting is reduced.
在一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示终端是否使用第一波束作为参考或者使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考上报UCI。In an optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the terminal uses the first beam as a reference or uses the measurement result of the first beam as a reference to report the UCI.
在另一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示终端在多个波束中确定第一波束,并以第一波束或者使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考上报UCI。In another optional implementation manner, the indication information is further used to indicate that the terminal determines the first beam in the multiple beams, and reports the UCI by using the first beam or the measurement result of the first beam as a reference.
在又一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示终端是否使用确定第一波束组的方法确定第一波束组。In still another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the terminal determines the first beam group by using a method for determining the first beam group.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示UCI中是否包括波束的标识或只包括波束的标识。In an optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the identifier of the beam or the identifier of only the beam is included in the UCI.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示波束的测量结果所对应的波束的标识被显性指示或者隐性指示。In another optional implementation manner, the foregoing indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the beam is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示终端以第一格式发送的UCI中包括:波束的测量结果信息与混合自动重传请求HARQ复用或者HARQ复用格式。In an optional implementation manner, the indication information is further used to indicate that the UCI sent by the terminal in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam and hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ multiplexing or HARQ multiplexing format.
在再一个可选的实现方式中,上述指示信息还用于,指示用于测量的参考信号或作为波束的测量结果上报依据的参考信号;其中,参考信号包括:同步信号、同步信号资源标识,信道状态指示参考信号CSI-RS或CSI-RS资源标识中的至少一种。In another optional implementation manner, the indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or a reference signal used as a measurement result of the measurement result of the beam; wherein, the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier, The channel status indicates at least one of a reference signal CSI-RS or a CSI-RS resource identifier.
第十二方面,本发明实施例提供了一种计算机存储介质,所述计算机存储介质中存储有指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面和第二方面中的任意一种可能的设计中所述的方法。According to a twelfth aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a computer storage medium, where the computer storage medium stores an instruction, when the computer is running on a computer, causing the computer to perform any one of the first aspect and the second aspect. A method described in a possible design.
第十三方面,本发明实施例提供了一种计算机程序产品,其包含指令,当所述程序被计算机所执行时,该指令使得计算机执行上述第一方面和第二方面中的任意一种可能的设计中所述的方法。In a thirteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a computer program product, comprising: instructions, when executed by a computer, causing a computer to perform any one of the first aspect and the second aspect described above The method described in the design.
第十四方面,本发明实施例提供了一种计算机程序,其包含指令,当所述程序被计算机所执行时,该指令使得计算机执行上述第一方面和第二方面中的任意一种可能的设计中所述的方法。In a fourteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a computer program, comprising instructions, when executed by a computer, causing a computer to perform any one of the first aspect and the second aspect described above. The method described in the design.
附图说明DRAWINGS
图1为本发明实施例提供的通信系统架构示意图;1 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图2为本发明实施例提供的基于波束组的一种数据传输方法的流程示意图;2 is a schematic flowchart of a data transmission method based on a beam group according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图3为本发明事实施例提供的基于波束组的另一种数据传输方法的流程示意图;3 is a schematic flowchart of another data transmission method based on a beam group according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图4为本发明实施例提供的基于波束的一种数据传输方法的流程示意图;4 is a schematic flowchart of a data transmission method based on a beam according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图5为本发明实施例提供的基于波束的另一种数据传输方法的流程示意图;FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of another data transmission method based on a beam according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图6为本发明实施例提供的基于波束组的一种终端的结构示意图;FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal based on a beam group according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图7为本发明实施例提供的基于波束的一种终端的结构示意图。FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a beam-based terminal according to an embodiment of the present invention.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
为便于对本发明实施例的理解,下面将结合附图以及具体实施例做出进一步的解释说明,实施例并不构成对本发明实施例的限定。In order to facilitate the understanding of the embodiments of the present invention, the embodiments of the present invention are not to be construed as limited.
本发明实施例提供了一种数据传输的方法、无线接入网设备和终端,通过对分组后的波束组进行测量,然后以第一格式发送UCI,解决了没有考虑到毫米波系统中的基于波束分组的上行控制信息上报的问题。所以本方案可以有效的进行波束管理,以第一格式对上行控制信息的上报信息更加准确并减少上报间接费用。Embodiments of the present invention provide a data transmission method, a radio access network device, and a terminal, which perform the measurement on the grouped beam group and then transmit the UCI in the first format, thereby solving the problem not based on the millimeter wave system. The problem of reporting the uplink control information of the beam packet. Therefore, the solution can effectively perform beam management, and the reporting information of the uplink control information in the first format is more accurate and reduces the reporting overhead.
图1为本发明实施例提供的通信系统架构示意图。如图1所示,该通信系统包括无线接入网设备01和终端02。在一个可能实现的实施例中,该终端02的数量可以不止一个,图1示出一个为例以进行说明。FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 1, the communication system includes a radio access network device 01 and a terminal 02. In one possible implementation, the number of terminals 02 may be more than one, and FIG. 1 shows an example for illustration.
本发明实施例描述的技术可以用于高频系统中,或其他频域的无线通信系统。此外,还可以适用于第五代5G系统或新空口(new radio,NR)系统等。The techniques described in the embodiments of the present invention can be used in high frequency systems, or other frequency domain wireless communication systems. In addition, it can also be applied to the fifth generation 5G system or the new radio (NR) system.
本申请中名词“系统”和“网络”经常交替使用,但本领域的技术人员可以理解其含义。本申请所涉及到的无线接入网设备01是一种部署在无线接入网中用以为终端提供无线通信功能的网络设备。该无线接入网设备01可以包括各种形式的:5G基站、新型无线点基站(new radio eNB或者eNodeB)、传输点(transmission and reception point,TRP)、宏基站、微基站、中继站、高频基站和长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)宏等等。在采用不同的无线接入技术的系统中,具备基站功能的设备的名称可能会有所不同,例如:在LTE网络中,称为演进型基站(evolved NodeB,eNB或者eNodeB),在第五代5G或NR网络中,称为新空口基站(new radio NodeB,NR-NB)等等。此外,本申请中涉及到的终端02可以包括各种具有无线通信功能的手持设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备(wearable device,WD)、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备,以及各种形式的移动台(mobile station,MS),终端(terminal),终端设备(terminal equipment)等等。The terms "system" and "network" are often used interchangeably in this application, but will be understood by those skilled in the art. The radio access network device 01 involved in the present application is a network device deployed in a radio access network to provide a wireless communication function for a terminal. The radio access network device 01 may include various forms: a 5G base station, a new radio point base station (new radio eNB or eNodeB), a transmission and reception point (TRP), a macro base station, a micro base station, a relay station, and a high frequency. Base stations and long term evolution (LTE) macros and the like. In systems using different radio access technologies, the names of devices with base station functions may be different, for example, in an LTE network, called an evolved NodeB (eNB or eNodeB), in the fifth generation. In a 5G or NR network, it is called a new radio node B (NR-NB) or the like. In addition, the terminal 02 referred to in the present application may include various handheld devices having a wireless communication function, an in-vehicle device, a wearable device (WD), a computing device, or other processing device connected to the wireless modem, and various A form of mobile station (MS), terminal, terminal equipment, and the like.
为方便描述,本申请中上述的终端可以举例为UE,上述为UE提供无线通信功能的无线接入网设备可以举例为基站。For convenience of description, the above-mentioned terminal in the present application may be exemplified as a UE, and the above-mentioned radio access network device that provides a wireless communication function for the UE may be exemplified as a base station.
目前,在5G背景下将研究基于分组的波束,其中,本申请中关于波束组的定义如下:对于一个传输点或者多个传输点,将多个传输波束和接收波束中的至少一种分成波束集合;或者,将多个传输和接收波束对至少一种分成波束对集合。对于一个UE,将多个传输波束和接收波束至少一种分成波束集合;或者,将多个传输和接收波束对至少一种分成波束对集合。其中,该波束组中可以包括至少一个波束。其中,分组可以是基站将波束进行分组确定波束组或者UE将波束进行分组确定波束组,但是是否基于分组进行上报可以是基站通过指示信息进行指示。相应的,图2为本发明实施例提供的基于波束组的一种数据传输方法的流程示意图。图2以UE根据至少一个波束组中的第一波束组和第一波束组的测量结果中的至少一个作为参考上报上行控制信息UCI为例。如图2所示,该实施例包 括步骤S210-S230,具体如下所示:At present, packet-based beams will be studied in the context of 5G, wherein the definition of beam groups in this application is as follows: for one transmission point or multiple transmission points, at least one of multiple transmission beams and reception beams is split into beams A set; or, splitting at least one of the plurality of transmit and receive beam pairs into a set of beam pairs. For one UE, at least one of a plurality of transmission beams and reception beams is divided into a beam set; or, at least one of the plurality of transmission and reception beam pairs is divided into a set of beam pairs. The beam group may include at least one beam. The packet may be that the base station groups the beam to determine the beam group or the UE groups the beam to determine the beam group. However, whether the packet is reported based on the packet may be indicated by the base station by using the indication information. Correspondingly, FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a data transmission method based on a beam group according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an example in which the UE reports the uplink control information UCI according to at least one of the first beam group and the first beam group in the at least one beam group. As shown in FIG. 2, this embodiment includes steps S210-S230, as follows:
S210:UE获取指示信息。S210: The UE acquires indication information.
具体地,UE获取指示信息可以是从基站接收指示信息或者根据在UE处预先配置的信息进行获取。其中,指示信息可以包括下述内容中的任意一个或多个,需要说明的是,下述内容中,任意一个或多个可以从基站获取而剩余的被预先设置:Specifically, the UE acquisition indication information may be obtained by receiving indication information from the base station or according to information pre-configured at the UE. The indication information may include any one or more of the following contents. It should be noted that any one or more of the following may be acquired from the base station and the remaining ones are preset:
该指示信息,可以用于指示UE是否基于波束组进行上报。The indication information may be used to indicate whether the UE performs reporting based on the beam group.
该指示信息,还可以用于指示UE是否将含有相同特征的波束分成一组。其中,相同特征可以为相同的子载波间隔,相同的波形,或能分为一组的测量值,这些特征中的任意一种或多种。The indication information may also be used to indicate whether the UE groups the beams having the same feature into one group. Wherein, the same feature may be the same subcarrier spacing, the same waveform, or a set of measured values, any one or more of these features.
该指示信息,还可以用于指示UE是否使用第一波束组作为参考或者使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考上报UCI,第一波束组的测量结果即为参考测量结果。其中,确定使用第一波束组作为参考的方法可以包括:第一波束组可以为具有最大组号的波束组,或者具有最小组号的波束组,或具有中间组号的波束组。第一波束组也可以为具有最大测量值的波束组,或者具有最小测量值的波束组,或具有中间测量值的波束组。确定使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考测量结果的方法可以包括:第一波束组的测量结果可以为具有最大组号的波束组的测量结果,或者具有最小组号的波束组的测量结果,或具有中间组号的波束组的测量结果。第一波束组的测量结果可以为具有最大测量值的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果,或者具有最小测量值的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果,或具有中间测量值的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果。其中,测量值可以为测量结果所对应的值,或者,测量值基于映射关系可以得到对应的测量结果。确定中间测量值的方法包括:在多个波束组的测量值中,根据所述多个测量值计算的平均值或根据最大测量值和所述最小测量值计算的平均值,确定中间测量值;或者,选取在多个波束组的测量值中居中分布的值为中间测量结果值。The indication information may also be used to indicate whether the UE uses the first beam group as a reference or uses the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference to report the UCI, and the measurement result of the first beam group is the reference measurement result. The method for determining to use the first beam group as a reference may include: the first beam group may be a beam group having a largest group number, or a beam group having a minimum group number, or a beam group having an intermediate group number. The first beam set can also be the beam set with the largest measured value, or the beam set with the smallest measured value, or a beam set with intermediate measurements. The method for determining the measurement result using the first beam group as the reference measurement result may include: the measurement result of the first beam group may be the measurement result of the beam group having the largest group number, or the measurement result of the beam group having the smallest group number, Or the measurement result of the beam group with the intermediate group number. The measurement result of the first beam group may be the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the largest measurement value, or the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest measurement value, or the beam group corresponding to the intermediate measurement value. The measurement result of the beam group. The measured value may be a value corresponding to the measurement result, or the measured value may obtain a corresponding measurement result based on the mapping relationship. The method for determining an intermediate measurement value includes: determining an intermediate measurement value according to an average value calculated by the plurality of measurement values or an average value calculated according to the maximum measurement value and the minimum measurement value among the measurement values of the plurality of beam groups; Alternatively, the value of the centered distribution among the measurements of the plurality of beam sets is selected as the intermediate measurement result value.
该指示信息,还可以用于指示UE以第一格式发送的UCI中包括:波束组的标识是被显性指示或者隐性指示。The indication information may also be used to indicate that the UCI sent by the UE in the first format includes: the identifier of the beam group is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
当该指示信息用于指示UE使用第一波束组作为参考时,指示信息还可以包括:确定第一波束组的方法;When the indication information is used to indicate that the UE uses the first beam group as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method of determining the first beam group;
当该指示信息用于指示UE使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考时,指示信息还可以包括:确定第一波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果的方法。When the indication information is used to indicate that the UE uses the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method of determining that the measurement result of the first beam group is a reference measurement result.
该指示信息还用于,指示UCI中是否包括波束组的标识,或只包括波束组的标识。The indication information is further used to indicate whether the identifier of the beam group is included in the UCI, or only the identifier of the beam group.
该指示信息还用于,指示波束组的测量结果所对应的波束组的标识被显性指示或者隐性指示。The indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the beam group is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
该指示信息还用于,指示UE以第一格式发送的所述UCI中包括:波束组的测量结果信息与混合自动重传请求HARQ复用或者HARQ复用格式。The indication information is further used to indicate that the UCI sent by the UE in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam group and hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ multiplexing or HARQ multiplexing format.
该指示信息还用于,指示用于测量的参考信号或作为波束组的测量结果上报依据的参考信号;其中,参考信号包括:同步信号、同步信号资源标识,信道状态指示参考信号CSI-RS或所述CSI-RS资源标识中的至少一种。The indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or a reference signal as a basis for reporting a measurement result of the beam group; wherein the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier, a channel state indication reference signal CSI-RS or At least one of the CSI-RS resource identifiers.
需要说明的是,该指示信息可以是通过无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)信令、媒体访问控制信令(media access control,MAC)信令或物理层信令中的至少一项来进行指示的。It should be noted that the indication information may be performed by using at least one of radio resource control (RRC) signaling, media access control (MAC) signaling, or physical layer signaling. Instructed.
S220:UE根据指示信息确定使用第一波束组作为参考,或者使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考。S220: The UE determines, according to the indication information, that the first beam group is used as a reference, or uses the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference.
具体地,UE对各波束进行测量,划分为波束组,对所划分的波束组,确定波束组标识以及对应的波束组的测量结果。Specifically, the UE measures each beam, divides into a beam group, and determines a beam group identifier and a measurement result of the corresponding beam group for the divided beam group.
在一个可能的实施例中,划分波束组为UE根据指示信息将含有相同特征的波束分成一组,将剩余不包含相同特征的波束分成一组。其中,在不包含相同特征的波束中有一种情况可以是只有一个波束的波束组,那么该波束组仅包括一个波束。当将含有相同特征的波束分成一组时,可以是根据各波束是否具有相同的子载波间隔进行波束分组,具有相同子载波间隔的波束被划分为一个波束组;或者,根据是否具有相同的波形进行波束分组,具有相同波形的波束被划分为一个波束组;或者,根据是否具有相近的测量值进行波束分组,具有相近的测量值的波束被划分为一个波束组。In a possible embodiment, the split beam group is that the UE divides the beams containing the same feature into one group according to the indication information, and divides the remaining beams that do not include the same feature into one group. Wherein, in a beam that does not include the same feature, one case may be a beam group having only one beam, and the beam group includes only one beam. When groups of beams having the same feature are grouped, beam grouping may be performed according to whether each beam has the same subcarrier spacing, beams having the same subcarrier spacing are divided into one beam group; or, depending on whether they have the same waveform Beam grouping is performed, beams having the same waveform are divided into one beam group; or beams are grouped according to whether or not there are similar measurement values, and beams having similar measurement values are divided into one beam group.
确定对应的波束组的测量结果为根据各个波束的测量值,推导波束组的测量值,通过测量值与测量结果之间的映射关系或者对应关系,获取到波束组的测量结果。根据各个波束的测量值推导波束组的测量值,为根据线性或非线性函数进行推导。The measurement result of the corresponding beam group is determined according to the measured value of each beam, and the measurement value of the beam group is derived, and the measurement result of the beam group is obtained by the mapping relationship or the correspondence between the measurement value and the measurement result. The measured values of the beam set are derived from the measured values of the individual beams and are derived from linear or non-linear functions.
UE确定第一波束组的方式可以包括:UE确定具有最大组号的波束组为第一波束组;或者,UE确定具有最小组号的波束组为第一波束组;或者,UE确定具有中间组号的波束组为第一波束组。The manner in which the UE determines the first beam group may include: the UE determines that the beam group having the largest group number is the first beam group; or the UE determines that the beam group having the smallest group number is the first beam group; or the UE determines that the group has the intermediate group The beam group of the number is the first beam group.
在另一个可能的实施例中,当指示信息指示使用第一波束组作为参考时,以及确定第一波束组的方法为选取具有最大组号的波束组为第一波束组时,UE根据指示信息确定具有最大组号的波束组为第一波束组;In another possible embodiment, when the indication information indicates that the first beam group is used as the reference, and the method of determining the first beam group is to select the beam group having the largest group number as the first beam group, the UE according to the indication information Determining that the beam group having the largest group number is the first beam group;
在又一个可能的实施例中,当指示信息指示使用第一波束组作为参考时,以及确定第一波束组的方法为选取具有最小组号的波束组为第一波束组时,UE根据指示信息确定具有最小组号的波束组为第一波束组;In still another possible embodiment, when the indication information indicates that the first beam group is used as the reference, and the method of determining the first beam group is to select the beam group having the smallest group number as the first beam group, the UE according to the indication information Determining that the beam group having the smallest group number is the first beam group;
在再一个可能的实施例中,当指示信息指示使用第一波束组作为参考时,以及确定第一波束组的方法为选取具有中间组号的波束组为第一波束组时,UE根据指示信息确定具有中间组号的波束组为第一波束组。In still another possible embodiment, when the indication information indicates that the first beam group is used as the reference, and the method of determining the first beam group is to select the beam group having the intermediate group number as the first beam group, the UE according to the indication information The beam group having the intermediate group number is determined to be the first beam group.
UE确定第一波束组的方式还可以包括:UE确定具有最大测量值的波束组为第一波束组;或者,UE确定具有最小测量值的波束组为第一波束组;或者,UE确定具有中间测量 值的波束组为第一波束组。The manner in which the UE determines the first beam group may further include: the UE determines that the beam group having the largest measurement value is the first beam group; or the UE determines that the beam group having the smallest measurement value is the first beam group; or the UE determines to have the middle The beam set of measured values is the first beam set.
在再一个可能的实施例中,当指示信息指示使用第一波束组作为参考时,以及确定第一波束组的方法为选取具有最大测量值的波束组为第一波束组时,UE根据指示信息确定具有最大测量值的波束组为第一波束组;In still another possible embodiment, when the indication information indicates that the first beam group is used as the reference, and the method of determining the first beam group is to select the beam group having the largest measurement value as the first beam group, the UE according to the indication information Determining that the beam group having the largest measurement value is the first beam group;
在再一个可能的实施例中,当指示信息指示使用第一波束组作为参考时,以及确定第一波束组的方法为选取具有最小测量值的波束组为第一波束组时,UE根据指示信息确定具有最小测量值的波束组为第一波束组;In still another possible embodiment, when the indication information indicates that the first beam group is used as the reference, and the method of determining the first beam group is to select the beam group having the smallest measurement value as the first beam group, the UE according to the indication information Determining that the beam group having the smallest measurement value is the first beam group;
在再一个可能的实施例中,当指示信息指示使用第一波束组作为参考时,以及确定第一波束组的方法为选取具有中间测量值的波束组为第一波束组时,UE根据指示信息确定具有中间测量值的波束组为第一波束组。In still another possible embodiment, when the indication information indicates that the first beam group is used as the reference, and the method of determining the first beam group is to select the beam group having the intermediate measurement value as the first beam group, the UE according to the indication information The beam group having the intermediate measurement value is determined to be the first beam group.
UE确定参考测量结果的方式可以为多种,具体可以包括:The manner in which the UE determines the reference measurement result may be multiple, and specifically includes:
方式一:method one:
在多个波束组的测量值中,Among the measured values of multiple beam groups,
选取具有最大测量值的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果;或者,Selecting a measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the largest measurement value as a reference measurement result; or
选取具有最小测量值的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果;或者,Selecting a measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest measurement value as a reference measurement result; or
选取具有中间测量值的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果。The measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the intermediate measurement value is selected as the reference measurement result.
其中,确定中间测量值的方法包括:在多个波束组的测量值中,根据多个测量值计算的平均值或根据最大测量值和最小测量值计算的平均值,确定中间测量值;或者,选取在多个波束组的测量值中居中分布的值为中间测量结果值。The method for determining an intermediate measurement value includes: determining an intermediate measurement value according to an average value calculated by multiple measurement values or an average value calculated according to the maximum measurement value and the minimum measurement value among the measurement values of the multiple beam groups; or The value of the centered distribution among the measured values of the plurality of beam sets is selected as the intermediate measurement result value.
需要说明的是,当确定第一波束组时,在多个波束组中除了第一波束组之外的波束组都成为第二波束组,该第二波束组可以包括多个波束组中的至少一个波束组。当确定用作参考测量结果的第一波束组的测量结果时,在多个波束组的测量结果中除了第一波束组的测量结果之外的波束组的测量结果都成为第二波束组的测量结果。It should be noted that when determining the first beam group, the beam group except the first beam group in the multiple beam groups becomes the second beam group, and the second beam group may include at least one of the multiple beam groups. A beam group. When the measurement result of the first beam group used as the reference measurement result is determined, the measurement result of the beam group other than the measurement result of the first beam group in the measurement results of the plurality of beam groups becomes the measurement of the second beam group result.
方式二:Method 2:
在多个波束组的组号中,In the group number of multiple beam groups,
选取具有最大组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果;或者,The measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the largest group number is selected as a reference measurement result; or
选取具有最小组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果;或者,The measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest group number is selected as a reference measurement result; or
选取具有中间组号的波束组对应的所述波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果,其中,中间组号的波束组为多个波束组的组号中居中分布的组号所对应的波束组。The measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the intermediate group number is a reference measurement result, wherein the beam group of the intermediate group number is a beam group corresponding to the group number of the medium distribution among the group numbers of the plurality of beam groups.
需要说明的是,UE可以对多个波束组进行组号的命名,确定多个波束组的组号;或者,基站也可以进行UE的波束组划分并将组号下发。It should be noted that the UE may perform group name naming of multiple beam groups to determine the group number of multiple beam groups. Alternatively, the base station may perform beam group division of the UE and deliver the group number.
在一个可能的实施例中,当指示信息指示使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考测量结果时,以及确定参考测量结果的方法为选取具有最大测量值的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果时,UE根据指示信息确定具有最大测量值的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果;In a possible embodiment, when the indication information indicates that the measurement result of the first beam group is used as the reference measurement result, and the method for determining the reference measurement result is, the measurement result of selecting the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the largest measurement value is When the measurement result is referenced, the UE determines, according to the indication information, a measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the largest measurement value as a reference measurement result;
在又一个可能的实施例中,当指示信息指示使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考测量结果时,以及确定参考测量结果的方法为选取具有最小测量值的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果时,UE根据指示信息确定具有最小测量值的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果;In still another possible embodiment, when the indication information indicates that the measurement result of using the first beam group is used as the reference measurement result, and the method for determining the reference measurement result is the measurement result of selecting the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest measurement value. When referring to the measurement result, the UE determines, according to the indication information, a measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest measurement value as a reference measurement result;
在另一个可能的实施例中,当指示信息指示使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考测量结果时,以及确定参考测量结果的方法为选取具有中间测量值的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果时,UE根据指示信息确定具有中间测量值的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果;In another possible embodiment, when the indication information indicates that the measurement result of using the first beam group is used as the reference measurement result, and the method for determining the reference measurement result is the measurement result of selecting the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the intermediate measurement value. When referring to the measurement result, the UE determines, according to the indication information, a measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the intermediate measurement value as a reference measurement result;
在再一个可能的实施例中,当指示信息指示使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考测量结果时,以及确定参考测量结果的方法为选取具有最大组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果时,UE根据指示信息确定具有最大组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果;In still another possible embodiment, when the indication information indicates that the measurement result of using the first beam group is used as the reference measurement result, and the method for determining the reference measurement result is the measurement result of selecting the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the largest group number. When the measurement result is referenced, the UE determines, according to the indication information, a measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the largest group number as a reference measurement result;
在再一个可能的实施例中,当指示信息指示使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考测量结果时,以及确定参考测量结果的方法为选取具有最小组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果时,UE根据指示信息确定具有最小组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果;In still another possible embodiment, when the indication information indicates that the measurement result of using the first beam group is used as the reference measurement result, and the method for determining the reference measurement result is the measurement result of selecting the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest group number. When referring to the measurement result, the UE determines, according to the indication information, a measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest group number as a reference measurement result;
在再一个可能的实施例中,当指示信息指示使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考测量结果时,以及确定参考测量结果的方法为选取具有中间组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果时,UE根据指示信息确定具有中间组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果。In still another possible embodiment, when the indication information indicates that the measurement result of using the first beam group is used as the reference measurement result, and the method for determining the reference measurement result is the measurement result of selecting the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the intermediate group number. When referring to the measurement result, the UE determines, according to the indication information, the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the intermediate group number as the reference measurement result.
S230:UE根据上行控制信息UCI具有的第一格式发送所述UCI至基站。S230: The UE sends the UCI to the base station according to the first format that the uplink control information UCI has.
其中,UE以第一格式发送的UCI中包括:波束组的测量结果信息和波束组的信息中的至少一个。波束组包括:第一波束组和第二波束组,波束组的测量结果信息包括:第一波束组的测量结果和第二波束组的测量结果相对于第一波束组的测量结果的偏移量。第一波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果,波束组的信息用于指示,第一波束组的测量结果与第二波束组的测量结果中的至少一个所对应的波束组,该波束组为一个或多个波束组。The UCI sent by the UE in the first format includes at least one of measurement result information of a beam group and information of a beam group. The beam group includes: a first beam group and a second beam group, and the measurement result information of the beam group includes: a measurement result of the first beam group and an offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the measurement result of the first beam group . The measurement result of the first beam group is a reference measurement result, and the information of the beam group is used to indicate a beam group corresponding to at least one of the measurement result of the first beam group and the measurement result of the second beam group, the beam group is one Or multiple beam groups.
在一种可能的实施例中,以第一格式发送的UCI包括:波束组的信息。具体地,以第一格式发送的UCI还包括:第一波束组标识和第二波束组标识,其中以第一波束组标识为参考。In a possible embodiment, the UCI transmitted in the first format includes: information of a beam group. Specifically, the UCI sent in the first format further includes: a first beam group identifier and a second beam group identifier, wherein the first beam group identifier is referenced.
作为一个实施例,该UCI包含:第一波束标识本身以及第二波束标识,其中第二波束 标识为第二波束的标识本身或者相对于第一波束的标识的偏移量。其中,第二波束可以为一个或者多个。As an embodiment, the UCI includes: a first beam identification itself and a second beam identification, wherein the second beam identification is an identification of the second beam itself or an offset relative to the identification of the first beam. The second beam may be one or more.
作为一个实施例,该UCI包含:第一波束的测量结果与第二波束的测量结果所对应的各自的波束的标识,其中以第一波束标识为参考。As an embodiment, the UCI includes: an identifier of a respective beam corresponding to a measurement result of the first beam and a measurement result of the second beam, wherein the first beam identifier is used as a reference.
在另一种可能的实施例中,以第一格式发送的UCI包括:波束组的测量结果信息。具体地,根据波束组的测量结果所属的波束组的标识确定上报UCI的方式可以包括:In another possible embodiment, the UCI transmitted in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam group. Specifically, the manner of determining the UCI according to the identifier of the beam group to which the measurement result of the beam group belongs may include:
方式一:第一波束组的测量结果,第一波束组的标识,第二波束组的测量结果以及第二波束组的标识。其中,第一波束组的标识为显性指示,第二波束组的标识显性指示。Manner 1: The measurement result of the first beam group, the identifier of the first beam group, the measurement result of the second beam group, and the identifier of the second beam group. The identifier of the first beam group is a dominant indication, and the identifier of the second beam group is a dominant indication.
方式二:第一波束组的测量结果,第一波束组的标识,第二波束组的测量结果以及第二波束组的标识。其中,第一波束组的标识为隐性指示,第二波束组的标识显性指示。Manner 2: The measurement result of the first beam group, the identifier of the first beam group, the measurement result of the second beam group, and the identifier of the second beam group. The identifier of the first beam group is an implicit indication, and the identifier of the second beam group is an explicit indication.
方式三:第一波束组的测量结果,第一波束组的标识,第二波束组的测量结果。其中,第一波束组的标识显性指示,第二波束组的标识隐性指示。Manner 3: the measurement result of the first beam group, the identifier of the first beam group, and the measurement result of the second beam group. The identifier of the first beam group is explicitly indicated, and the identifier of the second beam group is implicitly indicated.
方式四:第一波束组的测量结果,第二波束组的测量结果。其中,第一波束组的标识隐性指示,第二波束组的标识隐性指示。Mode 4: measurement result of the first beam group, measurement result of the second beam group. The identifier of the first beam group is implicitly indicated, and the identifier of the second beam group is implicitly indicated.
上述所述的隐性指示表示不需要指示,通过预定义或默认的方式可以进行波束组的测量结果与波束组之间的对应关系的解析。The implicit indication described above indicates that no indication is required, and the correspondence between the measurement result of the beam group and the beam group can be analyzed in a predefined or default manner.
上述方式一到方式四中:In the above way one to four:
在一个可能的实施例中,当第二波束组的标识为显性指示时,第二波束组的标识为第二波束组的标识本身;或者,第二波束组的标识为相对于第一波束组的标识的偏移量。In a possible embodiment, when the identifier of the second beam group is a dominant indication, the identifier of the second beam group is the identifier of the second beam group; or the identifier of the second beam group is relative to the first beam. The offset of the group's identity.
例如:当第二波束组的标识为显性指示时,第一波束组的标识为“5”,第二波束组的标识可以为“6”也可以为“1”。For example, when the identifier of the second beam group is a dominant indication, the identifier of the first beam group is “5”, and the identifier of the second beam group may be “6” or “1”.
在该情况下,该第一波束组的标识对应该第一波束组对应的参考测量结果,即第一波束组的标识为“5”,其对应的参考测量结果上对应的标识也为“5”,此时,第二波束组的标识可以为“6”,其对应的测量结果上对应的标识也可以为“6”;或者,第二波束组的标识为“1”,即第二波束组的标识为相对于第一波束组的标识的偏移量,其对应的测量结果上对应的标识也对应的为“1”。In this case, the identifier of the first beam group corresponds to the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam group, that is, the identifier of the first beam group is “5”, and the corresponding identifier of the corresponding reference measurement result is also “5”. In this case, the identifier of the second beam group may be “6”, and the corresponding identifier of the corresponding measurement result may also be “6”; or the identifier of the second beam group is “1”, that is, the second beam. The identifier of the group is an offset from the identifier of the first beam group, and the corresponding identifier on the corresponding measurement result also corresponds to “1”.
在又一个可能的实施例中,当第二波束组的标识为隐性指示时,波束组按照波束组的组号递增或递减的顺序依次排列。需要说明的是,UE可以对多个波束组进行组号的命名,确定多个波束组的组号;或者,基站也可以将组号下发。例如:当组号为1,2,3…M时,对于组1,组2,组3…组M依次排列放在一个格式中进行上报;当组号为x,x+1…N时,对于组x,组x+1…组N依次排列放在一个格式中进行上报;或者,当组号为M,M-1,…1时,对于组M,组M-1…组1依次排列放在一个格式中进行上报;当组号为N,N-1…x时,对于组N,组N-1…组x依次排列放在一个格式中进行上报。In still another possible embodiment, when the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the beam groups are sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the group number of the beam group. It should be noted that the UE may perform group name naming for multiple beam groups to determine the group number of multiple beam groups. Alternatively, the base station may also send the group number. For example, when the group number is 1, 2, 3...M, the group 1, the group 2, the group 3, the group M are sequentially arranged in one format for reporting; when the group number is x, x+1...N, For group x, group x+1...group N is arranged in a format for reporting; or, when the group number is M, M-1,...1, for group M, group M-1...group 1 is arranged in order In a format for reporting; when the group number is N, N-1...x, for group N, group N-1... group x is arranged in a format for reporting.
在另一个可能的实施例中,当第二波束组的标识为隐性指示时,波束组按照波束组的组号奇数升序或偶数升序的顺序依次排列。In another possible embodiment, when the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the beam groups are sequentially arranged in the order of odd or ascending order of the group number of the beam group.
例如:当组号为1,2,3…M时,对于组1,组3,组5…组M(即如果M是奇数,则最后一个是组M;如果M是偶数,则最后一个是M-1)依次排列放在一个格式中进行上报,依次类推;或者,当组号为1,2,3…M时,对于组2,组4,组6…组M(即如果M是偶数,则最后一个是组M;如果M是奇数,则最后一个是M-1)依次排列放在一个格式中进行上报,依次类推。For example: when the group number is 1, 2, 3...M, for group 1, group 3, group 5... group M (ie if M is odd, the last one is group M; if M is even, the last one is M-1) is arranged in a format for reporting, and so on; or, when the group number is 1, 2, 3...M, for group 2, group 4, group 6... group M (ie, if M is even The last one is the group M; if M is an odd number, the last one is M-1) is arranged in a format for reporting, and so on.
在再一个可能的实施例中,当第二波束组的标识为隐性指示时,波束组按照波束组的组号奇数降序或偶数降序的顺序依次排列。In still another possible embodiment, when the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the beam group is sequentially arranged in the order of odd or descending order of the group number of the beam group.
在再一个可能的实施例中,当第二波束组的标识为隐性指示时,波束组根据预设排列方式进行排列,即某个预设的序列设计对应的顺序。其中,预设排列方式是通过无线资源控制RRC信令或媒体访问控制信令从基站发送至UE;或者,将预设排列方式通过预先配置的方式配置在UE处。In still another possible embodiment, when the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the beam groups are arranged according to a preset arrangement manner, that is, a sequence corresponding to a preset sequence design. The preset arrangement is sent from the base station to the UE by using the radio resource control RRC signaling or the medium access control signaling; or the preset arrangement is configured at the UE in a pre-configured manner.
例如:当组号为1,2,3…M时,对于组1,组3,组5…组M,某个预设的序列设计可以是按照某种跳频序列进行的无序的设计。For example, when the group number is 1, 2, 3...M, for group 1, group 3, group 5, group M, a predetermined sequence design may be an unordered design according to a certain frequency hopping sequence.
另外,以第一格式发送的UCI包括:波束组的测量结果信息和波束组的信息。具体地,根据波束组的测量结果确定上报UCI的方式可以包括:In addition, the UCI transmitted in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam group and information of the beam group. Specifically, determining, according to the measurement result of the beam group, the manner of reporting the UCI may include:
第一波束组的测量结果,第一波束组的标识,第二波束组的测量结果以及第二波束组的标识。其中,第一波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果;第一波束组的信息可以为显性或隐性指示;第二波束组的信息也可以为显性或隐性指示。The measurement result of the first beam group, the identifier of the first beam group, the measurement result of the second beam group, and the identifier of the second beam group. The measurement result of the first beam group is a reference measurement result; the information of the first beam group may be a dominant or implicit indication; and the information of the second beam group may also be a dominant or implicit indication.
在一个可能的实施例中,参考测量结果为最大组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果。第一波束组的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第一波束组的标识为显性指示时,第一波束组的标识为第一波束组的索引。第二波束组的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第二波束组的标识为隐性指示时,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号递减或递增的顺序依次排列。In a possible embodiment, the measurement result is the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group of the largest group number. The identification of the first beam set may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the first beam group is a dominant indication, the identifier of the first beam group is an index of the first beam group. The identity of the second beam set can be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in descending or increasing order of the group number of the beam group.
在又一个可能的实施例中,参考测量结果为最小组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果。第一波束组的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第一波束组的标识为显性指示时,第一波束组的标识为第一波束组的索引。第二波束组的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第二波束组的标识为隐性指示时,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号递增或递减的顺序依次排列。In still another possible embodiment, the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group whose measurement result is the smallest group number is referred to. The identification of the first beam set may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the first beam group is a dominant indication, the identifier of the first beam group is an index of the first beam group. The identity of the second beam set can be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the group number of the beam group.
在另一个可能的实施例中,参考测量结果为中间组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果。第一波束组的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第一波束组的标识为显性指示时,第一波束组的标识为第一波束组的索引。第二波束组的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第二波束组的标识为隐性指示时,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束 组的组号从最小组号开始递增,或从最大组号递减,或从中间组号递增到最大组号并从中间组号递减到最小组号,或从中间组号递减到最小组号并从中间组号递增到最大组号的顺序依次排列。In another possible embodiment, the reference measurement result is the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group of the intermediate group number. The identification of the first beam set may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the first beam group is a dominant indication, the identifier of the first beam group is an index of the first beam group. The identity of the second beam set can be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group relative to the reference measurement result is increased from the minimum group number according to the group number of the beam group, or is decreased from the maximum group number, or The number is incremented from the intermediate group number to the largest group number and is decremented from the intermediate group number to the minimum group number, or from the intermediate group number to the minimum group number and sequentially from the intermediate group number to the largest group number.
在再一个可能的实施例中,参考测量结果为具有最大测量值的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果。第一波束组的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第一波束组的标识为显性指示时,第一波束组的标识为第一波束组的索引。第二波束组的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第二波束组的标识为隐性指示时,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号递减或递增的顺序依次排列。In still another possible embodiment, the reference measurement result is the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the largest measurement value. The identification of the first beam set may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the first beam group is a dominant indication, the identifier of the first beam group is an index of the first beam group. The identity of the second beam set can be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in descending or increasing order of the group number of the beam group.
在再一个可能的实施例中,参考测量结果为具有最小测量值的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果。第一波束组的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第一波束组的标识为显性指示时,第一波束组的标识为第一波束组的索引。第二波束组的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第二波束组的标识可以为隐性指示时,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号递增或递减的顺序依次排列。In still another possible embodiment, the reference measurement result is a measurement result of a beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest measurement value. The identification of the first beam set may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the first beam group is a dominant indication, the identifier of the first beam group is an index of the first beam group. The identity of the second beam set can be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the second beam group may be an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the group number of the beam group.
在再一个可能的实施例中,参考测量结果为具有中间测量值的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果。第一波束组的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第一波束组的标识为显性指示时,第一波束组的标识为第一波束组的索引。第二波束组的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第二波束组的标识为隐性指示时,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号递增或递减的顺序依次排列。In still another possible embodiment, the reference measurement result is a measurement result of a beam group corresponding to a beam group having an intermediate measurement value. The identification of the first beam set may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the first beam group is a dominant indication, the identifier of the first beam group is an index of the first beam group. The identity of the second beam set can be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the group number of the beam group.
在再一个可能的实施例中,对大于预设门限值的波束组的测量结果进行上报。其中,该预设门限值通过无线资源控制RRC信令或媒体访问控制信令从基站发送至UE;或者,将预设门限值通过预先配置的方式配置在UE处。波束组的标识为显性指示。作为一种实施例,所述测量结果根据预设排列方式进行排列上报。所述预设排列方式可以是上述各方式中的任何依次排列的顺序。In still another possible embodiment, the measurement result of the beam group greater than the preset threshold is reported. The preset threshold is sent from the base station to the UE by using radio resource control RRC signaling or media access control signaling; or the preset threshold is configured in the UE in a pre-configured manner. The identification of the beam group is a dominant indication. As an embodiment, the measurement results are arranged and reported according to a preset arrangement manner. The preset arrangement may be any order in which each of the above modes is sequentially arranged.
例如:当测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量大于预设门限值时,测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照预设的排列方式进行排列;或者,当测量结果大于预设门限值时,测量结果按照预设的排列方式进行排列。For example, when the offset of the measurement result relative to the reference measurement result is greater than the preset threshold value, the offset of the measurement result relative to the reference measurement result is arranged according to a preset arrangement manner; or, when the measurement result is greater than the preset At the threshold value, the measurement results are arranged in a preset arrangement.
上述方法中,预设门限值和预设排列方式中的至少一种通过无线资源控制RRC信令和媒体访问控制信令中的至少一种信令从基站发送至UE;或者,将预设门限值和预设排列方式中的至少一种通过预先配置的方式配置在UE处。In the above method, at least one of the preset threshold value and the preset arrangement manner is sent from the base station to the UE by using at least one of radio resource control RRC signaling and media access control signaling; or, preset At least one of the threshold value and the preset arrangement is configured at the UE in a pre-configured manner.
此外,UE以第一格式发送的UCI还包括:用于测量的参考信号或作为所述波束组的测量结果上报依据的参考信号中的至少一个。其中,参考信号包括:同步信号、同步信号资源标识、信道状态指示参考信号CSI-RS和CSI-RS资源标识中的至少一种。UE也可以不上报参考信号,根据所述指示信息中指定的参考信号进行测量。In addition, the UCI transmitted by the UE in the first format further includes: at least one of a reference signal used for measurement or a reference signal used as a basis for reporting the measurement result of the beam group. The reference signal includes at least one of a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier, a channel state indication reference signal CSI-RS, and a CSI-RS resource identifier. The UE may also report the reference signal according to the reference signal specified in the indication information without reporting the reference signal.
基站可以根据上述UE发送的UCI对波束组进行处理。The base station can process the beam group according to the UCI sent by the UE.
需要说明的是,在上述三种可能的情况中,当第一波束组中包括多个波束组时,UE可以利用平均值算法根据多个波束组,确定多个中的一个波束组作为参考。It should be noted that, in the foregoing three possible cases, when multiple beam groups are included in the first beam group, the UE may determine one of the plurality of beam groups as a reference according to the multiple beam groups by using an average value algorithm.
上述所有的预设的,预配置的或预通知的,可以为通过RRC信令,或MAC信令从网络设备通知给UE,或者预先在UE处写好。All of the foregoing preset, pre-configured or pre-notified may be notified to the UE from the network device through RRC signaling, or MAC signaling, or written in advance at the UE.
上述所述的任何标识,或号都可,或索引都等同,可以互相替换。Any of the above-mentioned identifiers, or numbers, or indexes may be equivalent and may be replaced with each other.
图3为本发明事实施例提供的基于波束组的另一种数据传输方法的流程示意图。如图3所示,该实施例包括:步骤S310-S320,具体如下包括:FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart diagram of another data transmission method based on a beam group according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 3, the embodiment includes: Steps S310-S320, specifically as follows:
S310:UE确定使用第一波束组作为参考,或者使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考。S310: The UE determines to use the first beam group as a reference, or uses the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference.
具体地,UE对各波束进行测量,划分为波束组,对所划分的波束组,确定波束组标识以及对应的波束组的测量结果。Specifically, the UE measures each beam, divides into a beam group, and determines a beam group identifier and a measurement result of the corresponding beam group for the divided beam group.
在一个可能的实施例中,划分波束组为UE将含有相同特征的波束分成一组,将剩余不包含相同特征的波束分成一组。其中,在不包含相同特征的波束中有一种情况可以是只有一个波束的波束组,那么该波束组仅包括一个波束。当将含有相同特征的波束分成一组时,可以是根据各波束是否具有相同的子载波间隔进行波束分组,具有相同子载波间隔的波束被划分为一个波束组;或者,根据是否具有相同的波形进行波束分组,具有相同波形的波束被划分为一个波束组;或者,根据是否具有相近的测量值进行波束分组,具有相近的测量值的波束被划分为一个波束组。In a possible embodiment, the split beam group is a group of beams that have the same feature for the UE, and the remaining beams that do not contain the same feature are grouped. Wherein, in a beam that does not include the same feature, one case may be a beam group having only one beam, and the beam group includes only one beam. When groups of beams having the same feature are grouped, beam grouping may be performed according to whether each beam has the same subcarrier spacing, beams having the same subcarrier spacing are divided into one beam group; or, depending on whether they have the same waveform Beam grouping is performed, beams having the same waveform are divided into one beam group; or beams are grouped according to whether or not there are similar measurement values, and beams having similar measurement values are divided into one beam group.
确定对应的波束组的测量结果为根据各个波束的测量值,推导波束组的测量值,通过测量值与测量结果之间的映射关系或者对应关系,获取到波束组的测量结果。根据各个波束的测量值推导波束组的测量值,为根据线性或非线性函数进行推导。The measurement result of the corresponding beam group is determined according to the measured value of each beam, and the measurement value of the beam group is derived, and the measurement result of the beam group is obtained by the mapping relationship or the correspondence between the measurement value and the measurement result. The measured values of the beam set are derived from the measured values of the individual beams and are derived from linear or non-linear functions.
UE确定第一波束组的方式可以包括:UE确定具有最大组号的波束组为第一波束组;或者,UE确定具有最小组号的波束组为第一波束组;或者,UE确定具有中间组号的波束组为第一波束组。The manner in which the UE determines the first beam group may include: the UE determines that the beam group having the largest group number is the first beam group; or the UE determines that the beam group having the smallest group number is the first beam group; or the UE determines that the group has the intermediate group The beam group of the number is the first beam group.
在另一个可能的实施例中,当使用第一波束组作为参考时,以及确定第一波束组的方法为选取具有最大组号的波束组为第一波束组时,UE确定具有最大组号的波束组为第一波束组;In another possible embodiment, when the first beam group is used as a reference, and the method of determining the first beam group is to select the beam group having the largest group number as the first beam group, the UE determines that the group has the largest group number. The beam group is a first beam group;
在又一个可能的实施例中,当使用第一波束组作为参考时,以及确定第一波束组的方法为选取具有最小组号的波束组为第一波束组时,UE确定具有最小组号的波束组为第一波束组;In still another possible embodiment, when the first beam group is used as a reference, and the method of determining the first beam group is to select the beam group having the smallest group number as the first beam group, the UE determines that the group has the smallest group number. The beam group is a first beam group;
在再一个可能的实施例中,当使用第一波束组作为参考时,以及确定第一波束组的方法为选取具有中间组号的波束组为第一波束组时,UE确定具有中间组号的波束组为第一波束组。In still another possible embodiment, when the first beam group is used as a reference, and the method of determining the first beam group is to select a beam group having an intermediate group number as the first beam group, the UE determines that the intermediate group number is The beam group is the first beam group.
UE确定第一波束组的方式还可以包括:UE确定具有最大测量值的波束组为第一波束 组;或者,UE确定具有最小测量值的波束组为第一波束组;或者,UE确定具有中间测量值的波束组为第一波束组。The manner in which the UE determines the first beam group may further include: the UE determines that the beam group having the largest measurement value is the first beam group; or the UE determines that the beam group having the smallest measurement value is the first beam group; or the UE determines to have the middle The beam set of measured values is the first beam set.
在再一个可能的实施例中,当使用第一波束组作为参考时,以及确定第一波束组的方法为选取具有最大测量值的波束组为第一波束组时,UE确定具有最大测量值的波束组为第一波束组;In still another possible embodiment, when the first beam group is used as a reference, and the method of determining the first beam group is to select the beam group having the largest measurement value as the first beam group, the UE determines that the first measurement group has the largest measurement value. The beam group is a first beam group;
在再一个可能的实施例中,当使用第一波束组作为参考时,以及确定第一波束组的方法为选取具有最小测量值的波束组为第一波束组时,UE确定具有最小测量值的波束组为第一波束组;In still another possible embodiment, when the first beam group is used as a reference, and the method of determining the first beam group is to select the beam group having the smallest measurement value as the first beam group, the UE determines that the minimum measurement value is The beam group is a first beam group;
在再一个可能的实施例中,当使用第一波束组作为参考时,以及确定第一波束组的方法为选取具有中间测量值的波束组为第一波束组时,UE确定具有中间测量值的波束组为第一波束组。In still another possible embodiment, when the first beam group is used as a reference, and the method of determining the first beam group is to select a beam group having an intermediate measurement value as the first beam group, the UE determines that the intermediate measurement value is The beam group is the first beam group.
UE确定参考测量结果的方式可以为多种,具体可以包括:The manner in which the UE determines the reference measurement result may be multiple, and specifically includes:
方式一::method one::
在多个波束组的测量值中,Among the measured values of multiple beam groups,
选取具有最大测量值的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果;或者,Selecting a measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the largest measurement value as a reference measurement result; or
选取具有最小测量值的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果;或者,Selecting a measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest measurement value as a reference measurement result; or
选取具有中间测量值的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果。The measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the intermediate measurement value is selected as the reference measurement result.
其中,确定中间测量值的方法包括:在多个波束组的测量值中,根据多个测量值计算的平均值或根据最大测量值和最小测量值计算的平均值,确定中间测量值;或者,选取在多个波束组的测量值中居中分布的值为中间测量结果值。The method for determining an intermediate measurement value includes: determining an intermediate measurement value according to an average value calculated by multiple measurement values or an average value calculated according to the maximum measurement value and the minimum measurement value among the measurement values of the multiple beam groups; or The value of the centered distribution among the measured values of the plurality of beam sets is selected as the intermediate measurement result value.
需要说明的是,当确定第一波束组时,在多个波束组中除了第一波束组之外的波束组都成为第二波束组,该第二波束组可以包括多个波束组中的至少一个波束组。当确定用作参考测量结果的第一波束组的测量结果时,在多个波束组的测量结果中除了第一波束组的测量结果之外的波束组的测量结果都成为第二波束组的测量结果。It should be noted that when determining the first beam group, the beam group except the first beam group in the multiple beam groups becomes the second beam group, and the second beam group may include at least one of the multiple beam groups. A beam group. When the measurement result of the first beam group used as the reference measurement result is determined, the measurement result of the beam group other than the measurement result of the first beam group in the measurement results of the plurality of beam groups becomes the measurement of the second beam group result.
方式二:Method 2:
在多个波束组的组号中,In the group number of multiple beam groups,
选取具有最大组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果;或者,The measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the largest group number is selected as a reference measurement result; or
选取具有最小组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果;或者,The measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest group number is selected as a reference measurement result; or
选取具有中间组号的波束组对应的所述波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果,其中,中间组号的波束组为多个波束组的组号中居中分布的组号所对应的波束组。The measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the intermediate group number is a reference measurement result, wherein the beam group of the intermediate group number is a beam group corresponding to the group number of the medium distribution among the group numbers of the plurality of beam groups.
需要说明的是,UE可以对多个波束组进行组号的命名,确定多个波束组的组号;或 者,基站也可以进行UE的波束组划分并将组号下发。It should be noted that the UE may perform group name naming for multiple beam groups and determine the group number of multiple beam groups. Alternatively, the base station may perform beam group division of the UE and deliver the group number.
在一个可能的实施例中,当使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考测量结果时,以及确定参考测量结果的方法为选取具有最大测量值的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果时,UE确定具有最大测量值的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果;In a possible embodiment, when the measurement result of the first beam group is used as the reference measurement result, and the method for determining the reference measurement result is to select the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the largest measurement value as the reference measurement result. The UE determines that the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the largest measurement value is a reference measurement result;
在又一个可能的实施例中,当使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考测量结果时,以及确定参考测量结果的方法为选取具有最小测量值的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果时,UE确定具有最小测量值的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果;In still another possible embodiment, when the measurement result of the first beam group is used as the reference measurement result, and the method for determining the reference measurement result is to select the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest measurement value as the reference measurement As a result, the UE determines that the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest measurement value is a reference measurement result;
在另一个可能的实施例中,当使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考测量结果时,以及确定参考测量结果的方法为选取具有中间测量值的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果时,UE确定具有中间测量值的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果;In another possible embodiment, when the measurement result of the first beam group is used as the reference measurement result, and the method for determining the reference measurement result is the measurement result of selecting the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the intermediate measurement value as the reference measurement As a result, the UE determines that the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the intermediate measurement value is a reference measurement result;
在再一个可能的实施例中,当使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考测量结果时,以及确定参考测量结果的方法为选取具有最大组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果时,UE确定具有最大组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果;In still another possible embodiment, when the measurement result of the first beam group is used as the reference measurement result, and the method for determining the reference measurement result is to select the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the largest group number as the reference measurement As a result, the UE determines that the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the largest group number is a reference measurement result;
在再一个可能的实施例中,当使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考测量结果时,以及确定参考测量结果的方法为选取具有最小组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果时,UE确定具有最小组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果;In still another possible embodiment, when the measurement result of the first beam group is used as the reference measurement result, and the method for determining the reference measurement result is to select the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest group number as the reference measurement As a result, the UE determines that the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest group number is a reference measurement result;
在再一个可能的实施例中,当使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考测量结果时,以及确定参考测量结果的方法为选取具有中间组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果时,UE确定具有中间组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果。In still another possible embodiment, when the measurement result of the first beam group is used as the reference measurement result, and the method for determining the reference measurement result is the measurement result of selecting the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the intermediate group number as the reference measurement As a result, the UE determines that the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the intermediate group number is the reference measurement result.
S320:UE根据上行控制信息UCI具有的第一格式发送所述UCI至基站。S320: The UE sends the UCI to the base station according to the first format that the uplink control information UCI has.
其中,UE以第一格式发送的UCI中包括:波束组的测量结果信息和波束组的信息中的至少一个。波束组包括:第一波束组和第二波束组,波束组的测量结果信息包括:第一波束组的测量结果和第二波束组的测量结果相对于第一波束组的测量结果的偏移量。第一波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果,波束组的信息用于指示,第一波束组的测量结果与第二波束组的测量结果中的至少一个所对应的波束组,该波束组为一个或多个波束组。The UCI sent by the UE in the first format includes at least one of measurement result information of a beam group and information of a beam group. The beam group includes: a first beam group and a second beam group, and the measurement result information of the beam group includes: a measurement result of the first beam group and an offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the measurement result of the first beam group . The measurement result of the first beam group is a reference measurement result, and the information of the beam group is used to indicate a beam group corresponding to at least one of the measurement result of the first beam group and the measurement result of the second beam group, the beam group is one Or multiple beam groups.
在一种可能的实施例中,以第一格式发送的UCI包括:波束组的信息。具体地,以第一格式发送的UCI还包括:第一波束组标识和第二波束组标识,其中以第一波束组标识为参考。In a possible embodiment, the UCI transmitted in the first format includes: information of a beam group. Specifically, the UCI sent in the first format further includes: a first beam group identifier and a second beam group identifier, wherein the first beam group identifier is referenced.
作为一个实施例,该UCI包含:第一波束标识本身以及第二波束标识,其中第二波束标识为第二波束的标识本身或者相对于第一波束的标识的偏移量。其中,第二波束可以为一个或者多个。As an embodiment, the UCI includes: a first beam identifier itself and a second beam identifier, wherein the second beam identifier is an identifier of the second beam itself or an offset relative to the identifier of the first beam. The second beam may be one or more.
作为一个实施例,该UCI包含:第一波束的测量结果与第二波束的测量结果所对应的 各自的波束的标识,其中以第一波束标识为参考。As an embodiment, the UCI includes: an identification of a respective beam corresponding to a measurement result of the first beam and a measurement result of the second beam, wherein the first beam identification is used as a reference.
在另一种可能的实施例中,以第一格式发送的UCI包括:波束组的测量结果信息。具体地,根据波束组的测量结果所属的波束组的标识确定上报UCI的方式可以包括:In another possible embodiment, the UCI transmitted in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam group. Specifically, the manner of determining the UCI according to the identifier of the beam group to which the measurement result of the beam group belongs may include:
方式一:第一波束组的测量结果,第一波束组的标识,第二波束组的测量结果以及第二波束组的标识。其中,第一波束组的标识为显性指示,第二波束组的标识显性指示。Manner 1: The measurement result of the first beam group, the identifier of the first beam group, the measurement result of the second beam group, and the identifier of the second beam group. The identifier of the first beam group is a dominant indication, and the identifier of the second beam group is a dominant indication.
方式二:第一波束组的测量结果,第一波束组的标识,第二波束组的测量结果以及第二波束组的标识。其中,第一波束组的标识为隐性指示,第二波束组的标识显性指示。Manner 2: The measurement result of the first beam group, the identifier of the first beam group, the measurement result of the second beam group, and the identifier of the second beam group. The identifier of the first beam group is an implicit indication, and the identifier of the second beam group is an explicit indication.
方式三:第一波束组的测量结果,第一波束组的标识,第二波束组的测量结果。其中,第一波束组的标识显性指示,第二波束组的标识隐性指示。Manner 3: the measurement result of the first beam group, the identifier of the first beam group, and the measurement result of the second beam group. The identifier of the first beam group is explicitly indicated, and the identifier of the second beam group is implicitly indicated.
方式四:第一波束组的测量结果,第二波束组的测量结果。其中,第一波束组的标识隐性指示,第二波束组的标识隐性指示。Mode 4: measurement result of the first beam group, measurement result of the second beam group. The identifier of the first beam group is implicitly indicated, and the identifier of the second beam group is implicitly indicated.
上述所述的隐性指示表示不需要指示,通过预定义或默认的方式可以进行波束组的测量结果与波束组之间的对应关系的解析。The implicit indication described above indicates that no indication is required, and the correspondence between the measurement result of the beam group and the beam group can be analyzed in a predefined or default manner.
上述方式一到方式四中:In the above way one to four:
在一个可能的实施例中,当第二波束组的标识为显性指示时,第二波束组的标识为第二波束组的标识本身;或者,第二波束组的标识为相对于第一波束组的标识的偏移量。In a possible embodiment, when the identifier of the second beam group is a dominant indication, the identifier of the second beam group is the identifier of the second beam group; or the identifier of the second beam group is relative to the first beam. The offset of the group's identity.
例如:当第二波束组的标识为显性指示时,第一波束组的标识为“5”,第二波束组的标识可以为“6”也可以为“1”。For example, when the identifier of the second beam group is a dominant indication, the identifier of the first beam group is “5”, and the identifier of the second beam group may be “6” or “1”.
在该情况下,该第一波束组的标识对应该第一波束组对应的参考测量结果,即第一波束组的标识为“5”,其对应的参考测量结果上对应的标识也为“5”,此时,第二波束组的标识可以为“6”,其对应的测量结果上对应的标识也可以为“6”;或者,第二波束组的标识为“1”,即第二波束组的标识为相对于第一波束组的标识的偏移量,其对应的测量结果上对应的标识也对应的为“1”。In this case, the identifier of the first beam group corresponds to the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam group, that is, the identifier of the first beam group is “5”, and the corresponding identifier of the corresponding reference measurement result is also “5”. In this case, the identifier of the second beam group may be “6”, and the corresponding identifier of the corresponding measurement result may also be “6”; or the identifier of the second beam group is “1”, that is, the second beam. The identifier of the group is an offset from the identifier of the first beam group, and the corresponding identifier on the corresponding measurement result also corresponds to “1”.
在又一个可能的实施例中,当第二波束组的标识为隐性指示时,波束组按照波束组的组号递增或递减的顺序依次排列。需要说明的是,UE可以对多个波束组进行组号的命名,确定多个波束组的组号;或者,基站也可以将组号下发。例如:当组号为1,2,3…M时,对于组1,组2,组3…组M依次排列放在一个格式中进行上报;当组号为x,x+1…N时,对于组x,组x+1…组N依次排列放在一个格式中进行上报;或者,当组号为M,M-1,…1时,对于组M,组M-1…组1依次排列放在一个格式中进行上报;当组号为N,N-1…x时,对于组N,组N-1…组x依次排列放在一个格式中进行上报。In still another possible embodiment, when the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the beam groups are sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the group number of the beam group. It should be noted that the UE may perform group name naming for multiple beam groups to determine the group number of multiple beam groups. Alternatively, the base station may also send the group number. For example, when the group number is 1, 2, 3...M, the group 1, the group 2, the group 3, the group M are sequentially arranged in one format for reporting; when the group number is x, x+1...N, For group x, group x+1...group N is arranged in a format for reporting; or, when the group number is M, M-1,...1, for group M, group M-1...group 1 is arranged in order In a format for reporting; when the group number is N, N-1...x, for group N, group N-1... group x is arranged in a format for reporting.
在另一个可能的实施例中,当第二波束组的标识为隐性指示时,波束组按照波束组的组号奇数升序或偶数升序的顺序依次排列。In another possible embodiment, when the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the beam groups are sequentially arranged in the order of odd or ascending order of the group number of the beam group.
例如:当组号为1,2,3…M时,对于组1,组3,组5…组M(即如果M是奇数,则最 后一个是组M;如果M是偶数,则最后一个是M-1)依次排列放在一个格式中进行上报,依次类推;或者,当组号为1,2,3…M时,对于组2,组4,组6…组M(即如果M是偶数,则最后一个是组M;如果M是奇数,则最后一个是M-1)依次排列放在一个格式中进行上报,依次类推。For example: when the group number is 1, 2, 3...M, for group 1, group 3, group 5... group M (ie if M is odd, the last one is group M; if M is even, the last one is M-1) is arranged in a format for reporting, and so on; or, when the group number is 1, 2, 3...M, for group 2, group 4, group 6... group M (ie, if M is even The last one is the group M; if M is an odd number, the last one is M-1) is arranged in a format for reporting, and so on.
在再一个可能的实施例中,当第二波束组的标识为隐性指示时,波束组按照波束组的组号奇数降序或偶数降序的顺序依次排列。In still another possible embodiment, when the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the beam group is sequentially arranged in the order of odd or descending order of the group number of the beam group.
在再一个可能的实施例中,当第二波束组的标识为隐性指示时,波束组根据预设排列方式进行排列,即某个预设的序列设计对应的顺序。其中,预设排列方式是通过无线资源控制RRC信令或媒体访问控制信令从基站发送至UE;或者,将预设排列方式通过预先配置的方式配置在UE处。In still another possible embodiment, when the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the beam groups are arranged according to a preset arrangement manner, that is, a sequence corresponding to a preset sequence design. The preset arrangement is sent from the base station to the UE by using the radio resource control RRC signaling or the medium access control signaling; or the preset arrangement is configured at the UE in a pre-configured manner.
例如:当组号为1,2,3…M时,对于组1,组3,组5…组M,某个预设的序列设计可以是按照某种跳频序列进行的无序的设计。For example, when the group number is 1, 2, 3...M, for group 1, group 3, group 5, group M, a predetermined sequence design may be an unordered design according to a certain frequency hopping sequence.
另外,以第一格式发送的UCI包括:波束组的测量结果信息和波束组的信息。具体地,根据波束组的测量结果确定上报UCI的方式可以包括:In addition, the UCI transmitted in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam group and information of the beam group. Specifically, determining, according to the measurement result of the beam group, the manner of reporting the UCI may include:
第一波束组的测量结果,第一波束组的标识,第二波束组的测量结果以及第二波束组的标识。其中,第一波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果;第一波束组的信息可以为显性或隐性指示;第二波束组的信息也可以为显性或隐性指示。The measurement result of the first beam group, the identifier of the first beam group, the measurement result of the second beam group, and the identifier of the second beam group. The measurement result of the first beam group is a reference measurement result; the information of the first beam group may be a dominant or implicit indication; and the information of the second beam group may also be a dominant or implicit indication.
在一个可能的实施例中,参考测量结果为最大组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果。第一波束组的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第一波束组的标识为显性指示时,第一波束组的标识为第一波束组的索引。第二波束组的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第二波束组的标识为隐性指示时,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号递减或递增的顺序依次排列。In a possible embodiment, the measurement result is the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group of the largest group number. The identification of the first beam set may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the first beam group is a dominant indication, the identifier of the first beam group is an index of the first beam group. The identity of the second beam set can be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in descending or increasing order of the group number of the beam group.
在又一个可能的实施例中,参考测量结果为最小组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果。第一波束组的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第一波束组的标识为显性指示时,第一波束组的标识为第一波束组的索引。第二波束组的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第二波束组的标识为隐性指示时,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号递增或递减的顺序依次排列。In still another possible embodiment, the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group whose measurement result is the smallest group number is referred to. The identification of the first beam set may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the first beam group is a dominant indication, the identifier of the first beam group is an index of the first beam group. The identity of the second beam set can be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the group number of the beam group.
在另一个可能的实施例中,参考测量结果为中间组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果。第一波束组的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第一波束组的标识为显性指示时,第一波束组的标识为第一波束组的索引。第二波束组的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第二波束组的标识为隐性指示时,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号从最小组号开始递增,或从最大组号递减,或从中间组号递增到最大组号并从中间组号递减到最小组号,或从中间组号递减到最小组号并从中间组号递增到最大组号的顺序依次排列。In another possible embodiment, the reference measurement result is the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group of the intermediate group number. The identification of the first beam set may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the first beam group is a dominant indication, the identifier of the first beam group is an index of the first beam group. The identity of the second beam set can be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group relative to the reference measurement result is increased from the minimum group number according to the group number of the beam group, or is decreased from the maximum group number, or The number is incremented from the intermediate group number to the largest group number and is decremented from the intermediate group number to the minimum group number, or from the intermediate group number to the minimum group number and sequentially from the intermediate group number to the largest group number.
在再一个可能的实施例中,参考测量结果为具有最大测量值的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果。第一波束组的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第一波束组的标识为显性指示时,第一波束组的标识为第一波束组的索引。第二波束组的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第二波束组的标识为隐性指示时,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号递减或递增的顺序依次排列。In still another possible embodiment, the reference measurement result is the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the largest measurement value. The identification of the first beam set may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the first beam group is a dominant indication, the identifier of the first beam group is an index of the first beam group. The identity of the second beam set can be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in descending or increasing order of the group number of the beam group.
在再一个可能的实施例中,参考测量结果为具有最小测量值的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果。第一波束组的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第一波束组的标识为显性指示时,第一波束组的标识为第一波束组的索引。第二波束组的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第二波束组的标识可以为隐性指示时,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号递增或递减的顺序依次排列。In still another possible embodiment, the reference measurement result is a measurement result of a beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest measurement value. The identification of the first beam set may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the first beam group is a dominant indication, the identifier of the first beam group is an index of the first beam group. The identity of the second beam set can be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the second beam group may be an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the group number of the beam group.
在再一个可能的实施例中,参考测量结果为具有中间测量值的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果。第一波束组的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第一波束组的标识为显性指示时,第一波束组的标识为第一波束组的索引。第二波束组的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第二波束组的标识为隐性指示时,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号递增或递减的顺序依次排列。In still another possible embodiment, the reference measurement result is a measurement result of a beam group corresponding to a beam group having an intermediate measurement value. The identification of the first beam set may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the first beam group is a dominant indication, the identifier of the first beam group is an index of the first beam group. The identity of the second beam set can be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the group number of the beam group.
在再一个可能的实施例中,对大于预设门限值的波束组的测量结果进行上报。其中,该预设门限值通过无线资源控制RRC信令或媒体访问控制信令从基站发送至UE;或者,将预设门限值通过预先配置的方式配置在UE处。波束组的标识为显性指示。作为一种实施例,所述测量结果根据预设排列方式进行排列上报。预设排列方式可以是上述各方式中的任何依次排列的顺序。In still another possible embodiment, the measurement result of the beam group greater than the preset threshold is reported. The preset threshold is sent from the base station to the UE by using radio resource control RRC signaling or media access control signaling; or the preset threshold is configured in the UE in a pre-configured manner. The identification of the beam group is a dominant indication. As an embodiment, the measurement results are arranged and reported according to a preset arrangement manner. The preset arrangement may be any order in which each of the above modes is sequentially arranged.
例如:当测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量大于预设门限值时,测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照预设的排列方式进行排列;或者,当测量结果大于预设门限值时,测量结果按照预设的排列方式进行排列。For example, when the offset of the measurement result relative to the reference measurement result is greater than the preset threshold value, the offset of the measurement result relative to the reference measurement result is arranged according to a preset arrangement manner; or, when the measurement result is greater than the preset At the threshold value, the measurement results are arranged in a preset arrangement.
上述方法中,预设门限值和预设排列方式中的至少一种通过无线资源控制RRC信令和媒体访问控制信令中的至少一种信令从基站发送至UE;或者,将预设门限值和预设排列方式中的至少一种通过预先配置的方式配置在UE处。In the above method, at least one of the preset threshold value and the preset arrangement manner is sent from the base station to the UE by using at least one of radio resource control RRC signaling and media access control signaling; or, preset At least one of the threshold value and the preset arrangement is configured at the UE in a pre-configured manner.
此外,UE以第一格式发送的UCI还包括:用于测量的参考信号或作为所述波束组的测量结果上报依据的参考信号中的至少一个。其中,参考信号包括:同步信号、同步信号资源标识、信道状态指示参考信号CSI-RS和CSI-RS资源标识中的至少一种。In addition, the UCI transmitted by the UE in the first format further includes: at least one of a reference signal used for measurement or a reference signal used as a basis for reporting the measurement result of the beam group. The reference signal includes at least one of a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier, a channel state indication reference signal CSI-RS, and a CSI-RS resource identifier.
基站可以根据上述UE发送的UCI对波束组进行处理。The base station can process the beam group according to the UCI sent by the UE.
需要说明的是,在上述三种可能的情况中,当第一波束组中包括多个波束组时,UE可以利用平均值算法根据多个波束组,确定多个中的一个波束组作为参考。It should be noted that, in the foregoing three possible cases, when multiple beam groups are included in the first beam group, the UE may determine one of the plurality of beam groups as a reference according to the multiple beam groups by using an average value algorithm.
上述所有的预设的,预配置的或预通知的,可以为通过RRC信令,或MAC信令从网络设备通知给UE,或者预先在UE处写好。All of the foregoing preset, pre-configured or pre-notified may be notified to the UE from the network device through RRC signaling, or MAC signaling, or written in advance at the UE.
上述所述的任何标识,或号都可,或索引都等同,可以互相替换。Any of the above-mentioned identifiers, or numbers, or indexes may be equivalent and may be replaced with each other.
图4为本发明实施例提供的基于波束的一种数据传输方法的流程示意图。图4为本发明实施例提供的基于波束的一种数据传输方法的流程示意图。图4以UE根据至少一个波束中的第一波束和第一波束的测量结果中的至少一个作为参考上报上行控制信息UCI为例。如图4所示,该实施例包括步骤S410-S430,具体如下所示:FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a beam-based data transmission method according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a beam-based data transmission method according to an embodiment of the present invention. 4 is an example in which the UE reports the uplink control information UCI according to at least one of the first beam and the first beam in the at least one beam. As shown in FIG. 4, this embodiment includes steps S410-S430, as follows:
S410:UE获取指示信息。S410: The UE acquires indication information.
具体地,UE获取指示信息可以是从基站接收指示信息或者根据在UE处预先配置的信息进行获取。其中,指示信息可以包括下述内容中的任意一个或多个,需要说明的是,下述内容中,任意一个或多个可以从基站获取而剩余的被预先设置:Specifically, the UE acquisition indication information may be obtained by receiving indication information from the base station or according to information pre-configured at the UE. The indication information may include any one or more of the following contents. It should be noted that any one or more of the following may be acquired from the base station and the remaining ones are preset:
该指示信息,可以用于指示UE是否基于波束进行上报。The indication information may be used to indicate whether the UE performs reporting based on the beam.
该指示信息,还可以用于指示UE是否将含有相同特征的波束分成一组。其中,相同特征可以为相同的子载波间隔,相同的波形,或能分为一组的测量值,这些特征中的任意一种或多种。The indication information may also be used to indicate whether the UE groups the beams having the same feature into one group. Wherein, the same feature may be the same subcarrier spacing, the same waveform, or a set of measured values, any one or more of these features.
该指示信息,还可以用于指示UE是否使用第一波束作为参考或者使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考上报UCI,第一波束的测量结果即为参考测量结果。其中,确定使用第一波束作为参考的方法可以包括:第一波束可以为具有最大编号的波束,或者具有最小编号的波束,或具有中间编号的波束。第一波束也可以为具有最大测量值的波束,或者具有最小测量值的波束,或具有中间测量值的波束。确定使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考测量结果的方法可以包括:第一波束的测量结果可以为具有最大编号的波束的测量结果,或者具有最小编号的波束的测量结果,或具有中间编号的波束的测量结果。第一波束的测量结果可以为具有最大测量值的波束对应的波束的测量结果,或者具有最小测量值的波束对应的波束的测量结果,或具有中间测量值的波束对应的波束的测量结果。其中,测量值可以为测量结果所对应的值,或者,测量值基于映射关系可以得到对应的测量结果。确定中间测量值的方法包括:在多个波束的测量值中,根据所述多个测量值计算的平均值或根据最大测量值和所述最小测量值计算的平均值,确定中间测量值;或者,选取在多个波束的测量值中居中分布的值为中间测量结果值。The indication information may also be used to indicate whether the UE uses the first beam as a reference or uses the measurement result of the first beam as a reference to report the UCI, and the measurement result of the first beam is a reference measurement result. The method for determining to use the first beam as a reference may include: the first beam may be a beam with the largest number, or a beam with the smallest number, or a beam with an intermediate number. The first beam can also be the beam with the largest measurement, or the beam with the smallest measurement, or a beam with intermediate measurements. The method of determining the measurement result using the first beam as the reference measurement result may include: the measurement result of the first beam may be the measurement result of the beam with the largest number, or the measurement result of the beam with the smallest number, or the beam with the middle number Measurement results. The measurement result of the first beam may be the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam having the largest measurement value, or the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam having the smallest measurement value, or the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam having the intermediate measurement value. The measured value may be a value corresponding to the measurement result, or the measured value may obtain a corresponding measurement result based on the mapping relationship. The method for determining an intermediate measurement value includes: determining an intermediate measurement value according to an average value calculated by the plurality of measurement values or an average value calculated according to the maximum measurement value and the minimum measurement value, among the measurement values of the plurality of beams; or The value of the centered distribution among the measured values of the plurality of beams is selected as the intermediate measurement result value.
该指示信息,还可以用于指示UE以第一格式发送的UCI中包括:波束的标识是被显性指示或者隐性指示。The indication information may also be used to indicate that the UCI sent by the UE in the first format includes: the identifier of the beam is a dominant indication or an implicit indication.
当该指示信息用于指示UE使用第一波束作为参考时,指示信息还可以包括:确定第一波束的方法;When the indication information is used to indicate that the UE uses the first beam as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method of determining the first beam;
当该指示信息用于指示UE使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考时,指示信息还可以包括:确定第一波束的测量结果为参考测量结果的方法。When the indication information is used to indicate that the UE uses the measurement result of the first beam as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method of determining a measurement result of the first beam as a reference measurement result.
该指示信息还用于,指示UCI中是否包括波束的标识,或只包括波束的标识。The indication information is further used to indicate whether the identifier of the beam is included in the UCI, or only the identifier of the beam.
该指示信息还用于,指示波束的测量结果所对应的波束的标识被显性指示或者隐性指示。The indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the beam is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
该指示信息还用于,指示UE以第一格式发送的所述UCI中包括:波束的测量结果信息与混合自动重传请求HARQ复用或者HARQ复用格式。The indication information is further used to indicate that the UCI sent by the UE in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam and hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ multiplexing or HARQ multiplexing format.
该指示信息还用于,指示用于测量的参考信号或作为波束的测量结果上报依据的参考信号;其中,参考信号包括:同步信号、同步信号资源标识,信道状态指示参考信号CSI-RS或所述CSI-RS资源标识中的至少一种。The indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or a reference signal as a basis for reporting a measurement result of the beam; wherein the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier, a channel state indication reference signal CSI-RS or a At least one of the CSI-RS resource identifiers.
需要说明的是,该指示信息可以是通过无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)信令、媒体访问控制信令(media access control,MAC)信令或物理层信令中的至少一项来进行指示的。It should be noted that the indication information may be performed by using at least one of radio resource control (RRC) signaling, media access control (MAC) signaling, or physical layer signaling. Instructed.
S420:UE根据指示信息确定使用第一波束作为参考,或者使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考。S420: The UE determines, according to the indication information, that the first beam is used as a reference, or the measurement result of the first beam is used as a reference.
具体地,UE对各波束进行测量,划分为波束,对所划分的波束,确定波束标识以及对应的波束的测量结果。Specifically, the UE measures each beam, divides it into a beam, and determines a beam identifier and a measurement result of the corresponding beam for the divided beam.
在一个可能的实施例中,划分波束为UE根据指示信息将含有相同特征的波束分成一组,将剩余不包含相同特征的波束分成一组。其中,在不包含相同特征的波束中有一种情况可以是只有一个波束的波束,那么该波束仅包括一个波束。当将含有相同特征的波束分成一组时,可以是根据各波束是否具有相同的子载波间隔进行波束分组,具有相同子载波间隔的波束被划分为一个波束;或者,根据是否具有相同的波形进行波束分组,具有相同波形的波束被划分为一个波束;或者,根据是否具有相近的测量值进行波束分组,具有相近的测量值的波束被划分为一个波束。In a possible embodiment, the splitting beam is that the UE divides the beams containing the same feature into one group according to the indication information, and divides the remaining beams that do not include the same feature into one group. Wherein, in a beam that does not include the same feature, one of the cases may be a beam with only one beam, then the beam includes only one beam. When groups of beams having the same feature are grouped, beam grouping may be performed according to whether each beam has the same subcarrier spacing, and beams having the same subcarrier spacing are divided into one beam; or, according to whether or not the same waveform is present Beams are grouped, beams with the same waveform are divided into one beam; or beams are grouped according to whether they have similar measured values, and beams with similar measured values are divided into one beam.
确定对应的波束的测量结果为根据各个波束的测量值,推导波束的测量值,通过测量值与测量结果之间的映射关系或者对应关系,获取到波束的测量结果。根据各个波束的测量值推导波束的测量值,为根据线性或非线性函数进行推导。The measurement result of the corresponding beam is determined according to the measured value of each beam, and the measured value of the beam is derived, and the measurement result of the beam is obtained by the mapping relationship or the corresponding relationship between the measured value and the measured result. The measured values of the beams are derived from the measured values of the individual beams and are derived from linear or non-linear functions.
UE确定第一波束的方式可以包括:UE确定具有最大编号的波束为第一波束;或者,UE确定具有最小编号的波束为第一波束;或者,UE确定具有中间编号的波束为第一波束。The manner in which the UE determines the first beam may include: the UE determines that the beam with the largest number is the first beam; or the UE determines that the beam with the smallest number is the first beam; or the UE determines that the beam with the intermediate number is the first beam.
在另一个可能的实施例中,当指示信息指示使用第一波束作为参考时,以及确定第一波束的方法为选取具有最大编号的波束为第一波束时,UE根据指示信息确定具有最大编号的波束为第一波束;In another possible embodiment, when the indication information indicates that the first beam is used as the reference, and the method of determining the first beam is to select the beam with the largest number as the first beam, the UE determines, according to the indication information, that has the largest number. The beam is the first beam;
在又一个可能的实施例中,当指示信息指示使用第一波束作为参考时,以及确定第一波束的方法为选取具有最小编号的波束为第一波束时,UE根据指示信息确定具有最小编号的波束为第一波束;In still another possible embodiment, when the indication information indicates that the first beam is used as the reference, and the method of determining the first beam is to select the beam with the smallest number as the first beam, the UE determines, according to the indication information, that the device has the smallest number. The beam is the first beam;
在再一个可能的实施例中,当指示信息指示使用第一波束作为参考时,以及确定第一波束的方法为选取具有中间编号的波束为第一波束时,UE根据指示信息确定具有中间编 号的波束为第一波束。In still another possible embodiment, when the indication information indicates that the first beam is used as the reference, and the method of determining the first beam is to select the beam with the intermediate number as the first beam, the UE determines, according to the indication information, that the intermediate number is used. The beam is the first beam.
UE确定第一波束的方式还可以包括:UE确定具有最大测量值的波束为第一波束;或者,UE确定具有最小测量值的波束为第一波束;或者,UE确定具有中间测量值的波束为第一波束。The manner in which the UE determines the first beam may further include: the UE determines that the beam having the largest measurement value is the first beam; or the UE determines that the beam with the smallest measurement value is the first beam; or the UE determines that the beam with the intermediate measurement value is The first beam.
在再一个可能的实施例中,当指示信息指示使用第一波束作为参考时,以及确定第一波束的方法为选取具有最大测量值的波束为第一波束时,UE根据指示信息确定具有最大测量值的波束为第一波束;In still another possible embodiment, when the indication information indicates that the first beam is used as the reference, and the method of determining the first beam is to select the beam with the largest measurement value as the first beam, the UE determines that the maximum measurement is performed according to the indication information. The beam of the value is the first beam;
在再一个可能的实施例中,当指示信息指示使用第一波束作为参考时,以及确定第一波束的方法为选取具有最小测量值的波束为第一波束时,UE根据指示信息确定具有最小测量值的波束为第一波束;In still another possible embodiment, when the indication information indicates that the first beam is used as the reference, and the method of determining the first beam is to select the beam with the smallest measurement value as the first beam, the UE determines that the minimum measurement is performed according to the indication information. The beam of the value is the first beam;
在再一个可能的实施例中,当指示信息指示使用第一波束作为参考时,以及确定第一波束的方法为选取具有中间测量值的波束为第一波束时,UE根据指示信息确定具有中间测量值的波束为第一波束。In still another possible embodiment, when the indication information indicates that the first beam is used as the reference, and the method of determining the first beam is to select the beam with the intermediate measurement value as the first beam, the UE determines that the intermediate measurement is performed according to the indication information. The beam of the value is the first beam.
UE确定参考测量结果的方式可以为多种,具体可以包括:The manner in which the UE determines the reference measurement result may be multiple, and specifically includes:
方式一:method one:
在多个波束的测量值中,Among the measured values of multiple beams,
选取具有最大测量值的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果;或者,The measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam having the largest measurement value is selected as a reference measurement result; or
选取具有最小测量值的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果;或者,Selecting a measurement result of a beam corresponding to the beam having the smallest measurement value as a reference measurement result; or
选取具有中间测量值的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果。The measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam having the intermediate measurement value is selected as the reference measurement result.
其中,确定中间测量值的方法包括:在多个波束的测量值中,根据多个测量值计算的平均值或根据最大测量值和最小测量值计算的平均值,确定中间测量值;或者,选取在多个波束的测量值中居中分布的值为中间测量结果值。The method for determining an intermediate measurement value includes: determining an intermediate measurement value according to an average value calculated by multiple measurement values or an average value calculated according to the maximum measurement value and the minimum measurement value among the measurement values of the multiple beams; or, selecting The value of the centered distribution among the measured values of the plurality of beams is the intermediate measurement result value.
需要说明的是,当确定第一波束时,在多个波束中除了第一波束之外的波束都成为第二波束,该第二波束可以包括多个波束中的至少一个波束。当确定用作参考测量结果的第一波束的测量结果时,在多个波束的测量结果中除了第一波束的测量结果之外的波束的测量结果都成为第二波束的测量结果。It should be noted that, when the first beam is determined, a beam other than the first beam among the plurality of beams becomes a second beam, and the second beam may include at least one of the plurality of beams. When the measurement result of the first beam used as the reference measurement result is determined, the measurement result of the beam other than the measurement result of the first beam among the measurement results of the plurality of beams becomes the measurement result of the second beam.
方式二:Method 2:
在多个波束的编号中,In the numbering of multiple beams,
选取具有最大编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果;或者,The measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the largest number is selected as the reference measurement result; or
选取具有最小编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果;或者,The measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the smallest number is selected as the reference measurement result; or
选取具有中间编号的波束对应的所述波束的测量结果为参考测量结果,其中,中间编 号的波束为多个波束的编号中居中分布的编号所对应的波束。The measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam having the intermediate number is selected as a reference measurement result, wherein the intermediate numbered beam is a beam corresponding to the number of the centrally distributed number among the plurality of beam numbers.
需要说明的是,UE可以对多个波束进行编号的命名,确定多个波束的编号;或者,基站也可以进行UE的波束划分并将编号下发。It should be noted that the UE may number the multiple beams to determine the number of the multiple beams. Alternatively, the base station may perform beam splitting of the UE and issue the number.
在一个可能的实施例中,当指示信息指示使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考测量结果时,以及确定参考测量结果的方法为选取具有最大测量值的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果时,UE根据指示信息确定具有最大测量值的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果;In a possible embodiment, when the indication information indicates that the measurement result of using the first beam is used as the reference measurement result, and the method for determining the reference measurement result is to select the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the largest measurement value as the reference measurement result. The UE determines, according to the indication information, that the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the largest measurement value is a reference measurement result;
在又一个可能的实施例中,当指示信息指示使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考测量结果时,以及确定参考测量结果的方法为选取具有最小测量值的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果时,UE根据指示信息确定具有最小测量值的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果;In still another possible embodiment, when the indication information indicates that the measurement result of using the first beam is used as the reference measurement result, and the method for determining the reference measurement result is the measurement result of selecting the beam corresponding to the beam with the smallest measurement value as the reference measurement As a result, the UE determines, according to the indication information, a measurement result of a beam corresponding to the beam having the smallest measurement value as a reference measurement result;
在另一个可能的实施例中,当指示信息指示使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考测量结果时,以及确定参考测量结果的方法为选取具有中间测量值的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果时,UE根据指示信息确定具有中间测量值的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果;In another possible embodiment, when the indication information indicates that the measurement result of using the first beam is used as the reference measurement result, and the method for determining the reference measurement result is to select the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the intermediate measurement value as the reference measurement. As a result, the UE determines, according to the indication information, a measurement result of a beam corresponding to the beam having the intermediate measurement value as a reference measurement result;
在再一个可能的实施例中,当指示信息指示使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考测量结果时,以及确定参考测量结果的方法为选取具有最大编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果时,UE根据指示信息确定具有最大编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果;In still another possible embodiment, when the indication information indicates that the measurement result of using the first beam is used as the reference measurement result, and the method for determining the reference measurement result is to select the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the largest number as the reference measurement result. The UE determines, according to the indication information, that the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the largest number is the reference measurement result;
在再一个可能的实施例中,当指示信息指示使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考测量结果时,以及确定参考测量结果的方法为选取具有最小编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果时,UE根据指示信息确定具有最小编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果;In still another possible embodiment, when the indication information indicates that the measurement result of using the first beam is used as the reference measurement result, and the method for determining the reference measurement result is to select the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the smallest number as the reference measurement result. The UE determines, according to the indication information, that the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the smallest number is the reference measurement result;
在再一个可能的实施例中,当指示信息指示使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考测量结果时,以及确定参考测量结果的方法为选取具有中间编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果时,UE根据指示信息确定具有中间编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果。In still another possible embodiment, when the indication information indicates that the measurement result of using the first beam is used as the reference measurement result, and the method for determining the reference measurement result is to select the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the intermediate number as the reference measurement result. The UE determines, according to the indication information, that the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the intermediate number is the reference measurement result.
S430:UE根据上行控制信息UCI具有的第一格式发送所述UCI至基站。S430: The UE sends the UCI to the base station according to the first format that the uplink control information UCI has.
其中,UE以第一格式发送的UCI中包括:波束的测量结果信息和波束的信息中的至少一个。波束包括:第一波束和第二波束,波束的测量结果信息包括:第一波束的测量结果和第二波束的测量结果相对于第一波束的测量结果的偏移量。第一波束的测量结果为参考测量结果,波束的信息用于指示,第一波束的测量结果与第二波束的测量结果中的至少一个所对应的波束,该波束为一个或多个波束。The UCI sent by the UE in the first format includes at least one of measurement result information of the beam and information of the beam. The beam includes: a first beam and a second beam, and the measurement result information of the beam includes: a measurement result of the first beam and an offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the measurement result of the first beam. The measurement result of the first beam is a reference measurement result, and the information of the beam is used to indicate a beam corresponding to at least one of the measurement result of the first beam and the measurement result of the second beam, the beam being one or more beams.
在一种可能的实施例中,以第一格式发送的UCI包括:波束的信息。具体地,以第一 格式发送的UCI还包括:第一波束标识和第二波束标识,其中以第一波束标识为参考。In a possible embodiment, the UCI transmitted in the first format includes: information of the beam. Specifically, the UCI transmitted in the first format further includes: a first beam identifier and a second beam identifier, wherein the first beam identifier is used as a reference.
作为一个实施例,该UCI包含:第一波束标识本身以及第二波束标识,其中第二波束标识为第二波束的标识本身或者相对于第一波束的标识的偏移量。其中,第二波束可以为一个或者多个。As an embodiment, the UCI includes: a first beam identifier itself and a second beam identifier, wherein the second beam identifier is an identifier of the second beam itself or an offset relative to the identifier of the first beam. The second beam may be one or more.
作为一个实施例,该UCI包含:第一波束的测量结果与第二波束的测量结果所对应的各自的波束的标识,其中以第一波束标识为参考。As an embodiment, the UCI includes: an identifier of a respective beam corresponding to a measurement result of the first beam and a measurement result of the second beam, wherein the first beam identifier is used as a reference.
在另一种可能的实施例中,以第一格式发送的UCI包括:波束的测量结果信息。具体地,根据波束的测量结果所属的波束的标识确定上报UCI的方式可以包括:In another possible embodiment, the UCI transmitted in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam. Specifically, the manner of determining the reported UCI according to the identifier of the beam to which the measurement result of the beam belongs may include:
方式一:第一波束的测量结果,第一波束的标识,第二波束的测量结果以及第二波束的标识。其中,第一波束的标识为显性指示,第二波束的标识显性指示。Manner 1: The measurement result of the first beam, the identifier of the first beam, the measurement result of the second beam, and the identifier of the second beam. The identifier of the first beam is a dominant indication, and the identifier of the second beam is a dominant indication.
方式二:第一波束的测量结果,第一波束的标识,第二波束的测量结果以及第二波束的标识。其中,第一波束的标识为隐性指示,第二波束的标识显性指示。Manner 2: The measurement result of the first beam, the identifier of the first beam, the measurement result of the second beam, and the identifier of the second beam. The identifier of the first beam is an implicit indication, and the identifier of the second beam is an explicit indication.
方式三:第一波束的测量结果,第一波束的标识,第二波束的测量结果。其中,第一波束的标识显性指示,第二波束的标识隐性指示。Manner 3: The measurement result of the first beam, the identification of the first beam, and the measurement result of the second beam. The identifier of the first beam is explicitly indicated, and the identifier of the second beam is implicitly indicated.
方式四:第一波束的测量结果,第二波束的测量结果。其中,第一波束的标识隐性指示,第二波束的标识隐性指示。Mode 4: the measurement result of the first beam and the measurement result of the second beam. The identifier of the first beam is implicitly indicated, and the identifier of the second beam is implicitly indicated.
上述所述的隐性指示表示不需要指示,通过预定义或默认的方式可以进行波束的测量结果与波束之间的对应关系的解析。The implicit indication described above indicates that no indication is needed, and the correspondence between the measurement result of the beam and the beam can be analyzed in a predefined or default manner.
上述方式一到方式四中:In the above way one to four:
在一个可能的实施例中,当第二波束的标识为显性指示时,第二波束的标识为第二波束的标识本身;或者,第二波束的标识为相对于第一波束的标识的偏移量。In a possible embodiment, when the identifier of the second beam is a dominant indication, the identifier of the second beam is the identifier of the second beam; or the identifier of the second beam is the offset of the identifier of the first beam. Transfer amount.
例如:当第二波束的标识为显性指示时,第一波束的标识为“5”,第二波束的标识可以为“6”也可以为“1”。For example, when the identifier of the second beam is a dominant indication, the identifier of the first beam is “5”, and the identifier of the second beam may be “6” or “1”.
在该情况下,该第一波束的标识对应该第一波束对应的参考测量结果,即第一波束的标识为“5”,其对应的参考测量结果上对应的标识也为“5”,此时,第二波束的标识可以为“6”,其对应的测量结果上对应的标识也可以为“6”;或者,第二波束的标识为“1”,即第二波束的标识为相对于第一波束的标识的偏移量,其对应的测量结果上对应的标识也对应的为“1”。In this case, the identifier of the first beam corresponds to the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam, that is, the identifier of the first beam is “5”, and the corresponding identifier on the corresponding reference measurement result is also “5”. The identifier of the second beam may be “6”, and the identifier corresponding to the measurement result may also be “6”; or the identifier of the second beam is “1”, that is, the identifier of the second beam is relative to The offset of the identifier of the first beam, corresponding to the corresponding measurement result, is also corresponding to "1".
在又一个可能的实施例中,当第二波束的标识为隐性指示时,波束按照波束的编号递增或递减的顺序依次排列。需要说明的是,UE可以对多个波束进行编号的命名,确定多个波束的编号;或者,基站也可以将编号下发。例如:当编号为1,2,3…M时,对于组1,组2,组3…组M依次排列放在一个格式中进行上报;当编号为x,x+1…N时,对于组x,组x+1…组N依次排列放在一个格式中进行上报;或者,当编号为M,M-1,…1时,对于组 M,组M-1…组1依次排列放在一个格式中进行上报;当编号为N,N-1…x时,对于组N,组N-1…组x依次排列放在一个格式中进行上报。In still another possible embodiment, when the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the beams are sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the number of the beams. It should be noted that the numbering of multiple beams may be performed by the UE to determine the number of multiple beams. Alternatively, the base station may also issue the number. For example, when the number is 1, 2, 3...M, for group 1, group 2, group 3... group M is arranged in a format for reporting; when the number is x, x+1...N, for group x, group x+1...group N are arranged in a format for reporting; or, when numbered M, M-1,...1, for group M, group M-1...group 1 is placed one after another The report is reported in the format; when the number is N, N-1...x, for the group N, the group N-1...the group x is sequentially arranged in a format for reporting.
在另一个可能的实施例中,当第二波束的标识为隐性指示时,波束按照波束的编号奇数升序或偶数升序的顺序依次排列。In another possible embodiment, when the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the beams are sequentially arranged in the order of the odd-numbered or even-order ascending order of the beam.
例如:当编号为1,2,3…M时,对于组1,组3,组5…组M(即如果M是奇数,则最后一个是组M;如果M是偶数,则最后一个是M-1)依次排列放在一个格式中进行上报,依次类推;或者,当编号为1,2,3…M时,对于组2,组4,组6…组M(即如果M是偶数,则最后一个是组M;如果M是奇数,则最后一个是M-1)依次排列放在一个格式中进行上报,依次类推。For example: when the numbers are 1, 2, 3...M, for group 1, group 3, group 5... group M (ie if M is odd, the last one is group M; if M is even, the last one is M -1) sorted in a format for reporting, and so on; or, when numbered 1, 2, 3...M, for group 2, group 4, group 6...group M (ie, if M is even, then The last one is group M; if M is odd, the last one is M-1) is arranged in a format for reporting, and so on.
在再一个可能的实施例中,当第二波束的标识为隐性指示时,波束按照波束的编号奇数降序或偶数降序的顺序依次排列。In still another possible embodiment, when the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the beams are sequentially arranged in the order of the odd-numbered descending order or the even-numbered descending order of the beam.
在再一个可能的实施例中,当第二波束的标识为隐性指示时,波束根据预设排列方式进行排列,即某个预设的序列设计对应的顺序。其中,预设排列方式是通过无线资源控制RRC信令或媒体访问控制信令从基站发送至UE;或者,将预设排列方式通过预先配置的方式配置在UE处。In still another possible embodiment, when the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the beams are arranged according to a preset arrangement, that is, a sequence corresponding to a preset sequence design. The preset arrangement is sent from the base station to the UE by using the radio resource control RRC signaling or the medium access control signaling; or the preset arrangement is configured at the UE in a pre-configured manner.
例如:当编号为1,2,3…M时,对于组1,组3,组5…组M,某个预设的序列设计可以是按照某种跳频序列进行的无序的设计。For example, when the numbers are 1, 2, 3...M, for group 1, group 3, group 5, group M, a predetermined sequence design may be an unordered design according to a certain frequency hopping sequence.
另外,以第一格式发送的UCI包括:波束的测量结果信息和波束的信息。具体地,根据波束的测量结果确定上报UCI的方式可以包括:In addition, the UCI transmitted in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam and information of the beam. Specifically, determining, according to the measurement result of the beam, the manner of reporting the UCI may include:
第一波束的测量结果,第一波束的标识,第二波束的测量结果以及第二波束的标识。其中,第一波束的测量结果为参考测量结果;第一波束的信息可以为显性或隐性指示;第二波束的信息也可以为显性或隐性指示。The measurement result of the first beam, the identification of the first beam, the measurement result of the second beam, and the identification of the second beam. The measurement result of the first beam is a reference measurement result; the information of the first beam may be a dominant or implicit indication; and the information of the second beam may also be a dominant or implicit indication.
在一个可能的实施例中,参考测量结果为最大编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果。第一波束的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第一波束的标识为显性指示时,第一波束的标识为第一波束的索引。第二波束的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第二波束的标识为隐性指示时,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号递减或递增的顺序依次排列。In a possible embodiment, the reference measurement result is the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the largest numbered beam. The identification of the first beam may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the first beam is a dominant indication, the identifier of the first beam is an index of the first beam. The identification of the second beam may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in descending or increasing order of the number of the beam.
在又一个可能的实施例中,参考测量结果为最小编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果。第一波束的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第一波束的标识为显性指示时,第一波束的标识为第一波束的索引。第二波束的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第二波束的标识为隐性指示时,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号递增或递减的顺序依次排列。In yet another possible embodiment, the measurement result is the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam of the smallest number. The identification of the first beam may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the first beam is a dominant indication, the identifier of the first beam is an index of the first beam. The identification of the second beam may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the number of the beam.
在另一个可能的实施例中,参考测量结果为中间编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果。第一波束的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第一波束的标识为显性指示时,第一波束的标 识为第一波束的索引。第二波束的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第二波束的标识为隐性指示时,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号从最小编号开始递增,或从最大编号递减,或从中间编号递增到最大编号并从中间编号递减到最小编号,或从中间编号递减到最小编号并从中间编号递增到最大编号的顺序依次排列。In another possible embodiment, the reference measurement result is a measurement result of a beam corresponding to the intermediate numbered beam. The identification of the first beam may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identity of the first beam is a dominant indication, the identification of the first beam is an index of the first beam. The identification of the second beam may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam relative to the reference measurement is increased from the smallest number according to the number of the beam, or is decreased from the maximum number, or is incremented from the middle number to the maximum. The number is decremented from the middle number to the smallest number, or from the middle number to the lowest number and in order from the middle number to the largest number.
在再一个可能的实施例中,参考测量结果为具有最大测量值的波束对应的波束的测量结果。第一波束的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第一波束的标识为显性指示时,第一波束的标识为第一波束的索引。第二波束的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第二波束的标识为隐性指示时,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号递减或递增的顺序依次排列。In still another possible embodiment, the reference measurement result is a measurement result of a beam corresponding to the beam having the largest measurement value. The identification of the first beam may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the first beam is a dominant indication, the identifier of the first beam is an index of the first beam. The identification of the second beam may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in descending or increasing order of the number of the beam.
在再一个可能的实施例中,参考测量结果为具有最小测量值的波束对应的波束的测量结果。第一波束的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第一波束的标识为显性指示时,第一波束的标识为第一波束的索引。第二波束的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第二波束的标识可以为隐性指示时,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号递增或递减的顺序依次排列。In still another possible embodiment, the reference measurement result is a measurement result of a beam corresponding to a beam having the smallest measurement value. The identification of the first beam may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the first beam is a dominant indication, the identifier of the first beam is an index of the first beam. The identification of the second beam may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the second beam may be an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the number of the beam.
在再一个可能的实施例中,参考测量结果为具有中间测量值的波束对应的波束的测量结果。第一波束的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第一波束的标识为显性指示时,第一波束的标识为第一波束的索引。第二波束的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第二波束的标识为隐性指示时,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号递增或递减的顺序依次排列。In still another possible embodiment, the reference measurement result is a measurement result of a beam corresponding to a beam having an intermediate measurement value. The identification of the first beam may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the first beam is a dominant indication, the identifier of the first beam is an index of the first beam. The identification of the second beam may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the number of the beam.
在再一个可能的实施例中,对大于预设门限值的波束的测量结果进行上报。其中,该预设门限值通过无线资源控制RRC信令或媒体访问控制信令从基站发送至UE;或者,将预设门限值通过预先配置的方式配置在UE处。波束的标识为显性指示。作为一种实施例,所述测量结果根据预设排列方式进行排列上报。所述预设排列方式可以是上述各方式中的任何依次排列的顺序。In still another possible embodiment, the measurement result of the beam larger than the preset threshold is reported. The preset threshold is sent from the base station to the UE by using radio resource control RRC signaling or media access control signaling; or the preset threshold is configured in the UE in a pre-configured manner. The identification of the beam is a dominant indication. As an embodiment, the measurement results are arranged and reported according to a preset arrangement manner. The preset arrangement may be any order in which each of the above modes is sequentially arranged.
例如:当测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量大于预设门限值时,测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照预设的排列方式进行排列;或者,当测量结果大于预设门限值时,测量结果按照预设的排列方式进行排列。For example, when the offset of the measurement result relative to the reference measurement result is greater than the preset threshold value, the offset of the measurement result relative to the reference measurement result is arranged according to a preset arrangement manner; or, when the measurement result is greater than the preset At the threshold value, the measurement results are arranged in a preset arrangement.
上述方法中,预设门限值和预设排列方式中的至少一种通过无线资源控制RRC信令和媒体访问控制信令中的至少一种信令从基站发送至UE;或者,将预设门限值和预设排列方式中的至少一种通过预先配置的方式配置在UE处。In the above method, at least one of the preset threshold value and the preset arrangement manner is sent from the base station to the UE by using at least one of radio resource control RRC signaling and media access control signaling; or, preset At least one of the threshold value and the preset arrangement is configured at the UE in a pre-configured manner.
此外,UE以第一格式发送的UCI还包括:用于测量的参考信号或作为所述波束的测量结果上报依据的参考信号中的至少一个。其中,参考信号包括:同步信号、同步信号资源标识、信道状态指示参考信号CSI-RS和CSI-RS资源标识中的至少一种。UE也可以不上报参考信号,根据所述指示信息中指定的参考信号进行测量。Furthermore, the UCI transmitted by the UE in the first format further includes at least one of a reference signal for measurement or a reference signal for reporting the measurement result of the beam. The reference signal includes at least one of a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier, a channel state indication reference signal CSI-RS, and a CSI-RS resource identifier. The UE may also report the reference signal according to the reference signal specified in the indication information without reporting the reference signal.
基站可以根据上述UE发送的UCI对波束进行处理。The base station can process the beam according to the UCI sent by the UE.
需要说明的是,在上述三种可能的情况中,当第一波束中包括多个波束时,UE可以利用平均值算法根据多个波束,确定多个中的一个波束作为参考。It should be noted that, in the foregoing three possible cases, when multiple beams are included in the first beam, the UE may determine one of the multiple beams as a reference according to the multiple beams by using an average value algorithm.
上述所有的预设的,预配置的或预通知的,可以为通过RRC信令,或MAC信令从网络设备通知给UE,或者预先在UE处写好。All of the foregoing preset, pre-configured or pre-notified may be notified to the UE from the network device through RRC signaling, or MAC signaling, or written in advance at the UE.
上述所述的任何标识,或号都可,或索引都等同,可以互相替换。Any of the above-mentioned identifiers, or numbers, or indexes may be equivalent and may be replaced with each other.
图5为本发明事实施例提供的基于波束的另一种数据传输方法的流程示意图。如图5所示,该实施例包括:步骤S510-S520,具体如下包括:FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart diagram of another beam-based data transmission method according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 5, the embodiment includes: Steps S510-S520, specifically as follows:
S510:UE确定使用第一波束作为参考,或者使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考。S510: The UE determines to use the first beam as a reference, or uses the measurement result of the first beam as a reference.
具体地,UE对各波束进行测量,划分为波束,对所划分的波束,确定波束标识以及对应的波束的测量结果。Specifically, the UE measures each beam, divides it into a beam, and determines a beam identifier and a measurement result of the corresponding beam for the divided beam.
在一个可能的实施例中,划分波束为UE将含有相同特征的波束分成一组,将剩余不包含相同特征的波束分成一组。其中,在不包含相同特征的波束中有一种情况可以是只有一个波束的波束,那么该波束仅包括一个波束。当将含有相同特征的波束分成一组时,可以是根据各波束是否具有相同的子载波间隔进行波束分组,具有相同子载波间隔的波束被划分为一个波束;或者,根据是否具有相同的波形进行波束分组,具有相同波形的波束被划分为一个波束;或者,根据是否具有相近的测量值进行波束分组,具有相近的测量值的波束被划分为一个波束。In one possible embodiment, the split beam is a group of beams that have the same characteristics for the UE, and the remaining beams that do not contain the same feature are grouped. Wherein, in a beam that does not include the same feature, one of the cases may be a beam with only one beam, then the beam includes only one beam. When groups of beams having the same feature are grouped, beam grouping may be performed according to whether each beam has the same subcarrier spacing, and beams having the same subcarrier spacing are divided into one beam; or, according to whether or not the same waveform is present Beams are grouped, beams with the same waveform are divided into one beam; or beams are grouped according to whether they have similar measured values, and beams with similar measured values are divided into one beam.
确定对应的波束的测量结果为根据各个波束的测量值,推导波束的测量值,通过测量值与测量结果之间的映射关系或者对应关系,获取到波束的测量结果。根据各个波束的测量值推导波束的测量值,为根据线性或非线性函数进行推导。The measurement result of the corresponding beam is determined according to the measured value of each beam, and the measured value of the beam is derived, and the measurement result of the beam is obtained by the mapping relationship or the corresponding relationship between the measured value and the measured result. The measured values of the beams are derived from the measured values of the individual beams and are derived from linear or non-linear functions.
UE确定第一波束的方式可以包括:UE确定具有最大编号的波束为第一波束;或者,UE确定具有最小编号的波束为第一波束;或者,UE确定具有中间编号的波束为第一波束。The manner in which the UE determines the first beam may include: the UE determines that the beam with the largest number is the first beam; or the UE determines that the beam with the smallest number is the first beam; or the UE determines that the beam with the intermediate number is the first beam.
在另一个可能的实施例中,当使用第一波束作为参考时,以及确定第一波束的方法为选取具有最大编号的波束为第一波束时,UE确定具有最大编号的波束为第一波束;In another possible embodiment, when the first beam is used as a reference, and the method for determining the first beam is to select the beam with the largest number as the first beam, the UE determines that the beam with the largest number is the first beam;
在又一个可能的实施例中,当使用第一波束作为参考时,以及确定第一波束的方法为选取具有最小编号的波束为第一波束时,UE确定具有最小编号的波束为第一波束;In still another possible embodiment, when the first beam is used as a reference, and the method of determining the first beam is to select the beam with the smallest number as the first beam, the UE determines that the beam with the smallest number is the first beam;
在再一个可能的实施例中,当使用第一波束作为参考时,以及确定第一波束的方法为选取具有中间编号的波束为第一波束时,UE确定具有中间编号的波束为第一波束。In still another possible embodiment, when the first beam is used as a reference, and the method of determining the first beam is to select the beam having the intermediate number as the first beam, the UE determines that the beam with the intermediate number is the first beam.
UE确定第一波束的方式还可以包括:UE确定具有最大测量值的波束为第一波束;或者,UE确定具有最小测量值的波束为第一波束;或者,UE确定具有中间测量值的波束为第一波束。The manner in which the UE determines the first beam may further include: the UE determines that the beam having the largest measurement value is the first beam; or the UE determines that the beam with the smallest measurement value is the first beam; or the UE determines that the beam with the intermediate measurement value is The first beam.
在再一个可能的实施例中,当使用第一波束作为参考时,以及确定第一波束的方法为选取具有最大测量值的波束为第一波束时,UE确定具有最大测量值的波束为第一波束;In still another possible embodiment, when the first beam is used as a reference, and the method of determining the first beam is to select the beam with the largest measurement value as the first beam, the UE determines that the beam with the largest measurement value is the first. Beam
在再一个可能的实施例中,当使用第一波束作为参考时,以及确定第一波束的方法为选取具有最小测量值的波束为第一波束时,UE确定具有最小测量值的波束为第一波束;In still another possible embodiment, when the first beam is used as a reference, and the method of determining the first beam is to select the beam having the smallest measurement value as the first beam, the UE determines that the beam with the smallest measurement value is the first. Beam
在再一个可能的实施例中,当使用第一波束作为参考时,以及确定第一波束的方法为选取具有中间测量值的波束为第一波束时,UE确定具有中间测量值的波束为第一波束。In still another possible embodiment, when the first beam is used as a reference, and the method of determining the first beam is to select a beam having an intermediate measurement value as the first beam, the UE determines that the beam with the intermediate measurement value is the first Beam.
UE确定参考测量结果的方式可以为多种,具体可以包括:The manner in which the UE determines the reference measurement result may be multiple, and specifically includes:
方式一:method one:
在多个波束的测量值中,Among the measured values of multiple beams,
选取具有最大测量值的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果;或者,The measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam having the largest measurement value is selected as a reference measurement result; or
选取具有最小测量值的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果;或者,Selecting a measurement result of a beam corresponding to the beam having the smallest measurement value as a reference measurement result; or
选取具有中间测量值的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果。The measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam having the intermediate measurement value is selected as the reference measurement result.
其中,确定中间测量值的方法包括:在多个波束的测量值中,根据多个测量值计算的平均值或根据最大测量值和最小测量值计算的平均值,确定中间测量值;或者,选取在多个波束的测量值中居中分布的值为中间测量结果值。The method for determining an intermediate measurement value includes: determining an intermediate measurement value according to an average value calculated by multiple measurement values or an average value calculated according to the maximum measurement value and the minimum measurement value among the measurement values of the multiple beams; or, selecting The value of the centered distribution among the measured values of the plurality of beams is the intermediate measurement result value.
需要说明的是,当确定第一波束时,在多个波束中除了第一波束之外的波束都成为第二波束,该第二波束可以包括多个波束中的至少一个波束。当确定用作参考测量结果的第一波束的测量结果时,在多个波束的测量结果中除了第一波束的测量结果之外的波束的测量结果都成为第二波束的测量结果。It should be noted that, when the first beam is determined, a beam other than the first beam among the plurality of beams becomes a second beam, and the second beam may include at least one of the plurality of beams. When the measurement result of the first beam used as the reference measurement result is determined, the measurement result of the beam other than the measurement result of the first beam among the measurement results of the plurality of beams becomes the measurement result of the second beam.
方式二:Method 2:
在多个波束的编号中,In the numbering of multiple beams,
选取具有最大编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果;或者,The measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the largest number is selected as the reference measurement result; or
选取具有最小编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果;或者,The measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the smallest number is selected as the reference measurement result; or
选取具有中间编号的波束对应的所述波束的测量结果为参考测量结果,其中,中间编号的波束为多个波束的编号中居中分布的编号所对应的波束。The measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam having the middle number is selected as a reference measurement result, wherein the middle numbered beam is a beam corresponding to the number of the centrally distributed number among the numbers of the plurality of beams.
需要说明的是,UE可以对多个波束进行编号的命名,确定多个波束的编号;或者,基站也可以进行UE的波束划分并将编号下发。It should be noted that the UE may number the multiple beams to determine the number of the multiple beams. Alternatively, the base station may perform beam splitting of the UE and issue the number.
在一个可能的实施例中,当使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考测量结果时,以及确定参考测量结果的方法为选取具有最大测量值的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果时,UE确定具有最大测量值的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果;In a possible embodiment, when the measurement result of the first beam is used as the reference measurement result, and the method for determining the reference measurement result is to select the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam having the largest measurement value as the reference measurement result, the UE Determining a measurement result of a beam corresponding to a beam having the largest measurement value as a reference measurement result;
在又一个可能的实施例中,当使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考测量结果时,以及确定参考测量结果的方法为选取具有最小测量值的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果时,UE确定具有最小测量值的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果;In still another possible embodiment, when the measurement result of the first beam is used as the reference measurement result, and the method for determining the reference measurement result is to select the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam having the smallest measurement value as the reference measurement result, The UE determines that the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the smallest measurement value is a reference measurement result;
在另一个可能的实施例中,当使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考测量结果时,以及确定参考测量结果的方法为选取具有中间测量值的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果时,UE确定具有中间测量值的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果;In another possible embodiment, when the measurement result of the first beam is used as the reference measurement result, and the method for determining the reference measurement result is to select the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam having the intermediate measurement value as the reference measurement result, The UE determines that the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam having the intermediate measurement value is a reference measurement result;
在再一个可能的实施例中,当使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考测量结果时,以及确定参考测量结果的方法为选取具有最大编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果时,UE确定具有最大编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果;In still another possible embodiment, when the measurement result of the first beam is used as the reference measurement result, and the method for determining the reference measurement result is to select the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the largest number as the reference measurement result, the UE Determining the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the largest number as the reference measurement result;
在再一个可能的实施例中,当使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考测量结果时,以及确定参考测量结果的方法为选取具有最小编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果时,UE确定具有最小编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果;In still another possible embodiment, when the measurement result of the first beam is used as the reference measurement result, and the method for determining the reference measurement result is to select the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the smallest number as the reference measurement result, the UE Determining the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the smallest number as the reference measurement result;
在再一个可能的实施例中,当使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考测量结果时,以及确定参考测量结果的方法为选取具有中间编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果时,UE确定具有中间编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果。In still another possible embodiment, when the measurement result of the first beam is used as the reference measurement result, and the method for determining the reference measurement result is to select the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the intermediate number as the reference measurement result, the UE The measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the intermediate number is determined as the reference measurement result.
S520:UE根据上行控制信息UCI具有的第一格式发送所述UCI至基站。S520: The UE sends the UCI to the base station according to the first format that the uplink control information UCI has.
其中,UE以第一格式发送的UCI中包括:波束的测量结果信息和波束的信息中的至少一个。波束包括:第一波束和第二波束,波束的测量结果信息包括:第一波束的测量结果和第二波束的测量结果相对于第一波束的测量结果的偏移量。第一波束的测量结果为参考测量结果,波束的信息用于指示,第一波束的测量结果与第二波束的测量结果中的至少一个所对应的波束,该波束为一个或多个波束。The UCI sent by the UE in the first format includes at least one of measurement result information of the beam and information of the beam. The beam includes: a first beam and a second beam, and the measurement result information of the beam includes: a measurement result of the first beam and an offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the measurement result of the first beam. The measurement result of the first beam is a reference measurement result, and the information of the beam is used to indicate a beam corresponding to at least one of the measurement result of the first beam and the measurement result of the second beam, the beam being one or more beams.
在一种可能的实施例中,以第一格式发送的UCI包括:波束的信息。具体地,以第一格式发送的UCI还包括:第一波束标识和第二波束标识,其中以第一波束标识为参考。In a possible embodiment, the UCI transmitted in the first format includes: information of the beam. Specifically, the UCI sent in the first format further includes: a first beam identifier and a second beam identifier, wherein the first beam identifier is used as a reference.
作为一个实施例,该UCI包含:第一波束标识本身以及第二波束标识,其中第二波束标识为第二波束的标识本身或者相对于第一波束的标识的偏移量。其中,第二波束可以为一个或者多个。As an embodiment, the UCI includes: a first beam identifier itself and a second beam identifier, wherein the second beam identifier is an identifier of the second beam itself or an offset relative to the identifier of the first beam. The second beam may be one or more.
作为一个实施例,该UCI包含:第一波束的测量结果与第二波束的测量结果所对应的各自的波束的标识,其中以第一波束标识为参考。As an embodiment, the UCI includes: an identifier of a respective beam corresponding to a measurement result of the first beam and a measurement result of the second beam, wherein the first beam identifier is used as a reference.
在另一种可能的实施例中,以第一格式发送的UCI包括:波束的测量结果信息。具体地,根据波束的测量结果所属的波束的标识确定上报UCI的方式可以包括:In another possible embodiment, the UCI transmitted in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam. Specifically, the manner of determining the reported UCI according to the identifier of the beam to which the measurement result of the beam belongs may include:
方式一:第一波束的测量结果,第一波束的标识,第二波束的测量结果以及第二波束的标识。其中,第一波束的标识为显性指示,第二波束的标识显性指示。Manner 1: The measurement result of the first beam, the identifier of the first beam, the measurement result of the second beam, and the identifier of the second beam. The identifier of the first beam is a dominant indication, and the identifier of the second beam is a dominant indication.
方式二:第一波束的测量结果,第一波束的标识,第二波束的测量结果以及第二波束 的标识。其中,第一波束的标识为隐性指示,第二波束的标识显性指示。Manner 2: The measurement result of the first beam, the identifier of the first beam, the measurement result of the second beam, and the identifier of the second beam. The identifier of the first beam is an implicit indication, and the identifier of the second beam is an explicit indication.
方式三:第一波束的测量结果,第一波束的标识,第二波束的测量结果。其中,第一波束的标识显性指示,第二波束的标识隐性指示。Manner 3: The measurement result of the first beam, the identification of the first beam, and the measurement result of the second beam. The identifier of the first beam is explicitly indicated, and the identifier of the second beam is implicitly indicated.
方式四:第一波束的测量结果,第二波束的测量结果。其中,第一波束的标识隐性指示,第二波束的标识隐性指示。Mode 4: the measurement result of the first beam and the measurement result of the second beam. The identifier of the first beam is implicitly indicated, and the identifier of the second beam is implicitly indicated.
上述所述的隐性指示表示不需要指示,通过预定义或默认的方式可以进行波束的测量结果与波束之间的对应关系的解析。The implicit indication described above indicates that no indication is needed, and the correspondence between the measurement result of the beam and the beam can be analyzed in a predefined or default manner.
上述方式一到方式四中:In the above way one to four:
在一个可能的实施例中,当第二波束的标识为显性指示时,第二波束的标识为第二波束的标识本身;或者,第二波束的标识为相对于第一波束的标识的偏移量。In a possible embodiment, when the identifier of the second beam is a dominant indication, the identifier of the second beam is the identifier of the second beam; or the identifier of the second beam is the offset of the identifier of the first beam. Transfer amount.
例如:当第二波束的标识为显性指示时,第一波束的标识为“5”,第二波束的标识可以为“6”也可以为“1”。For example, when the identifier of the second beam is a dominant indication, the identifier of the first beam is “5”, and the identifier of the second beam may be “6” or “1”.
在该情况下,该第一波束的标识对应该第一波束对应的参考测量结果,即第一波束的标识为“5”,其对应的参考测量结果上对应的标识也为“5”,此时,第二波束的标识可以为“6”,其对应的测量结果上对应的标识也可以为“6”;或者,第二波束的标识为“1”,即第二波束的标识为相对于第一波束的标识的偏移量,其对应的测量结果上对应的标识也对应的为“1”。In this case, the identifier of the first beam corresponds to the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam, that is, the identifier of the first beam is “5”, and the corresponding identifier on the corresponding reference measurement result is also “5”. The identifier of the second beam may be “6”, and the identifier corresponding to the measurement result may also be “6”; or the identifier of the second beam is “1”, that is, the identifier of the second beam is relative to The offset of the identifier of the first beam, corresponding to the corresponding measurement result, is also corresponding to "1".
在又一个可能的实施例中,当第二波束的标识为隐性指示时,波束按照波束的编号递增或递减的顺序依次排列。需要说明的是,UE可以对多个波束进行编号的命名,确定多个波束的编号;或者,基站也可以将编号下发。例如:当编号为1,2,3…M时,对于组1,组2,组3…组M依次排列放在一个格式中进行上报;当编号为x,x+1…N时,对于组x,组x+1…组N依次排列放在一个格式中进行上报;或者,当编号为M,M-1,…1时,对于组M,组M-1…组1依次排列放在一个格式中进行上报;当编号为N,N-1…x时,对于组N,组N-1…组x依次排列放在一个格式中进行上报。In still another possible embodiment, when the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the beams are sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the number of the beams. It should be noted that the numbering of multiple beams may be performed by the UE to determine the number of multiple beams. Alternatively, the base station may also issue the number. For example, when the number is 1, 2, 3...M, for group 1, group 2, group 3... group M is arranged in a format for reporting; when the number is x, x+1...N, for group x, group x+1...group N are arranged in a format for reporting; or, when numbered M, M-1,...1, for group M, group M-1...group 1 is placed one after another The report is reported in the format; when the number is N, N-1...x, for the group N, the group N-1...the group x is sequentially arranged in a format for reporting.
在另一个可能的实施例中,当第二波束的标识为隐性指示时,波束按照波束的编号奇数升序或偶数升序的顺序依次排列。In another possible embodiment, when the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the beams are sequentially arranged in the order of the odd-numbered or even-order ascending order of the beam.
例如:当编号为1,2,3…M时,对于组1,组3,组5…组M(即如果M是奇数,则最后一个是组M;如果M是偶数,则最后一个是M-1)依次排列放在一个格式中进行上报,依次类推;或者,当编号为1,2,3…M时,对于组2,组4,组6…组M(即如果M是偶数,则最后一个是组M;如果M是奇数,则最后一个是M-1)依次排列放在一个格式中进行上报,依次类推。For example: when the numbers are 1, 2, 3...M, for group 1, group 3, group 5... group M (ie if M is odd, the last one is group M; if M is even, the last one is M -1) sorted in a format for reporting, and so on; or, when numbered 1, 2, 3...M, for group 2, group 4, group 6...group M (ie, if M is even, then The last one is group M; if M is odd, the last one is M-1) is arranged in a format for reporting, and so on.
在再一个可能的实施例中,当第二波束的标识为隐性指示时,波束按照波束的编号奇数降序或偶数降序的顺序依次排列。In still another possible embodiment, when the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the beams are sequentially arranged in the order of the odd-numbered descending order or the even-numbered descending order of the beam.
在再一个可能的实施例中,当第二波束的标识为隐性指示时,波束根据预设排列方式进行排列,即某个预设的序列设计对应的顺序。其中,预设排列方式是通过无线资源控制RRC信令或媒体访问控制信令从基站发送至UE;或者,将预设排列方式通过预先配置的方式配置在UE处。In still another possible embodiment, when the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the beams are arranged according to a preset arrangement, that is, a sequence corresponding to a preset sequence design. The preset arrangement is sent from the base station to the UE by using the radio resource control RRC signaling or the medium access control signaling; or the preset arrangement is configured at the UE in a pre-configured manner.
例如:当编号为1,2,3…M时,对于组1,组3,组5…组M,某个预设的序列设计可以是按照某种跳频序列进行的无序的设计。For example, when the numbers are 1, 2, 3...M, for group 1, group 3, group 5, group M, a predetermined sequence design may be an unordered design according to a certain frequency hopping sequence.
另外,以第一格式发送的UCI包括:波束的测量结果信息和波束的信息。具体地,根据波束的测量结果确定上报UCI的方式可以包括:In addition, the UCI transmitted in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam and information of the beam. Specifically, determining, according to the measurement result of the beam, the manner of reporting the UCI may include:
第一波束的测量结果,第一波束的标识,第二波束的测量结果以及第二波束的标识。其中,第一波束的测量结果为参考测量结果;第一波束的信息可以为显性或隐性指示;第二波束的信息也可以为显性或隐性指示。The measurement result of the first beam, the identification of the first beam, the measurement result of the second beam, and the identification of the second beam. The measurement result of the first beam is a reference measurement result; the information of the first beam may be a dominant or implicit indication; and the information of the second beam may also be a dominant or implicit indication.
在一个可能的实施例中,参考测量结果为最大编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果。第一波束的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第一波束的标识为显性指示时,第一波束的标识为第一波束的索引。第二波束的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第二波束的标识为隐性指示时,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号递减或递增的顺序依次排列。In a possible embodiment, the reference measurement result is the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the largest numbered beam. The identification of the first beam may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the first beam is a dominant indication, the identifier of the first beam is an index of the first beam. The identification of the second beam may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in descending or increasing order of the number of the beam.
在又一个可能的实施例中,参考测量结果为最小编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果。第一波束的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第一波束的标识为显性指示时,第一波束的标识为第一波束的索引。第二波束的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第二波束的标识为隐性指示时,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号递增或递减的顺序依次排列。In yet another possible embodiment, the measurement result is the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam of the smallest number. The identification of the first beam may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the first beam is a dominant indication, the identifier of the first beam is an index of the first beam. The identification of the second beam may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the number of the beam.
在另一个可能的实施例中,参考测量结果为中间编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果。第一波束的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第一波束的标识为显性指示时,第一波束的标识为第一波束的索引。第二波束的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第二波束的标识为隐性指示时,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号从最小编号开始递增,或从最大编号递减,或从中间编号递增到最大编号并从中间编号递减到最小编号,或从中间编号递减到最小编号并从中间编号递增到最大编号的顺序依次排列。In another possible embodiment, the reference measurement result is a measurement result of a beam corresponding to the intermediate numbered beam. The identification of the first beam may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the first beam is a dominant indication, the identifier of the first beam is an index of the first beam. The identification of the second beam may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam relative to the reference measurement is increased from the smallest number according to the number of the beam, or is decreased from the maximum number, or is incremented from the middle number to the maximum. The number is decremented from the middle number to the smallest number, or from the middle number to the lowest number and in order from the middle number to the largest number.
在再一个可能的实施例中,参考测量结果为具有最大测量值的波束对应的波束的测量结果。第一波束的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第一波束的标识为显性指示时,第一波束的标识为第一波束的索引。第二波束的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第二波束的标识为隐性指示时,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号递减或递增的顺序依次排列。In still another possible embodiment, the reference measurement result is a measurement result of a beam corresponding to the beam having the largest measurement value. The identification of the first beam may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the first beam is a dominant indication, the identifier of the first beam is an index of the first beam. The identification of the second beam may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in descending or increasing order of the number of the beam.
在再一个可能的实施例中,参考测量结果为具有最小测量值的波束对应的波束的测量结果。第一波束的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第一波束的标识为显性指示时,第一波束的标识为第一波束的索引。第二波束的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第二波束的标识 可以为隐性指示时,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号递增或递减的顺序依次排列。In still another possible embodiment, the reference measurement result is a measurement result of a beam corresponding to a beam having the smallest measurement value. The identification of the first beam may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the first beam is a dominant indication, the identifier of the first beam is an index of the first beam. The identification of the second beam may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the second beam may be an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the number of the beam.
在再一个可能的实施例中,参考测量结果为具有中间测量值的波束对应的波束的测量结果。第一波束的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第一波束的标识为显性指示时,第一波束的标识为第一波束的索引。第二波束的标识可以为显性或隐性指示。当第二波束的标识为隐性指示时,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号递增或递减的顺序依次排列。In still another possible embodiment, the reference measurement result is a measurement result of a beam corresponding to a beam having an intermediate measurement value. The identification of the first beam may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the first beam is a dominant indication, the identifier of the first beam is an index of the first beam. The identification of the second beam may be a dominant or implicit indication. When the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the number of the beam.
在再一个可能的实施例中,对大于预设门限值的波束的测量结果进行上报。其中,该预设门限值通过无线资源控制RRC信令或媒体访问控制信令从基站发送至UE;或者,将预设门限值通过预先配置的方式配置在UE处。波束的标识为显性指示。作为一种实施例,所述测量结果根据预设排列方式进行排列上报。预设排列方式可以是上述各方式中的任何依次排列的顺序。In still another possible embodiment, the measurement result of the beam larger than the preset threshold is reported. The preset threshold is sent from the base station to the UE by using radio resource control RRC signaling or media access control signaling; or the preset threshold is configured in the UE in a pre-configured manner. The identification of the beam is a dominant indication. As an embodiment, the measurement results are arranged and reported according to a preset arrangement manner. The preset arrangement may be any order in which each of the above modes is sequentially arranged.
例如:当测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量大于预设门限值时,测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照预设的排列方式进行排列;或者,当测量结果大于预设门限值时,测量结果按照预设的排列方式进行排列。For example, when the offset of the measurement result relative to the reference measurement result is greater than the preset threshold value, the offset of the measurement result relative to the reference measurement result is arranged according to a preset arrangement manner; or, when the measurement result is greater than the preset At the threshold value, the measurement results are arranged in a preset arrangement.
上述方法中,预设门限值和预设排列方式中的至少一种通过无线资源控制RRC信令和媒体访问控制信令中的至少一种信令从基站发送至UE;或者,将预设门限值和预设排列方式中的至少一种通过预先配置的方式配置在UE处。In the above method, at least one of the preset threshold value and the preset arrangement manner is sent from the base station to the UE by using at least one of radio resource control RRC signaling and media access control signaling; or, preset At least one of the threshold value and the preset arrangement is configured at the UE in a pre-configured manner.
此外,UE以第一格式发送的UCI还包括:用于测量的参考信号或作为所述波束的测量结果上报依据的参考信号中的至少一个。其中,参考信号包括:同步信号、同步信号资源标识、信道状态指示参考信号CSI-RS和CSI-RS资源标识中的至少一种。Furthermore, the UCI transmitted by the UE in the first format further includes at least one of a reference signal for measurement or a reference signal for reporting the measurement result of the beam. The reference signal includes at least one of a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier, a channel state indication reference signal CSI-RS, and a CSI-RS resource identifier.
基站可以根据上述UE发送的UCI对波束进行处理。The base station can process the beam according to the UCI sent by the UE.
需要说明的是,在上述三种可能的情况中,当第一波束中包括多个波束时,UE可以利用平均值算法根据多个波束,确定多个中的一个波束作为参考。It should be noted that, in the foregoing three possible cases, when multiple beams are included in the first beam, the UE may determine one of the multiple beams as a reference according to the multiple beams by using an average value algorithm.
上述所有的预设的,预配置的或预通知的,可以为通过RRC信令,或MAC信令从网络设备通知给UE,或者预先在UE处写好。All of the foregoing preset, pre-configured or pre-notified may be notified to the UE from the network device through RRC signaling, or MAC signaling, or written in advance at the UE.
上述所述的任何标识,或号都可,或索引都等同,可以互相替换。Any of the above-mentioned identifiers, or numbers, or indexes may be equivalent and may be replaced with each other.
要说明的是,上述基于波束组或波束的测量结果是否需要与混合自动重传请求(hybrid automatic repeat request,HARQ)复用(multiplexing),若需要则提前由基站配置给UE,以及相应的复用模式(multiplexing format)。例如:参数simultaneous HARQ and BMR(beam management result)由高层信令进行配置。当上述参数被配置为真实的(true)时,HARQ和波束管理的测量结果的复用被激活或被使能,上述所有高层信令为基站发送给UE的RRC信令,全文所述上报可以是周期性的,或基于事件触发的,或时间触发的周期性的。It should be noted that whether the above-mentioned beam group or beam-based measurement result needs to be hybridized with hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ), if necessary, is configured by the base station to the UE in advance, and the corresponding complex Use the multiplexing format. For example, the parameters simultaneous HARQ and BMR (beam management result) are configured by higher layer signaling. When the above parameters are configured to be true (true), the multiplexing of the measurement results of the HARQ and the beam management is activated or enabled, and all the high layer signaling is the RRC signaling sent by the base station to the UE. It is periodic, or based on event-triggered, or time-triggered periodicity.
当发生碰撞时遵循下述规则:当在与物理上行共享信道(physical uplink shared channel,PUSCH)进行传输的相同时间资源单位中,出现了一个周期性的波束测量结果汇报和HARQ-ACK,周期性的波束测量结果汇报可以与HARQ-ACK复用在同一时间资源单位的数据传输中(如PUSCH传输),条件是如果UE不被高层信令配置为可以进行同时的PUCCH和PUSCH的传输或者如果UE被高层配置参数simultaneous HARQ and BMR为临时的(false);若UE被高层信令配置为可以进行同时的PUCCH和PUSCH的传输,并且假如UE没有决定PUCCH format用于周期性的波束测量结果汇报和HARQ-ACK或者如果UE被高层配置参数simultaneous HARQ and BMR为false,那么HARQ-ACK被传输于PUCCH,周期性的CSI被传输于PUSCH;若UE被高层信令配置为可以进行同时的PUCCH和PUSCH的传输,并且假如UE决定了PUCCH format用于周期性的波束测量结果汇报和HARQ-ACK以及如果UE被高层配置参数simultaneous HARQ and BMR为true中的至少一个,那么周期性的波束测量结果汇报与HARQ-ACK被传输于PUCCH。When a collision occurs, the following rule is followed: when the same time resource unit is transmitted with the physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH), a periodic beam measurement report and HARQ-ACK occur, periodically. The beam measurement result report may be multiplexed with the HARQ-ACK in the data transmission of the same time resource unit (such as PUSCH transmission), if the UE is not configured by the higher layer signaling to perform simultaneous PUCCH and PUSCH transmission or if the UE The high-level configuration parameter simultaneous HARQ and BMR is temporary (false); if the UE is configured by the higher layer signaling to perform simultaneous PUCCH and PUSCH transmission, and if the UE does not determine the PUCCH format for periodic beam measurement report reporting and HARQ-ACK or if the UE is configured with the high-level configuration parameter simultaneous HARQ and BMR, then the HARQ-ACK is transmitted to the PUCCH, and the periodic CSI is transmitted to the PUSCH; if the UE is configured by the higher layer signaling, the simultaneous PUCCH and PUSCH can be performed. Transmission, and if the UE decides the PUCCH format for periodic beam measurement report and HARQ-ACK and as UE configured by higher layers simultaneous HARQ and BMR is true in at least one, then the beam periodically report measurement results of the HARQ-ACK is transmitted in the PUCCH.
图6为本发明实施例提供的基于波束组的一种终端的结构示意图。如图6所示,该终端具体可以包括:收发器610,用于根据上行控制信息UCI具有的第一格式发送UCI至无线接入网设备;其中,以第一格式发送的UCI包括:波束组的测量结果信息和波束组的信息中的至少一个,波束组包括:第一波束组和第二波束组,波束组的测量结果信息包括:第一波束组的测量结果和第二波束组的测量结果相对于第一波束组的测量结果的偏移量,第一波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果,波束组的信息用于指示,第一波束组的测量结果与第二波束组的测量结果中的至少一个所对应的波束组,该波束组为一个或多个波束组。其中,当第二波束组为多个时,该第二波束组的测量结果对应的波束组为多个分别对应的波束组,即第二波束组包括:第三波束组和第四波束组,此时,第二波束组的测量结果包括:第三波束组对应的测量结果和第四波束组对应的测量结果。需要说明的是,该第二波束组不仅限于包括第三波束组和第四波束组,还可以包括N个波束组,N为正整数。FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal based on a beam group according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 6, the terminal may include: a transceiver 610, configured to send, according to a first format that the uplink control information UCI has, a UCI to a radio access network device; where the UCI sent in the first format includes: a beam group At least one of the measurement result information and the beam group information, the beam group includes: a first beam group and a second beam group, and the measurement result information of the beam group includes: a measurement result of the first beam group and a measurement of the second beam group As a result, the measurement result of the first beam group is a reference measurement result, and the information of the beam group is used to indicate the measurement result of the first beam group and the measurement result of the second beam group. A beam group corresponding to at least one of the groups, the beam group being one or more beam groups. The second beam group includes a plurality of corresponding beam groups, and the second beam group includes: a third beam group and a fourth beam group, where the second beam group has a plurality of second beam groups. At this time, the measurement result of the second beam group includes: a measurement result corresponding to the third beam group and a measurement result corresponding to the fourth beam group. It should be noted that the second beam group is not limited to include the third beam group and the fourth beam group, and may further include N beam groups, where N is a positive integer.
上述终端还以包括:处理器620,用于当波束组为多个时,确定参考测量结果,具体用于:根据多个波束组的测量值确定参考测量结果;其中,在多个波束组的测量值中,具有最大测量值的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果;或者,具有最小测量值的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果;或者,具有中间测量值的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果。其中,波束组与波束组的测量结果具有一一对应性,即第一波束组有第一波束组的测量结果,或称之为第一波束组对应的第一波束组的测量结果,第一波束组的测量结果属于第一波束组,或第一波束组的测量结果对应的波束组为第一波束组;第二波束组有第二波束组的测量结果,或称之为第二波束组对应的第二波束组的测量结果,第二波束组的测量结果属于第二波束组,或第二波束组的测量结果对应的波束组为第二波束组。The foregoing terminal further includes: a processor 620, configured to determine a reference measurement result when the beam group is multiple, specifically, determining, according to the measurement values of the multiple beam groups, the reference measurement result; wherein, in the multiple beam groups Among the measured values, the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the largest measurement value is the reference measurement result; or the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest measurement value is the reference measurement result; or, with the intermediate measurement value The measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group is the reference measurement result. The measurement result of the beam group and the beam group has a one-to-one correspondence, that is, the first beam group has the measurement result of the first beam group, or the measurement result of the first beam group corresponding to the first beam group, first The measurement result of the beam group belongs to the first beam group, or the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the first beam group is the first beam group; the second beam group has the measurement result of the second beam group, or the second beam group The measurement result of the corresponding second beam group is that the measurement result of the second beam group belongs to the second beam group, or the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam group is the second beam group.
上述处理器620还用于,确定中间测量值,具体用于在多个波束组的测量值中,根据多个波束组的测量值计算的平均值;或者,根据最大测量值和最小测量值计算的平均值,确定中间测量值;或者,选取在多个波束组的测量值中居中分布的值为中间测量结果值。The processor 620 is further configured to determine an intermediate measurement value, where the average value is calculated according to the measured values of the multiple beam groups in the measured values of the multiple beam groups; or, according to the maximum measured value and the minimum measured value. The average value determines the intermediate measurement value; or, the value of the centered distribution among the measurement values of the plurality of beam groups is selected as the intermediate measurement result value.
上述处理器620还用于,当波束组为多个时,确定参考测量结果,具体用于根据波束 组的组号确定参考测量结果;其中,在多个波束组的组号中,具有最大组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果;或者,具有最小组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果;或者,具有中间组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果,其中,中间组号的波束组为多个波束组的组号中居中分布的组号所对应的波束组。The processor 620 is further configured to: when the number of the beam groups is multiple, determine a reference measurement result, where the reference measurement result is specifically determined according to the group number of the beam group; wherein the group number of the plurality of beam groups has the largest group The measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group is the reference measurement result; or the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the smallest group number is the reference measurement result; or the beam group corresponding to the beam group having the intermediate group number The measurement result is a reference measurement result, wherein the beam group of the intermediate group number is a beam group corresponding to the group number of the medium distribution among the group numbers of the plurality of beam groups.
上述波束组的信息,包括:第一波束组的测量结果与第二波束组的测量结果中的至少一个所对应的波束组的标识,其中,波束组的标识为参考测量结果所属的第一波束组的波束组标识和相对于参考测量结果的偏移量所属的第二波束组的波束组标识中至少一个。The information of the beam group includes: an identifier of a beam group corresponding to at least one of a measurement result of the first beam group and a measurement result of the second beam group, where the identifier of the beam group is the first beam to which the reference measurement result belongs At least one of the beam group identification of the group and the beam group identification of the second beam group to which the offset relative to the reference measurement result belongs.
上述处理器620还用于,确定当第二波束组的标识为显性指示时,第二波束组的标识为第二波束组的标识本身;或者,第二波束组的标识为相对于第一波束组的标识的偏移量。The processor 620 is further configured to: when the identifier of the second beam group is an explicit indication, the identifier of the second beam group is the identifier of the second beam group; or the identifier of the second beam group is relative to the first The offset of the identity of the beam group.
上述处理器620还用于,确定当第二波束组的标识为隐性指示时,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号递增或递减的顺序依次排列;或者,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号奇数升序或偶数升序的顺序依次排列;或者,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号奇数降序或偶数降序的顺序依次排列;或者,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量根据预设排列方式进行排列。The processor 620 is further configured to: when the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group relative to the reference measurement result is sequentially or sequentially decreased according to the group number of the beam group. Or arranging; or, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group relative to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of odd or ascending order of the group number of the beam group; or the measurement result of the second beam group is compared with the reference measurement result The offsets are sequentially arranged in the order of odd or descending order of the group number of the beam group; or, the offsets of the measurement results of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result are arranged according to a preset arrangement.
上述处理器620还用于,确定当第二波束组的标识为隐性指示时,第一波束组对应的参考测量结果为最大组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号递减的顺序依次排列;或者,第一波束组对应的参考测量结果为最小组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果,第二波束组的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号递增的顺序依次排列;或者,对大于预设门限值的波束组的测量结果根据预设排列方式进行排列。The processor 620 is further configured to: when the identifier of the second beam group is an implicit indication, the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam group is the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group of the largest group number, and the second beam group The measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of decreasing the group number of the beam group with respect to the offset of the reference measurement result; or the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam group is the measurement result of the beam group corresponding to the beam group of the smallest group number, The measurement result of the second beam group is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing the group number of the beam group, or the measurement result of the beam group larger than the preset threshold value is arranged according to a preset arrangement manner. .
上述预设门限值和预设排列方式中的至少一种通过无线资源控制RRC信令和媒体访问控制信令中的至少一种信令从无线接入网设备发送至终端;或者,将预设门限值和预设排列方式中的至少一种通过预先配置的方式配置在终端处。At least one of the preset threshold value and the preset arrangement manner is sent from the radio access network device to the terminal by using at least one of radio resource control RRC signaling and media access control signaling; or, At least one of the threshold value and the preset arrangement manner is configured at the terminal by a pre-configured manner.
上述收发器610还用于,从无线接入网设备接收指示信息,指示信息,用于指示处理器是否使用第一波束组作为参考或者使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考上报UCI。The transceiver 610 is further configured to receive indication information from the radio access network device, where the indication information is used to indicate whether the processor uses the first beam group as a reference or uses the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference to report the UCI.
上述当指示信息用于指示处理器使用第一波束组作为参考时,指示信息还可以包括:确定第一波束组的方法;当指示信息用于指示处理器使用第一波束组的测量结果作为参考时,指示信息还可以包括:确定第一波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果的方法。When the indication information is used to indicate that the processor uses the first beam group as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method for determining a first beam group; and when the indication information is used to instruct the processor to use the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference. The indication information may further include: a method of determining a measurement result of the first beam group as a reference measurement result.
上述指示信息还用于,指示UCI中是否包括波束组的标识或只包含波束组的标识。The foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the identifier of the beam group or the identifier of only the beam group is included in the UCI.
上述指示信息还用于,指示波束组的测量结果所对应的波束组的标识被显性指示或者隐性指示。The indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the beam group is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
上述指示信息还用于,指示收发器以第一格式发送的UCI中包括:波束组的测量结果信息与混合自动重传请求HARQ复用或者HARQ复用格式。The indication information is further used to indicate that the UCI sent by the transceiver in the first format includes: the measurement result information of the beam group and the hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ multiplexing or the HARQ multiplexing format.
上述指示信息还用于,指示用于测量的参考信号或作为波束组的测量结果上报依据的参考信号;其中,参考信号包括:同步信号、同步信号资源标识,信道状态指示参考信号CSI-RS或CSI-RS资源标识中的至少一种。The indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or a reference signal as a basis for reporting a measurement result of the beam group; wherein, the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier, a channel state indication reference signal CSI-RS or At least one of CSI-RS resource identifiers.
图7为本发明实施例提供的基于波束的一种终端的结构示意图,如图7所示,该终端具体可以包括:收发器710,用于根据上行控制信息UCI具有的第一格式发送UCI至无线接入网设备;其中,以第一格式发送的UCI包括:波束的测量结果信息和波束的信息中的至少一个,波束包括:第一波束和第二波束,波束的测量结果信息包括:第一波束的测量结果和第二波束的测量结果相对于第一波束的测量结果的偏移量,第一波束的测量结果为参考测量结果,波束的信息用于指示,第一波束的测量结果与第二波束的测量结果中的至少一个对应的波束中的一个或多个波束,该波束可以为一个或多个波束。其中,当第二波束为多个时,该第二波束的测量结果对应的波束为多个分别对应的波束,即第二波束包括:第三波束和第四波束,此时,第二波束的测量结果包括:第三波束对应的测量结果和第四波束对应的测量结果。需要说明的是,该第二波束不仅限于包括第三波束和第四波束,还可以包括N个波束组,N为正整数。FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a beam-based terminal according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 7, the terminal may further include: a transceiver 710, configured to send UCI according to a first format that the uplink control information UCI has a radio access network device, wherein the UCI transmitted in the first format includes: at least one of a measurement result information of a beam and information of a beam, where the beam includes: a first beam and a second beam, and the measurement result information of the beam includes: The measurement result of one beam and the measurement result of the second beam are offset with respect to the measurement result of the first beam, the measurement result of the first beam is a reference measurement result, and the information of the beam is used to indicate that the measurement result of the first beam is One or more of the at least one of the measurements of the second beam, the beam may be one or more beams. Wherein, when the second beam is multiple, the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam is a plurality of respectively corresponding beams, that is, the second beam includes: a third beam and a fourth beam, and at this time, the second beam The measurement result includes: a measurement result corresponding to the third beam and a measurement result corresponding to the fourth beam. It should be noted that the second beam is not limited to include the third beam and the fourth beam, and may also include N beam groups, where N is a positive integer.
上述终端还以包括:处理器720,用于当波束为多个时,确定参考测量结果,具体用于:根据多个波束的测量值确定参考测量结果;其中,在多个波束的测量值中,具有最大测量值的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果;或者,具有最小测量值的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果;或者,具有中间测量值的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果。其中,波束与波束的测量结果具有一一对应性,即第一波束有第一波束的测量结果,或称之为第一波束对应的第一波束的测量结果,第一波束的测量结果属于第一波束,或第一波束的测量结果对应的波束为第一波束;第二波束有第二波束的测量结果,或称之为第二波束对应的第二波束的测量结果,第二波束的测量结果属于第二波束,或第二波束的测量结果对应的波束为第二波束。The foregoing terminal further includes: a processor 720, configured to determine a reference measurement result when the beam is multiple, specifically, determining, according to the measured values of the multiple beams, the reference measurement result; wherein, in the measurement values of the multiple beams The measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the largest measurement value is the reference measurement result; or the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the smallest measurement value is the reference measurement result; or the measurement of the beam corresponding to the beam with the intermediate measurement value The result is a reference measurement result. The measurement result of the beam and the beam has a one-to-one correspondence, that is, the first beam has a measurement result of the first beam, or a measurement result of the first beam corresponding to the first beam, and the measurement result of the first beam belongs to the first The beam corresponding to the measurement result of the first beam or the first beam is the first beam; the second beam has the measurement result of the second beam, or the measurement result of the second beam corresponding to the second beam, and the measurement of the second beam The result belongs to the second beam, or the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the second beam is the second beam.
上述处理器720还用于,确定中间测量值,具体用于在多个波束的测量值中,根据多个波束的测量值计算的平均值;或者,根据最大测量值和最小测量值计算的平均值,确定中间测量值;或者,选取在多个波束的测量值中居中分布的值为中间测量结果值。The processor 720 is further configured to determine an intermediate measurement value, specifically, an average value calculated according to the measured values of the multiple beams in the measured values of the multiple beams; or an average calculated according to the maximum measured value and the minimum measured value. The value determines the intermediate measurement value; or, the value of the centered distribution among the measurements of the plurality of beams is selected as the intermediate measurement result value.
上述处理器720还用于,当波束为多个时,确定参考测量结果,具体用于根据波束的编号确定参考测量结果;其中,在多个波束的编号中,具有最大编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果;或者,具有最小编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果;或者,具有中间编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果为参考测量结果,其中,中间编号的波束为多个波束的编号中居中分布的编号所对应的波束。The processor 720 is further configured to: when a plurality of beams are used, determine a reference measurement result, where the reference measurement result is specifically determined according to the number of the beam; wherein, among the numbers of the multiple beams, the beam corresponding to the beam with the largest number is used. The measurement result is the reference measurement result; or the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the smallest number is the reference measurement result; or the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam with the middle number is the reference measurement result, wherein the middle numbered beam The beam corresponding to the number of the centered distribution among the numbers of the multiple beams.
上述波束的信息,包括:第一波束的测量结果与第二波束的测量结果中的至少一个所对应的波束的标识,其中,波束的标识为参考测量结果所属的第一波束的波束标识和相对于参考测量结果的偏移量所属的第二波束的波束标识波束中至少一个。The information about the beam includes: a beam identifier corresponding to at least one of a measurement result of the first beam and a measurement result of the second beam, where the identifier of the beam is a beam identifier and a relative of the first beam to which the reference measurement result belongs At least one of beam identification beams of the second beam to which the offset of the reference measurement result belongs.
上述处理器720还用于,确定当第二波束的标识为显性指示时,第二波束的标识为第二波束的标识本身;或者,第二波束的标识为相对于第一波束的标识的偏移量。The processor 720 is further configured to: when the identifier of the second beam is a dominant indication, the identifier of the second beam is the identifier of the second beam; or the identifier of the second beam is the identifier of the first beam. Offset.
上述处理器720还用于,确定当第二波束的标识为隐性指示时,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号递增或递减的顺序依次排列;或者,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号奇数升序或偶数升序的顺序依次排列;或者,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号奇数降序或偶数降序的顺序依次排列;或者,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量根据预设排列方式进行排列。The processor 720 is further configured to: when the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of increasing or decreasing the number of the beam; or The offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of odd or ascending order of the beam number; or the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is according to the number of the beam The order of the odd descending order or the even descending order is sequentially arranged; or, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is arranged according to a preset arrangement manner.
上述处理器720还用于,确定当第二波束的标识为隐性指示时,第一波束对应的参考测量结果为最大编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号递减的顺序依次排列;或者,第一波束对应的参考测量结果为最小编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果,第二波束的测量结果相对于参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号递增的顺序依次排列;或者,对大于预设门限值的波束的测量结果根据预设排列方式进行排列。The processor 720 is further configured to: when the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam is the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the largest numbered beam, and the measurement result of the second beam is relative to the reference. The offset of the measurement result is sequentially arranged in descending order of the number of the beam; or the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam is the measurement result of the beam corresponding to the beam of the smallest number, and the measurement result of the second beam is compared with the reference measurement result The offsets are sequentially arranged in the order of increasing the number of the beams; or, the measurement results of the beams larger than the preset threshold are arranged according to a preset arrangement.
上述预设门限值和预设排列方式中的至少一种通过无线资源控制RRC信令和媒体访问控制信令中的至少一种信令从无线接入网设备发送至终端;或者,将预设门限值和预设排列方式中的至少一种通过预先配置的方式配置在终端处。At least one of the preset threshold value and the preset arrangement manner is sent from the radio access network device to the terminal by using at least one of radio resource control RRC signaling and media access control signaling; or, At least one of the threshold value and the preset arrangement manner is configured at the terminal by a pre-configured manner.
上述收发器710还用于,从无线接入网设备接收指示信息,指示信息,用于指示处理器是否使用第一波束作为参考或者使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考上报UCI。The transceiver 710 is further configured to receive indication information from the radio access network device, where the indication information is used to indicate whether the processor uses the first beam as a reference or uses the measurement result of the first beam as a reference to report the UCI.
上述当指示信息用于指示处理器使用第一波束作为参考时,指示信息还可以包括:确定第一波束的方法;当指示信息用于指示处理器使用第一波束的测量结果作为参考时,指示信息还可以包括:确定第一波束的测量结果为参考测量结果的方法。When the indication information is used to indicate that the processor uses the first beam as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method for determining the first beam; and when the indication information is used to instruct the processor to use the measurement result of the first beam as a reference, the indication The information may further include: a method of determining a measurement result of the first beam as a reference measurement result.
上述指示信息还用于,指示UCI中是否包括波束的标识或只包括波束的标识。The foregoing indication information is further used to indicate whether the identifier of the beam or the identifier of only the beam is included in the UCI.
上述指示信息还用于,指示波束的测量结果所对应的波束的标识被显性指示或者隐性指示。The indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the beam is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
上述指示信息还用于,指示收发器以第一格式发送的UCI中包括:波束的测量结果信息与混合自动重传请求HARQ复用或者HARQ复用格式。The indication information is further used to indicate that the UCI sent by the transceiver in the first format includes: measurement result information of the beam and hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ multiplexing or HARQ multiplexing format.
上述指示信息还用于,指示用于测量的参考信号或作为波束的测量结果上报依据的参考信号;其中,参考信号包括:同步信号、同步信号资源标识,信道状态指示参考信号CSI-RS或CSI-RS资源标识中的至少一种。The indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or a reference signal as a basis for measuring a measurement result of the beam; wherein the reference signal includes: a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier, a channel state indication reference signal CSI-RS or CSI - at least one of the RS resource identifiers.
本发明实施例提供的方法,根据指示消息对分组后的波束组或波束进行测量,确定测量结果。其中,波束分组或波束分组有助于减少波束管理的成本。同时,解决毫米波系统中的基于波束分组的上行控制信息上报的问题,实现了对于分组后波束组或波束的测量通过上行控制信息的上报,合理运用资源以及减少上报的间接费用。The method provided by the embodiment of the present invention performs measurement on the grouped beam group or beam according to the indication message, and determines the measurement result. Among them, beam grouping or beam grouping helps to reduce the cost of beam management. At the same time, the problem of reporting the uplink control information based on the beam packet in the millimeter wave system is solved, and the measurement of the beam group or the beam after the packet is reported by the uplink control information, the resource is used reasonably, and the overhead of reporting is reduced.
专业人员应该还可以进一步意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、计算机软件或者二者的结合来实现,为了清楚地说明硬件 和软件的可互换性,在上述说明中已经按照功能一般性地描述了各示例的组成及步骤。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。A person skilled in the art should further appreciate that the elements and algorithm steps of the various examples described in connection with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented in electronic hardware, computer software, or a combination of both, in order to clearly illustrate hardware and software. Interchangeability, the composition and steps of the various examples have been generally described in terms of function in the above description. Whether these functions are performed in hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the solution. A person skilled in the art can use different methods to implement the described functions for each particular application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of the present application.
本领域普通技术人员可以理解实现上述实施例方法中的全部或部分步骤是可以通过程序来指令处理器完成,所述的程序可以存储于计算机可读存储介质中,所述的存储介质是非短暂性(non-transitory)介质,例如随机存取存储器,只读存储器,快闪存储器,硬盘,固态硬盘,磁带(magnetic tape),软盘(floppy disk),光盘(optical disc)及其任意组合。It will be understood by those skilled in the art that all or part of the steps of the above embodiments may be implemented by a program, and the program may be stored in a computer readable storage medium, which is non-transitory. (non-transitory) media, such as random access memory, read only memory, flash memory, hard disk, solid state disk, magnetic tape, floppy disk, optical disc, and any combination thereof.
以上,仅为本申请较佳的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到的变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应该以权利要求的保护范围为准。The above is only a preferred embodiment of the present application, but the scope of protection of the present application is not limited thereto, and any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed by the present application. All should be covered by the scope of this application. Therefore, the scope of protection of the present application should be determined by the scope of protection of the claims.

Claims (32)

  1. 一种数据传输的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for data transmission, comprising:
    终端根据上行控制信息UCI具有的第一格式发送所述UCI至无线接入网设备;Transmitting, by the terminal, the UCI to the radio access network device according to the first format that the uplink control information UCI has;
    其中,以所述第一格式发送的所述UCI包括:波束组的测量结果信息和所述波束组的信息中的至少一个,所述波束组包括:第一波束组和第二波束组,所述波束组的测量结果信息包括:所述第一波束组的测量结果和所述第二波束组的测量结果相对于所述第一波束组的测量结果的偏移量,所述第一波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果,所述波束组的信息用于指示,第一波束组的测量结果与第二波束组的测量结果中的至少一个所对应的波束组。The UCI sent in the first format includes: at least one of measurement result information of a beam group and information of the beam group, where the beam group includes: a first beam group and a second beam group, where The measurement result information of the beam group includes: a measurement result of the first beam group and an offset of a measurement result of the second beam group with respect to a measurement result of the first beam group, the first beam group The measurement result is a reference measurement result, and the information of the beam group is used to indicate a beam group corresponding to at least one of the measurement result of the first beam group and the measurement result of the second beam group.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一波束组包括:所述波束组中具有最大测量值对应的波束组;或者,具有最小测量值对应的波束组;或者,具有中间测量值对应的波束组。The method according to claim 1, wherein the first beam group comprises: a beam group having a largest measured value corresponding to the beam group; or a beam group having a minimum measured value; or The beam group corresponding to the measured value.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述中间测量值包括:所述波束组的测量值计算的平均值;或者,根据所述最大测量值和所述最小测量值计算的平均值;或者,所述波束组的测量值中居中分布的值。The method according to claim 2, wherein the intermediate measurement value comprises: an average value of the measured value calculation of the beam group; or an average value calculated according to the maximum measured value and the minimum measured value Or, a value of the centered distribution among the measured values of the beam set.
  4. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一波束组包括:所述波束组中具有最大波束组的组号对应的波束组;或者,具有最小波束组的组号对应的波束组;或者,具有中间组号对应的波束组。The method according to claim 1, wherein the first beam group comprises: a beam group corresponding to a group number of the beam group having the largest beam group; or a beam corresponding to the group number of the smallest beam group Group; or, a beam group corresponding to the intermediate group number.
  5. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述波束组的信息,包括:所述第一波束组的测量结果与第二波束组的测量结果中的至少一个所对应的波束组的标识,其中,所述波束组的标识为所述参考测量结果所属的第一波束组的波束组标识和相对于所述参考测量结果的偏移量所属的第二波束组的波束组标识中至少一个。The method according to claim 1, wherein the information of the beam group comprises: an identifier of a beam group corresponding to at least one of a measurement result of the first beam group and a measurement result of a second beam group And the identifier of the beam group is at least one of a beam group identifier of the first beam group to which the reference measurement result belongs and a beam group identifier of the second beam group to which the offset of the reference measurement result belongs .
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,当第二波束组的标识为显性指示时,所述第二波束组的标识为第二波束组的标识本身;或者,所述第二波束组的标识为相对于所述第一波束组的标识的偏移量。The method according to claim 5, wherein when the identifier of the second beam group is a dominant indication, the identifier of the second beam group is the identity of the second beam group; or the second beam The identity of the group is an offset from the identity of the first beam set.
  7. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,当第二波束组的标识为隐性指示时,所述第二波束组的测量结果相对于所述参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束组的组号递增或递减的顺序依次排列;或者,The method according to claim 5, wherein when the identifier of the second beam group is implicitly indicated, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group relative to the reference measurement result is according to a beam group The order of increasing or decreasing the group number is in order; or,
    所述第二波束组的测量结果相对于所述参考测量结果的偏移量按照所述波束组的组号奇数升序或偶数升序的顺序依次排列;或者,The offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of odd or ascending order of the group number of the beam group; or
    所述第二波束组的测量结果相对于所述参考测量结果的偏移量按照所述波束组的组号奇数降序或偶数降序的顺序依次排列;或者,The offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of odd or descending order of the group number of the beam group; or
    所述第二波束组的测量结果相对于所述参考测量结果的偏移量根据预设排列方式进 行排列。The offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is arranged according to a preset arrangement.
  8. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,当第二波束组的标识为隐性指示时,所述第一波束组对应的参考测量结果为最大组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果,所述第二波束组的测量结果相对于所述参考测量结果的偏移量按照所述波束组的组号递减的顺序依次排列;或者,The method according to claim 5, wherein when the identifier of the second beam group is implicitly indicated, the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam group is the measurement of the beam group corresponding to the beam group of the largest group number. As a result, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in descending order of the group number of the beam group; or
    所述第一波束组对应的参考测量结果为最小组号的波束组对应的波束组的测量结果,所述第二波束组的测量结果相对于所述参考测量结果的偏移量按照所述波束组的组号递增的顺序依次排列;或者,The reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam group is a measurement result of a beam group corresponding to a beam group of a minimum group number, and the offset of the measurement result of the second beam group with respect to the reference measurement result is according to the beam The group number of the group is in ascending order; or
    对大于预设门限值的所述波束组的测量结果根据预设排列方式进行排列。The measurement results of the beam group greater than the preset threshold are arranged according to a preset arrangement.
  9. 根据权利要求7或8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述预设门限值和所述预设排列方式中的至少一种通过无线资源控制RRC信令和媒体访问控制信令中的至少一种信令从无线接入网设备发送至终端;或者,The method according to claim 7 or 8, wherein at least one of the preset threshold value and the preset arrangement mode controls at least one of RRC signaling and media access control signaling by radio resources. A signaling is sent from the radio access network device to the terminal; or,
    将预设门限值和所述预设排列方式中的至少一种预置在所述终端处。At least one of a preset threshold value and the preset arrangement is preset at the terminal.
  10. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述终端根据上行控制信息UCI具有的第一格式发送所述UCI至无线接入网设备的步骤之前,还包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein before the step of the terminal transmitting the UCI to the radio access network device according to the first format that the uplink control information UCI has, the method further includes:
    所述终端从所述无线接入网设备接收指示信息,所述指示信息,用于指示所述终端是否使用第一波束组作为参考或者使用所述第一波束组的测量结果作为参考上报UCI。The terminal receives the indication information from the radio access network device, where the indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal uses the first beam group as a reference or uses the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference to report the UCI.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述指示信息用于指示所述终端使用所述第一波束组作为参考时,所述指示信息还可以包括:确定所述第一波束组的方法;The method according to claim 10, wherein when the indication information is used to indicate that the terminal uses the first beam group as a reference, the indication information may further include: determining the first beam group Methods;
    当所述指示信息用于指示所述终端使用所述第一波束组的测量结果作为参考时,所述指示信息还可以包括:确定所述第一波束组的测量结果为参考测量结果的方法。When the indication information is used to indicate that the terminal uses the measurement result of the first beam group as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method for determining that the measurement result of the first beam group is a reference measurement result.
  12. 根据权利要求10或11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述指示信息还用于,指示所述UCI中是否包括所述波束组的标识或只包含所述波束组的标识。The method according to claim 10 or 11, wherein the indication information is further used to indicate whether the identifier of the beam group or only the identifier of the beam group is included in the UCI.
  13. 根据权利要求10-12任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述指示信息还用于,指示所述波束组的测量结果所对应的波束组的标识被显性指示或者隐性指示。The method according to any one of claims 10 to 12, wherein the indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam group corresponding to the measurement result of the beam group is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
  14. 根据权利要求10-13任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述指示信息还用于,指示所述终端以所述第一格式发送的所述UCI中包括:所述波束组的测量结果信息与混合自动重传请求HARQ复用或者所述HARQ复用格式。The method according to any one of claims 10-13, wherein the indication information is further used to: indicate that the UCI sent by the terminal in the first format comprises: the measurement of the beam group The result information is hybrid HARQ multiplexing with the hybrid automatic repeat request or the HARQ multiplexing format.
  15. 根据权利要求10-14任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述指示信息还用于,指示用于测量的参考信号或作为所述波束组的测量结果上报依据的所述参考信号;其中,所述参考信号包括:同步信号、同步信号资源标识,信道状态指示参考信号CSI-RS或所述CSI-RS资源标识中的至少一种。The method according to any one of claims 10-14, wherein the indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal used for measurement or the reference signal as a basis for reporting a measurement result of the beam group; The reference signal includes at least one of a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier, a channel status indication reference signal CSI-RS, or the CSI-RS resource identifier.
  16. 一种数据传输的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for data transmission, comprising:
    终端根据上行控制信息UCI具有的第一格式发送所述UCI至无线接入网设备;Transmitting, by the terminal, the UCI to the radio access network device according to the first format that the uplink control information UCI has;
    其中,以所述第一格式发送的所述UCI包括:波束的测量结果信息和所述波束的信息中的至少一个,所述波束包括:第一波束和第二波束,所述波束的测量结果信息包括:第一波束的测量结果和第二波束的测量结果相对于第一波束的测量结果的偏移量,所述第一波束的测量结果为参考测量结果,所述波束的信息用于指示,第一波束的测量结果与第二波束的测量结果中的至少一个所对应的波束。The UCI sent in the first format includes at least one of measurement result information of a beam and information of the beam, where the beam includes: a first beam and a second beam, and the measurement result of the beam The information includes: a measurement result of the first beam and an offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the measurement result of the first beam, where the measurement result of the first beam is a reference measurement result, and the information of the beam is used to indicate a beam corresponding to at least one of a measurement result of the first beam and a measurement result of the second beam.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一波束包括:所述波束中具有最大测量值对应的波束;或者,具有最小测量值对应的波束;或者,具有中间测量值对应的波束。The method according to claim 16, wherein the first beam comprises: a beam corresponding to a largest measured value among the beams; or a beam having a minimum measured value; or having an intermediate measured value corresponding to Beam.
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述中间测量值包括:所述波束的测量值计算的平均值;或者,根据所述最大测量值和所述最小测量值计算的平均值;或者,所述波束的测量值中居中分布的值。The method according to claim 17, wherein the intermediate measurement value comprises: an average value of the measured value calculation of the beam; or an average value calculated according to the maximum measured value and the minimum measured value; Or a value that is centered in the measured values of the beam.
  19. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一波束包括:所述波束中具有最大波束的编号对应的波束;或者,具有最小波束的编号对应的波束;或者,具有中间编号对应的波束。The method according to claim 16, wherein the first beam comprises: a beam corresponding to a number of the largest beam among the beams; or a beam corresponding to the number of the smallest beam; or, having a middle number corresponding Beam.
  20. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述波束的信息,包括:所述第一波束的测量结果与第二波束的测量结果中的至少一个所对应的波束的标识,其中,所述波束组的标识为所述参考测量结果所属的第一波束的波束标识和相对于所述参考测量结果的偏移量所属的第二波束的波束标识中至少一个。The method according to claim 16, wherein the information of the beam comprises: an identifier of a beam corresponding to at least one of a measurement result of the first beam and a measurement result of a second beam, where The identifier of the beam group is at least one of a beam identifier of the first beam to which the reference measurement result belongs and a beam identifier of the second beam to which the offset of the reference measurement result belongs.
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的方法,其特征在于,当第二波束的标识为显性指示时,所述第二波束的标识为第二波束的标识本身;或者,所述第二波束的标识为相对于所述第一波束的标识的偏移量。The method according to claim 20, wherein when the identifier of the second beam is a dominant indication, the identifier of the second beam is the identity of the second beam; or the identifier of the second beam is An offset from the identity of the first beam.
  22. 根据权利要求20所述的方法,其特征在于,当第二波束的标识为隐性指示时,所述第二波束的测量结果相对于所述参考测量结果的偏移量按照波束的编号递增或递减的顺序依次排列;或者,The method according to claim 20, wherein when the identifier of the second beam is implicitly indicated, the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement is increased according to the number of the beam or The order of decreasing is arranged in order; or,
    所述第二波束的测量结果相对于所述参考测量结果的偏移量按照所述波束的编号奇数升序或偶数升序的顺序依次排列;或者,The offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of odd or ascending order of the number of the beam; or
    所述第二波束的测量结果相对于所述参考测量结果的偏移量按照所述波束的编号奇数降序或偶数降序的顺序依次排列;或者,The offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in the order of odd or descending order of the number of the beam; or
    所述第二波束的测量结果相对于所述参考测量结果的偏移量根据预设排列方式进行排列。The offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is arranged according to a preset arrangement manner.
  23. 根据权利要求20所述的方法,其特征在于,当第二波束的标识为隐性指示时,所述第一波束对应的参考测量结果为最大编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果,所述第二波束的测量结果相对于所述参考测量结果的偏移量按照所述波束的编号递减的顺序依次排列;或者,The method according to claim 20, wherein when the identifier of the second beam is an implicit indication, the reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam is a measurement result of a beam corresponding to the largest numbered beam, the The offset of the measurement result of the two beams with respect to the reference measurement result is sequentially arranged in descending order of the number of the beam; or
    所述第一波束对应的参考测量结果为最小编号的波束对应的波束的测量结果,所述第二波束的测量结果相对于所述参考测量结果的偏移量按照所述波束的编号递增的顺序依次排列;或者,The reference measurement result corresponding to the first beam is a measurement result of a beam corresponding to the beam of the smallest number, and the offset of the measurement result of the second beam with respect to the reference measurement result is increased according to the number of the beam Arrange in order; or,
    对大于预设门限值的所述波束的测量结果根据预设排列方式进行排列。The measurement results of the beams larger than the preset threshold are arranged according to a preset arrangement.
  24. 根据权利要求22或23所述的方法,其特征在于,所述预设门限值和所述预设排列方式中的至少一种通过无线资源控制RRC信令和媒体访问控制信令中的至少一种信令从无线接入网设备发送至终端;或者,The method according to claim 22 or 23, wherein at least one of the preset threshold value and the preset arrangement mode controls at least one of RRC signaling and media access control signaling by radio resources. A signaling is sent from the radio access network device to the terminal; or,
    将预设门限值和所述预设排列方式中的至少一种预置在所述终端处。At least one of a preset threshold value and the preset arrangement is preset at the terminal.
  25. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述终端根据上行控制信息UCI具有的第一格式发送所述UCI至无线接入网设备的步骤之前,还包括:The method according to claim 16, wherein before the step of the terminal transmitting the UCI to the radio access network device according to the first format that the uplink control information UCI has, the method further includes:
    所述终端从所述无线接入网设备接收指示信息,所述指示信息,用于指示所述终端是否使用第一波束作为参考或者使用所述第一波束的测量结果作为参考上报UCI。The terminal receives the indication information from the radio access network device, where the indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal uses the first beam as a reference or uses the measurement result of the first beam as a reference to report the UCI.
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述指示信息用于指示所述终端使用所述第一波束作为参考时,所述指示信息还可以包括:确定所述第一波束的方法;The method according to claim 25, wherein when the indication information is used to indicate that the terminal uses the first beam as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method for determining the first beam ;
    当所述指示信息用于指示所述终端使用所述第一波束的测量结果作为参考时,所述指示信息还可以包括:确定所述第一波束的测量结果为参考测量结果的方法。When the indication information is used to indicate that the terminal uses the measurement result of the first beam as a reference, the indication information may further include: a method of determining that the measurement result of the first beam is a reference measurement result.
  27. 根据权利要求25或26所述的方法,其特征在于,所述指示信息还用于,指示所述UCI中是否包括所述波束的标识或只包括所述波束的标识。The method according to claim 25 or 26, wherein the indication information is further used to indicate whether the identifier of the beam or the identifier of the beam is included in the UCI.
  28. 根据权利要求25-27任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述指示信息还用于,指示所述波束的测量结果所对应的波束的标识被显性指示或者隐性指示。The method according to any one of claims 25-27, wherein the indication information is further used to indicate that the identifier of the beam corresponding to the measurement result of the beam is explicitly indicated or implicitly indicated.
  29. 根据权利要求25-28任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述指示信息还用于,指示所述终端以所述第一格式发送的所述UCI中包括:所述波束的测量结果信息与混合自动重传请求HARQ复用或者所述HARQ复用格式。The method according to any one of claims 25 to 28, wherein the indication information is further used to: indicate that the UCI sent by the terminal in the first format includes: a measurement result of the beam Information and hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ multiplexing or the HARQ multiplexing format.
  30. 根据权利要求25-29任意一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述指示信息还用于,指示用于测量的参考信号或作为所述波束的测量结果上报依据的所述参考信号;其中,所述参考信号包括:同步信号、同步信号资源标识,信道状态指示参考信号CSI-RS或所述CSI-RS资源标识中的至少一种。The method according to any one of claims 25 to 29, wherein the indication information is further used to indicate a reference signal for measurement or the reference signal as a basis for reporting the measurement result of the beam; And the reference signal includes: at least one of a synchronization signal, a synchronization signal resource identifier, a channel status indication reference signal CSI-RS, or the CSI-RS resource identifier.
  31. 一种计算机可读存储介质,包括指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如权利要求1-15和16-30中任意一项所述的方法。A computer readable storage medium comprising instructions which, when executed on a computer, cause the computer to perform the method of any of claims 1-15 and 16-30.
  32. 一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如权利要求1-15和16-30中任意一项所述的方法。A computer program product comprising instructions which, when run on a computer, cause the computer to perform the method of any of claims 1-15 and 16-30.
PCT/CN2018/105614 2017-09-18 2018-09-14 Transmission control method WO2019052518A1 (en)

Priority Applications (8)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US16/648,129 US11336358B2 (en) 2017-09-18 2018-09-14 Transmission control method
JP2020515962A JP6993500B2 (en) 2017-09-18 2018-09-14 Transmission control method
KR1020207010804A KR102339913B1 (en) 2017-09-18 2018-09-14 Transmission Control Method
AU2018331742A AU2018331742B2 (en) 2017-09-18 2018-09-14 Transmission control method
CA3076154A CA3076154C (en) 2017-09-18 2018-09-14 Transmission control method
KR1020217040650A KR102444385B1 (en) 2017-09-18 2018-09-14 Transmission control method
EP18856580.8A EP3675577A4 (en) 2017-09-18 2018-09-14 Transmission control method
JP2021200052A JP7227336B2 (en) 2017-09-18 2021-12-09 Transmission control method

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201710840597.4 2017-09-18
CN201710840597 2017-09-18
CN201810016078.0 2018-01-08
CN201810016078 2018-01-08
CN201810180592.8 2018-03-05
CN201810180592.8A CN109526058B (en) 2017-09-18 2018-03-05 Method for data transmission and computer readable storage medium

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019052518A1 true WO2019052518A1 (en) 2019-03-21

Family

ID=65722412

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2018/105614 WO2019052518A1 (en) 2017-09-18 2018-09-14 Transmission control method

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2019052518A1 (en)

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20170086195A1 (en) * 2015-09-18 2017-03-23 Lg Electronics Inc. Method of transmitting channel state information and apapratus therefor
CN106851675A (en) * 2017-02-03 2017-06-13 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 A kind of management method of wave beam group, base station and terminal

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20170086195A1 (en) * 2015-09-18 2017-03-23 Lg Electronics Inc. Method of transmitting channel state information and apapratus therefor
CN106851675A (en) * 2017-02-03 2017-06-13 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 A kind of management method of wave beam group, base station and terminal

Non-Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
LENOVO: "DL beam measurement and reporting", 3GPP TSG RAN WG1 #90 R1-1712671, 25 August 2017 (2017-08-25), XP051315484 *
See also references of EP3675577A4 *
SPREADTRUM COMMUNICATIONS: "On L1-RSRP report for beam management", 3GPP TSG RAN WG1 MEETING #90 R1-1713050, 25 August 2017 (2017-08-25), XP051315859 *

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN107113648B (en) Methods and apparatus for CSI measurement configuration and reporting on unlicensed spectrum
US10306589B2 (en) Hybrid reference signals for wireless communication
EP3273737B1 (en) Wireless base station, user terminal, wireless communication system, and wireless communication method
EP3902359A1 (en) User terminal, radio base station and radio communication method
CN112005571A (en) Electronic device and method for beam fault recovery
EP3968717A1 (en) User terminal and radio communication method
EP3709701A1 (en) User terminal and wireless communication method
WO2012111625A1 (en) Aperiodic channel state information reporting method, wireless base station device, and user terminal
KR20210138769A (en) Communication method and device
AU2018379172B2 (en) User terminal and radio communication method
US11178679B2 (en) User terminal and radio communication method
US11452099B2 (en) User terminal and radio communication method
EP3496487B1 (en) User equipment and radio communication method
EP3758427B1 (en) User terminal, wireless base station, and wireless communications method
JP7227336B2 (en) Transmission control method
CN110870239A (en) Common PDCCH configuration
WO2019053901A1 (en) User terminal and wireless communication method
WO2019052518A1 (en) Transmission control method
WO2018206113A1 (en) Indication of beams for wireless communication

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 18856580

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 3076154

Country of ref document: CA

Ref document number: 2020515962

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2018856580

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20200323

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2018331742

Country of ref document: AU

Date of ref document: 20180914

Kind code of ref document: A